Home

Agile PLM for Process Global Specification Management User Guide

1. Category mo Category Available Spec 5090356 _ Issue 001 Sub Category pe catan Aves egor No Category Available Status Group pjo Category Available Effective Monday July 20 2009 Inactive Originator Smith Carol Last Edit Monday July 20 2009 Composition Map Spec Name Yield Available Yield Consumed Vinegar Distilled White 100 Grain 1 00000 kg 1 00000 kg 100 00000 21 5077413 001 Packaging Composition Map Spec Name Yield Available Yield Consumed The output dialog displays the output created from the formulation specification It contains the following tabs e Summary Described below at Summary Tab on page 6 50 Yield Described below at Yield Tab on page 6 53 Composition Described below at Composition Tab on page 6 56 e Nutrition Described below at Nutrition Tab on page 6 59 Compliance Described below at Compliance Tab on page 6 61 Ext Data Described below at Ext Data Tab on page 6 62 6 49 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Summary Tab The Summary tab shown in figure 6 48 above shows the identity information about the output including name specification number and specification issue number If the output is owned the tab shows the workflow status of the parent formulation specification If the output is referenced the tab shows the status from the ingredient specification The Summary tab contains the following sections e Summary
2. Individual foods Salt Free must meet criterion for Sodium Free Less than 5 mg per reference amount anc per labeled serving ATTENTION Lists no ingredient that contains sodium chloride or generally understood to contain sodium except if the ingredient listed in the ingredient statement has an asterisk that refers to footnote e g adds a trivial amount of sodium Cholesterol Low Total Fat Low Lite or Light Cholesterol Free Sodium Reduced Less Sodium Light in Sodium Total Fat 100 Fat Free Total Fat Reduced Less Saturated Fat Low Cholesterol Reduced Less Sugar Reduced Less Lite or Light w Calories disclosure Mo Mo CM Mo Mo No Mo No 8 12 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 8 Nutrient Profiles Label Composition Tab Ext Data Tab Related Specs Tab Ifyou have created a label composition in the Listed Ingredient Order LIO tool and have transferred it to the nutrient profile then this tab displays the label composition Note Depending on your configuration you may not see this tab Label Composition the sole section in the Label Composition tab displays the composition of the specification for labeling purposes This information can be pushed to the nutrient profile from the LIO process The data pushed to the Nutrient Profile is read only Figure 8 10 Label Composition section Label Composition Item Formulation BLEN
3. This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding LIO profiles Topics in this chapter include E U O O O Page Level Functions Summary Tab LIO Construction Tab Final Statement Tab Label Composition Tab Overview Listed Ingredient Order LIO is the tool for labeling administrators to Q View a food or beverage item based on its aggregated labeling composition Q Manage the labeling composition to meet regulatory requirements using stored rules or manual overrides A Generate and push the final ingredient statement to a nutrient profile and or an ingredient specification so that the broader organization can further augment and complete the labeling business process LIO uses ingredient specification s percent breakdown and or combined ingredient statement to describe labeling composition This information can be presented using the top level output or the complete formulation and ingredient specifications hierarchy to better understand and label a given item The LIO Profile page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 18 2 LIO Construction Tab on page 18 3 Final Statement Tab on page 18 19 Label Composition Tab on page 18 20 Cov O 18 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions Summary Tab LIO Profile Section In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affe
4. Done Cancel LI Orange Flavor 123 5080091 00 1 Sugar Granulated 5077505 001 water Carbonated 5077462 00 1 Select the input item s you are designating an alternate for and then click Done The dialog box closes and your selections are added to the Alternate Input Items grid Provide additional details for the alternate item using the fields defined above You can now continue to the Output Items and Alternate Output Items subsections These sections apply to the entire step and are independent of the Bill of Material and Packaging subtabs Output Items Sub Section The Output Items subsection displays all the outputs that come from the current step This sub section is especially important if you need to model disassembly i e You place an orange in a machine and the results are an orange peel orange slices and orange juice In this example the orange is an input and the remaining items are outputs Figure 6 29 Output Items subsection Material Qty Process G L WaterG L Yid 5o Step EXT Cost step 2 Output 5090432001 La 0 00000 lb 1 00000 1 00000 0 00000 lb 0 00 0 00000 HE Internal Total 0 00000 lb 0 00000 lb Add New 6 30 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Key fields include Material The name of the output When the user clicks on the document icon L GSM displays the Output dialog box shown in figure 6 48 below The Output dia
5. Storage Instructions ad The Tare Weight section for a packaging material or printed packaging specification is shown in the figure below Use this section to define the mass to unit count conversion In addition UOM Conversions can define tare weight Please note that the Tare Weight fields must be populated in addition to the UOM Conversion fields for this to calculate properly Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 11 2 Tare Weight section Tare Weight E Tare Weight 3 ig Mper s uit vl From within a trade specification Packaging Attributes section click the hyperlinked Tare Weight field label to have GSM calculate the appropriate tare weight as shown in the figure below If you have supplied the net weight GSM can also calculate the gross weight of the product net weight tare weight Figure 11 3 Portion of a trade specification Packing Attributes section showing the hyperlinked Tare Weight field label Packaging Attributes Consumer Unit Packaging Type Ring Yariable Weight a Label Yolume 0 024 024 Container Net Weight I kW e z Tare Weight Gross Weight oe w Inner Pack Inner Pack Label Text acre Delicious BBO Beef Length Maitn Product Dimensions PP lin lo Compliance Tab The Compliance tab contains the compliance data related to a packaging material specification It has the following sections a Extended Attributes For discussion of
6. 6 18 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Figure 6 15 Edit Adjusted Cost dialog box Edit Adjusted Cost Done Close Ingredients Mame ADJ Cost oo 025000 uso y 100 0000 y y S077462 001 0 10000 USD yw 100 000 o ea 0 03000 USD y 100 000 z G ad gu Packaging Additional Tools Found in the Input Grid a Steps lIf steps have been defined then the user can assign a given material to the step in which it will be used Please note the grid will refresh and reorder materials based on the step assigned a Annotations You can click the annotations icon 2 to add BOM annotations Added annotations display in read mode and are included in printing a Context When an ingredient is added to the Input grid as a material and the ingredient itself is the output of another formulation specification an additional field will appear This field allows the user to directly associate this input to the formulation that created it Context is important because it provides the link between formulas Context impacts e Formulation Printing If context is not defined then the exploded BOM will not present lower level formulations Integration When integrating formulation data through APIs or other forms of integration context provides the link to formulas a Basis A tool used to capture overrides to input ingredient data fields The overrides are specific to a giv
7. Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing a delivered material packing specification please see Printing Other Specifications on page 2 19 Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN_RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS This tab contains the following sections a a Summary Information section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 Packing Description section Described below at Packing Description Section on page 14 2 A Approved for Use In section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 P
8. 2 Inthe Target Specifications table check the box next to each specification to replace and then click Run Global Succession The tool replaces all selected specifications with the new specification and reloads the page showing the checked specifications and a status of Complete as shown in figure 21 8 below Run Global Succession Figure 21 8 After a successful global succession request Succession Request Request Number 5000107 New Specification Bun Fresh Glo To Supersede Bun Fresh US pi Tar ico Specific Status Complete Target Specifications Spec Name v4s0rc3 Mer 480rc3 Mer 480rc3 Mer vi Menu R v481 Menu R 431 Menu F copy of v48 The checked boxes represent specifications that have been replaced The boxes are now dimmed indicating the succession request is complete To replace more specifications run another global succession 21 6 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features Verifying the Succession To verify that the change has been made 1 Find one of the targeted specifications in GSM as explained in the procedure beginning on page 21 3 2 Click the Approval Audit Trail tab 3 Look in the Event History table for a notation stating that the global succession was executed as shown in figure 21 9 below Figure 21 9 Approval Audit Trail tab Event History section showing a record of a successful global succession frm 508
9. Add New Reference this Activity on the above Specifications d 3 Follow the same steps as in the procedure for specification dependent activities as described above step 2 through step 6 keeping in mind that a specification independent activity contains no Primary Action Item section Searching for an Activity From the Activities option on the left navigation panel you can also search for an existing activity To search for an existing activity 1 Click Activities on the left navigation menu The Activities search page loads 2 From the leftmost drop down list select a key field to search on 20 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 3 From the middle drop down list select an operator for example Contains Equals or Starts With 4 Inthe rightmost drop down list select a search term either by typing or by using the subsearch dialog box that is available if an add data icon F appears to the left of the field 5 Under the search form click Search GSM runs the query and reloads the page showing your search results in a Search Results section 6 Click the hyperlinked activity number of the activity to view GSM opens the activity page defaulting to the Summary tab Note For more detailed guidance on using the search form please see Understanding the Search Form on page 1 4 Summary Tab The Activity Summary tab contains the following sections a Activity Summary Discussed below a
10. Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 6 24 Figure 6 19 Process Summary panel summary Formulation Process Ext Data Related Specs CSS Process Summary E Step Details ss e Step 2 Consumer Prep 7 Subtabs ar Instructions Bill of Materials Packaging The following icons are used in process navigation Add data icon Adds a step New steps are reflected on the Formulation tab e Edit icon Puts process navigation in edit mode allowing you to delete a step using the delete icon if the step meets the delete step criteria or reorder steps using the up and down arrow icons When process navigation is in edit mode you cannot select a different step to display in the Step Details section Interacting With The Step Details Section This section represents the area where we will collect and present the most detail regarding an individual manufacturing step Figure 6 20 Step Details section i Step Details Step Name Step 1 Consumer Prep C Instructions Key Fields Step Name The name of the step Consumer Prep Indicates whether the step is a consumer preparation step The purpose for marking a step as consumer preparation is that it allows you to perform additional modeling using the external or referenced outputs created by the formulation The standard use case is cereal and milk The external output for a given formulation is cereal However the industry usually
11. Facility Name Company Name Country F Centersville Facility Feedmont Foods USA Add New The Formulation Tab is useful for Q Building entire formulations from scratch a Viewing All input items associated with the formulation The total number of steps and descriptive data related to steps Processing step assigned to a given input material Input quantities input yield and relative percentages All output items internal external and referenced a Updating most aspects of the ingredient bill of materials outputs and processing steps The Formulation tab was designed to help users build formulations faster Therefore some functions such as defining multiple outputs and re sequencing steps must be performed using the Process Tab It is also important to note that many of the features available on the Formulation tab are also available on the Process tab Therefore it is recommended that users interact with both tabs to determine which best fits their needs when creating formulations Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Inputs Section Adding Materials To The Inputs Grid There are two primary methods for adding materials to the inputs grid The two approaches are 1 Adding Materials Allows the user to add multiple BOM items using a search window 2 Adding Rows And Then Using Auto Complete Allows the user to add one or many rows and then enter the information about th
12. Key fields include Storage Requirements Click the hyperlinked field label to display a dialog box from which you can choose the storage requirements from a list of options This section is for describing the shelf life relevant to this specification Figure 4 14 Shelf Life section Shelf Life Shelf Life 4 11 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Packaging Materials Section In this section you can describe the packaging associated with this specification by associating and categorizing packaging and printed packaging specifications Figure 4 15 Packaging Materials section Packaging Materials ERP System Pkg Type Packaging Material Specification Units Scrap Factor F Intermediate Carton Paper Board Frozen Meal 7 x 1x9 1 00000 units 1 00000 5077540 00 1 Add New Key fields include ERP System This enables you to select the relevant cross reference from the system so that the system s equivalent package identification number can be seen along with the Agile PLM for Process number Changing this selection toggles the presentation of that equivalent number but the preference is not stored as part of the specification Pkg Type Enables you to categorize how the packaging is applied to this item for example whether it is considered inner intermediate or outer packaging Alternate Packaging Section In this section you can describe the alternate packaging associated with this specificati
13. Save If you need to locate a specification from within a large database the most efficient tool to use is the search form We recommend that you use the Category tab if you would like to Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Get a global view of what other specifications and categories exist Gain a better understanding of where your desired specification fits in within the larger hierarchy Get a quick view of how many specifications comprise a grouping Get a quick view of the type of specifications in a grouping To locate a specification using the Category tab 1 Open GSM and click any specification type in the left navigation panel The main search form screen appears 2 Click on the Category tab as shown in figure 1 14 on page 1 18 The Category tab page displays showing the first level list of categories relevant to your selected specification type as shown in figure 1 14 below Figure 1 14 Category tab default first level view Trade Specifications Category Search WW No Category Available Beverages Bread and Bakery Products 4 Cereal Grain and Pulse Products 4 Confectionary and Sugar Sweetening Products l Dairy Fruits eqgetables Nuts and Sweets Meat Poultry and Game Oils and Fats Edible WW Prepared and Preserved Foods Seafood Seasonings Preservatives and Extracts 3 Click the category of the specification that you are looking for The categ
14. e ea R Agile PLM for AT III IR E E IR muns e mm fe OT powes y Sstemeasedroes Temas Global Specification Management User Guide About This Manual Table 1 Agile PLM for Process documentation topics by source continued GSM Admin Information type User User NON Release Agile Help Agile Notes A Desk sales rep User User management Using the tc application Workflow management o o Document Conventions The following formatting elements appear in Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process documentation Element Meaning Helvetica Condensed A user interface UI element that a procedure is instructing 9 pt bold type you to click select or type into For example buttons or text entry fields 10 pt monospace File names or directory names font Blue italic font The linked portion of a cross reference Click it to go to the referenced heading table or figure Minion Typeface A named UI element that a procedure is describing but not Title Case instructing you to click select or type into Alerts you to supplemental information Note Minion 11 5 pt with faint blue bar over amp under Alerts you to possible data loss breaches of security or other l nr more serious problems Caution Minion 11 5 pt with faint red bar over amp under Alerts you to supplementary information that is essential to the completion of a task Important Minion 11 5 pt with thic
15. 0 00000 Th Carton Paper Board Frozen Meal 7 x 1 25 x 9 5077540 001 0 00000 4 Corrugated Case 1 5077482 001 0 00000 lt p Use the up and down arrow icons if to change the order of input items and then click Done GSM closes the dialog box and the new sort order is reflected in the Inputs grid Calculate Click to perform a manual calculation 6 39 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Ext Data Tab The Ext Data tab includes the following sections Q Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 a Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 Related Specs Tab The Related Specs tab contains the following sections Q Trade Specifications section Discussed below at Trade Specifications Section on page 6 40 a Associated Specifications section For discussion of this field please see Associated Specifications Section on page 3 9 a Master Specifications section For discussion of this field please see Master Specifications Section on page 3 9 Trade Specifications Section The Trade Specifications section contains the list of trade specifications linked to a formulation specification Figure 6 41 Trade Specifications section Trade Specifications Spec Spec Name 5085734 001 Tomato Puree CSS Tab For discussion of this tab please see CSS Tab o
16. 4 Fruits egetables Nuts and Sweets Meat Poultry and Game Lt Meat Poultry and Game Prepared and Processed Meat Poultry and Game Unprepared and Unprocessed Meat and Poultry and Game Unprepared and Unprocessed Frozen i Hag riri i r urng it E Om Li Beef and Ve Dinner 11 2980 001 LILIA 4 Meat and Poultry and Game Unprepared and Unprocessed Perishable 4 Oils and Fats Edible Prepared and Preserved Foods Seafood i Seasonings Preservatives and Extracts 5 Click your hyperlinked specification The specification opens the Summary tab of the full specification specific information screen Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 2 Working with Specifications This chapter presents guidance on using workflows and other common features of Global Specification Management Topics in this chapter include a Creating Specifications a Managing Specifications a Comparing Ingredient Specifications a Printing Specifications Creating Specifications Creating a New Specification All specification types have the same creation process in Global Specification Management GSM To create a specification 1 On the left navigation panel click the specification type GSM displays the specification search page for that specification type 2 Click Create New at the upper right of the page A specification page opens with empty fields 3 Follow the guidelines for your desir
17. 5 Total 37 00000 lb 37 00000 lb 100 0000 13 12057 251 3861 l Add New Consume from Step IT Order Items Calculate Figure 6 23 Packaging subtab Bill of Materials Packaging Input Items m Packaging Material Specification Pkg Type Qty Scrap Factor Yid Do Step Yo Batch USD 100q EXT Cost 5077540 00 1 ob EL Carton Paper Board Frozen Meal 7x 125 of 0 00000 Ib 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 5 5086808 001 Total 5 00000 lb 5 00000 Ib 100 00000 50 00000 0 00000 Add New Order Items Calculate Bill Of Materials Sub Tab At initial glance the Bill Of Materials Grid appears very similar to the Formulation tab s Input Section It is important to note that all aspect of this grid relate only to one step in the overall formulation In this portion of the document we will describe how to use the Bill Of Materials grid to organize and present data related to the step Key sub sections Input Items Described below in Input Items Sub Section on page 6 27 Alternate Input Items Described below in Alternate Input Items Sub Section on page 6 29 Output Items Described below in Output Items Sub Section on page 6 30 6 26 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Alternate Output Items Described below in Alternate Output Items Sub Section on page 6 36 Input Items Sub Section Adding Materials To The Input Items Sub Section For the most part adding materials to
18. 5091 133 001 Extended Attributes Extended Attributes Notes Countries Sold To USA Figure 2 22 Trade specification cover sheet sample s acia YA ATA BBQ Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz 5077539 001 Packaging Engineering Review Cover Sheet 03 Oct 2004 Prepared By Summary Information Spec Name BBO Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz shorn Name BRO Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 az Spec Status Packaging Engineering Review Please attach correct packaging BOM and unit load Category Meat Poultry and Game Spec 5077539 Sub Category Meat Poultry and Game Prepared and Processed issue 001 Group Meat Poultry and Game Prepared and Processed Frozen Effective 03 Oct 2004 Originator Inactive Supercedes New tem Last Edit 29 Apr 2009 Reason for Change Documentation Version Status Dependent Specficabon s Effective Date BBO Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz 03 Oct 2004 Packaging trd 5077539 001 Engineenng Review Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 2 16 As shown in figure 2 22 above the cover sheet includes the following information e Specification name and number e Status of the specification and all dependent specifications e Effective date of the specification and all dependent specifications Name of the preparer Name of the specification if any that this specification supersedes Packaging Hierarchy The Packaging Hierarchy section contains a list of
19. Associated Specifications section Associated Specifications System ID USBPLS wt Specification Association Comments Sweet Water 2 o X ABE 3 Process Specification ABC Granulated Sugar Sucrose frm 5077415 001 Alternate Master Specifications Section In this section you can explicitly connect the specification to one or more master specifications Figure 3 10 Master Specifications section Master Specifications Explicitly set Spec Spec Name F 5077412 001 Allergen Disclosure None F 5077453 001 Shelf Life Extension OCP 1 620 Implicitly set not 5081969 001 Finished Good Checklist ae 5081966 002 Juice Standards 3 9 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Note Specifications can have both explicit associations with master specifications defined by the relationship here and implicit associations with master specifications by which the relationship is defined on the master specification See Chapter 17 Master Specifications for more Information CSS Tab The sole section in the CSS content synchronization and syndication tab Initial Publication contains the list of publications related to the specification You can create initial publications only from within GSM Using the CSS application you can syndicate these publications to an internal or external target system Once created these publications can be managed on the CSS tab of the specification or they can be managed inside the
20. Complies With From Spec 7 20 2009 Overrides Allergens Known to Contain From Spec 7 20 2009 Overrides May Contain From Spec 7 20 2009 Overrides Does not contain From Spec 7 20 2009 Overrides Additives Known to Contain From Spec 7 20 2009 Overrides May Contain From Spec 7 20 2009 Overrides Does not contain From Spec 7 20 2009 Overrides Intolerances Known to Contain From Spec 7 20 2009 Overrides May Contain From Spec 7 20 2009 Overrides Does not contain From Spec 7 20 2009 Overrides Key sections in the Compliance tab include e Complies With e Allergens e Additives e Intolerances 6 47 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Adding Complies With Information You can add new Complies With items by clicking the add data icon F A multiselect dialog box opens with available Complies With items listed on the left side If compliance items are currently in the specification the dialog box lists them in the box on the left side as shown in figure 6 47 below Figure 6 47 Complies With dialog box Done Cancel A complies with item Coeliac Halal Identity Preserved 1509000 compliant Juice complies with Kosher Kosher dairy Kosher Meat Kosher Mehadrin Kosher Mehadrin Passover Kosher Parve Kosher Passover Kosher Pulses Kitniot Note Complies With items are positive by default and can only be made negative
21. Depending on your configuration this column may not appear Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Status The workflow step that the object is in for example draft developmental draft review requested for certification and others RAG SLA A visual representation of the status of your action item RAG red amber and green dates as shown below Figure 2 4 Red amber green RAG symbols y Late Red Needs Attention Amber Normal Green Note Ifthe RAG status is Late the amber approaching deadline and red deadline dates appear immediately after the red late symbol Figure 2 5 The Action Items page GSM Action Items Spec Y Title Type APD Project Status RAG SLA 5084076 001 Sweet WateFClick on any column n re A E ar 26 2008 heading to sort action items Mar 28 2008 s5080971 001 Orange Pulp by that column ant Review F specications 5080197 001 Equipment spec 1 Equipment Requested For Specifications Certification S0680194 001 Equipment Spec 2 Equipment Requested For Specifications Certification S060196 001 Equipment Spec 3 Equipment Requested For Specifications Certification 5080193 001 Equipment spec 4 Equipment Requested For Specifications Certification 5080195 001 Equipment Spec 5 Equipment Requested For Specifications Certification 5083916 001 Orange Juice hl Pre OFficial Apr 25 20017 Specifications Apr 26 2007 5077433 002 Be
22. Do NOT Declare Click this option to not disclose this item in the LIO Items marked as Do NOT Declare will not appear in the final ingredient statement 18 15 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process LIO Operations During the LIO process you can perform a number of operations using the row of buttons beneath the LIO tree view shown in figure 18 13 below Figure 18 13 LIO Operations buttons Refresh Preview Alias Grouping Audit Refresh Operation For performance reasons many of the declaration options and actions are not executed immediately within the LIO tree view Click Refresh to perform multiple actions before posting the tree view back to the server for rendering Once a Declaration Option Action has been selected the affected LIO item will be flagged to inform you that a change will occur upon the next refresh When you click Refresh GSM posts the tree view back to the server for processing and re renders it to reflect the desired changes Preview Operation When you click Preview GSM opens a dialog box with a table in it shown in figure 18 14 below This table indicates the order in which each LIO item will appear in the final ingredient statement Figure 18 14 Preview Done Preview 2 WotfVield Per Serving Declared As 1 44 65500 0 11164 lb Beef Lean Finely Textured 2 19 96649 0 04992 lb Water Carbonated 3 16 25000 0 04063 lb Pork Trimmings Raw 72 Lean 4 4 970
23. Figure 18 8 Reconstitute Items moisture Reconstitute Items Done Cancel Reconstitute Item Target Water Yield Total Solids Water Water colt Granular 0 00000 0 182 100 00000 0 00000 g 0 00000 4 0 Water w Source Item Using From Yield Total Solids Water Yo Water XBB po 5 54545 9 98 00000 0 34586 q 2 00000 From this dialog box you can manually adjust the moisture content for the selected item To do so first define a target Water or Factor and then declare one or more items from which to source the moisture If one or more conversion factors have been previously defined for the current item you can access select a predefined factor by clicking the import data icon El which GSM will display to the right of the field in the Reconstitute Item column Click the icon to open the dialog box shown in figure 18 9 below Figure 18 9 Reconstitution Equivalency Reconstitution Equivalency Reconstitution Equivalency Options Item Name Target Yo Factor Comments Lycopene slurry 80 00000 Water The Reconstitution Equivalency Options for a given item are managed within the item s corresponding LIO profile GSM will use the selected factor target to populate the matrix as shown in figure 18 10 below 18 11 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 18 10 Reconstitute Items with Source Item table Reconstitute Items Done Cancel Reconstitute Item Target Water Yi
24. NutrientComposionSectol suis yd A e ASES 6 59 Compre ab o aro oda aos 6 61 EXD ta Wa to dy 6 62 Custom Sections ECU v4 5 karn n EA aaa aes 6 64 SHIP DOS 6 Ania dint tase at i ee ahd oe anes daa a za 6 64 Opt es 6 65 Treet SPECICATION Sec il ed 6 66 Constramts Secure UA RRA EOS 6 67 Tiered nt CO a A e A O iaa 6 70 INDIE DIC OM CEI sentaron iS 6 71 Extended Atr Dees srie A Da 6 72 OUCH sets claras dde di ao inde 6 72 Guidelines Section id s 6 73 Optimization Method Sections scsi ii o ds A 6 74 Fotmulati n COMA aia oi rasa 6 74 Constans COMME S A N A E 6 74 Distribution Colla add A a diia dees R ee dns 6 74 Optimiza ton Achion BUtlONS ori a ie 6 77 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Chapter 7 Menu Item Specifications OV EVA E E LORE IS arts 7 1 Pase Level PUNCHONS lapa A E Ras 7 2 Suances wee Oa ae iia asis 7 3 Menu Hem Description sec sta a da A ado hee wee 7 3 Bud anda a caba ea 7 4 Menu tera Build Secos eta oido dd did daa dada ia aes one do 7 4 Alternate Products Menu Items Section spoilers rico rica id 7 4 Packasino Tabo in di a A o a E ns 7 5 Packasine Materials Seccion aia DAA eatneeaneas 7 5 Alternate Packacing Sec UOT dera A Acad 7 5 Compliance Lab A A AA AS SAS 7 6 FabeLClamis SECO aia laa EI TI A Ai 7 6 Label Claims Determination sai da AAA A ei 7 7 Related Specs La Dc ltd ae o Heth dab ah ce aaa dildo bid ane ae al 7 10 Global Regional Standard SO DAA ASA A 7 10 Iter Mate otandards eco aii
25. OLS is configured on To add an attachment to a document 1 Click Add New below the attachments table The Attachment Details dialog box displays as shown in figure 3 15 on page 3 15 2 Complete the following fields as shown in table 3 2 below Table 3 2 Attachment Detail fields Field Definition Owner sd Owner of the attachment Tile Title of the attachment Effective Effective date of the attachment Inactive Inactive Inactive date of the attachment of the attachment Publish to A Portal A this box if you want to publish the attachment on Supplier Portal Proprietary Check this box to prevent the attachment from being exposed in Supplier Portal or from being printed 3 14 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections 3 Attach the file by clicking Browse to search for the file and then click Upload 4 Click Done on the Attachment Details dialog box and then click Done on the Attachment Procedures page 5 Click Save Figure 3 15 Attachment Details dialog box Attachment Detail Done Owner Sally Jenkins person domain com Effective Friday July 03 7009 Inactive _ Publish to Supplier Portal Proprietary Attached files Size AO EA Upload Upload limit on the File size 11 MB _Upload URL Figure 3 16 URL Detail dialog box URL Detail Done Cancel Effective Friday July 03 2009 Inactive You can store a URL link as a docu
26. Packaging Attributes Traded Unit Eeen n Product Type Variable Weight F Units Per Case ae Number of Layers Cases Pallet g5 Length iol Volume once a e p A Leng n actA i Het Volume Pallet Size I M Net Weight Gross Weight bo Palei Gross Weight iv Palet TaLi A Coding MFG CODE 121223 23 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Trade Specifications Key fields include Packaging Type Click the hyperlinked field label to choose a packaging type from a list of available types Product Type Choose a product type by selecting from a list of available types Stacking Height Section In this section you can describe the stacking height information relevant to this specification This section appears when the item type is a traded unit Figure 4 12 Stacking Height section Stacking Height Mode Stacking Height 40 Warehouse Stacking Height Key fields include Mode Stacking Height Enter the number of levels that the product can be stacked Warehouse Stacking Height Enter the number of units that can be stacked in warehouse storage Storage Requirements Section Shelf Life Section This section is for describing the storage requirements relevant to this specification Figure 4 13 Storage Requirements section Storage Requirements Storage Requirements Frozen Minimum Storage Temp 10 Celsius Maximum Storage Temp 15 Celsus B
27. This field is configurable to either e Allow users to link the formulation specification to a project defined in NPD or e Enter free text to describe the project in an appropriate manner Substitute Restrictions Links to a multi select dialog box containing substitute restrictions Chosen restrictions filter the list of available substitutes that will be presented while designing This field is only available when the specification is in a workflow status that is marked with a system action of Designable If a formulation specification is not marked with any substitute restrictions all substitutes defined for raw materials in the BOM are available for design use Ifa formulation specification is marked with a USDA restriction only substitutes marked with a restriction of USDA will be available for design use Description An appropriate definition or explanation of the formulation specification It is common for the description to describe what the formulation is producing and occasionally methods used during production 6 9 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Facility Information Section Formulation Tab 6 10 The Facility Information section contains the list of facilities linked to a formulation specification This information is useful for identifying plants that use or are approved to use a given formulation when performing production Figure 6 2 Facility Information section Facility Information
28. To import nutritional data from an ingredient specification 1 Click Edit at the upper right of the page to put the specification in edit mode 2 Click Import and select Ingredient in the drop down list 3 Search and select the item to import A dialog box displays a list of nutrients and their values from the ingredient specification s nutrient composition 4 Select the nutrients to import and click Done The nutrient profile displays the selected nutrients along with their values To import nutritional data from the Food Composition Library 1 Click Edit at the upper right of the page to put the specification in edit mode 2 Click Import and select Food Composition Library in the drop down list 3 Search and select the item to import A dialog box displays a list of nutrients and their values 4 Select the nutrients to import and click Done The nutrient profile displays the selected nutrients along with their values To import nutritional data from another nutrient profile 1 Click Edit at the upper right of the page to put the specification in edit mode 2 Click Import and select Nutrient Profile in the drop down list 3 Search and select the item to import A dialog box displays a list of nutrients and their values 4 Select the nutrients to import and click Done The nutrient profile displays the selected nutrients along with their values To import nutrient analysis or nutrient composites from the Nutrition Surveillance Management app
29. Total Solids gt 0 00000 Composition The aliasing dialog box provides you with options for aliasing based on the labeling rules of each item derived from its corresponding Component Catalog Profile and its disclosures GSM filters disclosure options based on matching restrictions and displays them in order of priority also defined within the FIC Profile See Chapter 22 Component Catalog for more information Grouping Operation Click Grouping to display the grouping dialog box shown in figure 18 16 below Figure 18 16 Grouping dialog box Done Cancel Grouping Target Group LIO Item Priority Constraints Onion Group Onion Salt 2 04750 Reg 0 00000 Total Solids fromPIcCProfile fic 1000046 lt 100 00000 Total Solids gt 0 00000 Composition Test Group O flavors 2 04750 Yo Reg gt 0 00000 Total Solids fromFICProfile lt 100 00000 Total Solids gt 0 00000 Composition 18 17 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 18 17 Audit Operation Audit History The grouping dialog box provides you with options for grouping based on each the labeling rules of each item derived from its corresponding FIC Profile and its groupings GSM filters grouping options based on matching restrictions and displays them in order of priority also defined within the FIC Profile See Chapter 22 Component Catalog for more information Note You can manually group LIO items using the drag and dr
30. Yes Yes All hierarchies are listed using the top level specification to represent the hierarchy For any hierarchy listed you can click on the hierarchy investigation icon to display a popup window listing all specifications in the hierarchy that will be issued Take notice of the Issued column which will state whether the specification will be issued or not based on the get latest revision setting on the specification 7 Click the checkbox next to the hierarchies to issue and then click Done The dialog box closes and selected specifications appear in the Smart Issue Action List The Action List represents all of the hierarchies that will be issued when the smart issue request is performed You can now perform the smart issue as described in Exporting the Affected Specifications on page 21 21 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features To replace a specification based on a parent specification 1 From the Type drop down list select Replace Specification Given Parent as shown in figure 21 20 below Figure 21 20 Replace Specification Given Parent option Ra Save Save amp Close Cancel smi 0000383 Pending Summary Details Audit Search Criteria Type Replace Specification Given Parent M gy Parent Specification to Remove Specification to Add Smart Issue Action List Results Per Page 2 Click the Parent hyperlink to display a se
31. contains specifications of the same type you selected to remove in step 3 5 Use the search form to select a specification to replace the specification being removed and then click Done Your selection appears in the Specification to Add field as figure 21 18 shows below Figure 21 18 Specifications selected to remove and add Specification to Remove Bubbly Mango Orange Drink 5087438 001 Specification to Add Mango Orange Drink 5082499 003 6 Click See All Affected The Affected Specs dialog box displays a listing of all of the specification hierarchies that are linked to the specification to remove as figure 21 19 shows below 21 15 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 21 19 Affected Specs dialog box Affected Specs Affected Specs Results Per Page 15 Export GO oe i 21 16 Spec 5088350 001 5088350 002 5090407 001 Spec Name Equivalent Type Trade Spec Mango trd 20050812 cu Mey Issue Trade Spec trd Mango 0080812 cu Trade Spec Mango trd Orange 20090410 cu Status Approved Draft Draft Done Cancel Use the Select Deselect All options to help you select the specifications for the smart issue Business Unit Category CPI Latin America CPI North v521rc10 Trade America BU Top spec Top CPI Latin America CPI North v521rc10 Trade America BU Top spec Top CPI North America CPI No Category Northern Europe Available Issued Yes
32. hierarchies attached to IngA1 are issued and the new issues of the hierarchy are now attached to IngB1 Figure 21 14 Example of replacing a specification i a F A l z Replace Specification Given Parent Use this option to replace a specification with another specification filtered by a parent specification This option is used to find all hierarchies that are attached to a given parent and child pair of specifications In the example below you would be replacing the ingredient specification IngA vl with ingredient specification IngB v1 However you only want to replace IngA when it is used inside formulation specification FC All other formulations that reference IngA you would like to keep untouched This result could also be accomplished with the replace specification type if you know the top level specifications of the finished good hierarchies that reference formulation FC 21 13 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 21 15 Example of replacing a specification with another specification filtered by a parent specification IngAl Active Version Hierarchy Only Use this option to issue the hierarchy only without replacing a specification This option is used when you want to issue an entire hierarchy without replacing a specification Smart issue will issue every specification in the hierarchy starting from the specification given as the Starting From specification In the exampl
33. item one item two item three For ingredients with multiple Breakdown values and or formulation specification contexts there may be multiple options the term List is replaced with the first 25 characters of each corresponding Breakdown value or formulation specification name for example From Supplier x y Canada Only x y and so on List i x y Click this option to disclose as a combined statement using the current item and its lower level items that is Item Name item one item two item three For ingredients with multiple Breakdown values and or formulation specification contexts there may be multiple options the term List is replaced with the first 25 characters of each corresponding Breakdown value or formulation specification name for example From Supplier i x y Canada Only 1 x y and so on List i x y Click this option to disclose as a combined statement with percentage using the current item and its lower level items for example Item Name item one 50 item two 25 item three 25 For ingredients with multiple Breakdown values and or formulation specification contexts there may be multiple options the term List is replaced with the first 25 characters of each corresponding Breakdown value or formulation specification name for example From Supplier i x y Canada Only i x y and so on
34. specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding delivered material packing specifications Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions Summary Tab Compliance Tab Related Specs Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab 0 OO oO ODO O Overview The Delivered Material Packing Specification page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 14 2 Compliance Tab on page 14 3 Related Specs Tab on page 14 3 Supporting Documents Tab on page 14 3 References Tab on page 14 4 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 14 4 DOODOUDUCO O 14 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are Y E Summary Tab Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Create Copy Create a new copy of the current delivered material packing specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 Print
35. 10 3 Shelf Life Discussed below at Shelf Life Section on page 10 4 Design Attributes Discussed below at Design Attributes Section on page 10 5 Cross References For discussion of this commonly used section please see Cross References Section on page 3 3 Available UOM For discussion of this commonly used section please see Available UOM on page 3 4 UOM Conversions For discussion of this commonly used section please see Available UOM on page 3 4 Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Ingredient Attributes Section The Ingredient Attributes section contains specific core attributes of an ingredient specification as shown in figure 10 1 below The Classification field may be required depending on the configuration of your installation Note The graduate icon is available on ingredient specifications with a output type of External for a user with the SPEC_GRADUATOR role Clicking on the icon changes the external output to a Referenced ingredient and resolves the workflow to an ingredient specification workflow The Sourcing Approval section becomes available for an item that has been graduated Figure 10 1 Ingredient Attributes section Ingredient Attributes Material Type Formula Cutput Output Type External Product E Description Classification Country Of Origin Shipping Requirements Shipping Instru
36. 1FT 1LB The Available UOM control will not allow a user to define the density of a material The density data is already described on the specification so the list will be filtered to prevent that from occurring The Available UOM control will also disallow conversions for UOMs in the following categories e Concentration ratio Brix Temperature F C Time ms s min hr days wks mos yrs The available UOM selector respects the status assigned to each UOM described in Data Administration ADMN Only Active UOMs are available for selection The user will also have the ability to select a cross reference system and equivalence combination to a UOM conversion to assist with the tie back to the ERP system The Cross Reference column will be a concatenation of the available cross reference systems and equivalence data that is present on the specification The user can add a status to the UOM conversions and can therefore inactivate specific conversions When a conversion is marked as inactive the BOM consumption should not show the VOM Once the available UOMs have been added to the specification and the specification has been saved the available VOM data cannot be edited by the user Up until the point the specification is saved the user can edit or delete available UOM data Users can add new UOM conversions any time they have edit access to the specification Approved for Use In Section The Approved for Use In se
37. 9 5 supports Documents Labs O tee eens Rhee atc dia ara Eos 9 6 X Global Specification Management User Guide Contents Retenciones TS 9 6 Approval Audit Trail laborar citar arena obs ride 9 6 Chapter 10 Ingredient Specifications O a pc ri AR Eds 10 1 PacesLeve EE CONS AAA tn 10 2 SEMA O RS ERAN A 10 3 Imeredienta ti bDutes SeCHO Mt viii At SHS 10 3 Shelt Pile SECO nit A OS AAA IA ute cok 10 4 Desio ARDE SECOND AI ode 10 5 Formulation Tabo iio aces rara sabs 10 5 neredientStatements SEO ES AS a 10 5 Comphance labs estaras lla tailandia id ot 10 6 Related Specs TaD indict di AN A tease tees 10 6 Produced Bro C Okeere hae tat owe Seer cae ret O eee nee ete tate pee eases 10 6 Trade Speciications SECO A EIA A A 10 7 Packing Configurations Specifications Section eres br as da e ai sa dees ees 10 7 COS AD ate Sei E E ae ee eee ee ee AA 10 7 Ssupportins Documents taba ee ee ee on 10 8 NG qa e LAW AAA A e at Oe Bhat hs ae a ale Deda aa ee 10 8 substitute Materials Section asias iria 10 8 Approval Audit Trata A AA AA E AS 10 9 Chapter 11 Packaging Material Specifications ONE WS A AA A A O A E a 11 1 parese FUNES a ae eer eee ae ae ne SP eae ew e r eer ee ee eee ee ee ee eee oe 11 2 A A SN 11 3 Packacine Attributes SECO a ia O rodada E 11 3 Tate Wense econ rta Aso 11 3 Compliance atada ai o ias 11 4 Environmental Waste Secllonicias inci pardas dde 11 5 Printed Pac kasine Material Job iia aida tar sad 11 5 Printed Packacino Material Sec
38. A given activity can be linked to one or many specifications or objects This is useful if there is a single approval for all objects Examples include Linking multiple smart issue requests to an activity for approval or linking a number of specifications where a similar change must be performed Q Providing A Notification To Specification Readers Activities can be configured to provide an informational notification when users open a specification for reading These notifications may be of value if a temporary condition exists impacting a group of specifications or an impending change is being considered Q Activities are based on workflow templates managed in the Workflow Administration application WFA For more on WFA please see the Agile Product Lifecycle for Process Administrator User Guide 20 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Creating an Activity 20 2 The Activity page consists of the following tabs UOO O O Summary Tab on page 20 4 Supporting Documents Tab on page 20 7 Ext Data Tab on page 20 7 References Tab on page 20 7 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 20 7 An activity is an additional workflow that may be tied to a specification Activities are based on workflow templates managed in the Workflow Administration application WFA For more on WFA please see the Agile Product Lifecycle for Process Administrator User Guide You can create an activity from within Global Specification Management
39. Addis Materials nacos Beatie nha glean Ree ema nema ora DSi 6 11 Adding Rowsand Phen Materials ii dera 6 13 Additional Notes Regarding Adding Materials To The Inputs Grid 2 0 0 eee eee eee eee 6 14 Establishing Quantities Within The Inputs Grid israel risa teas yadda deans dade a ke 6 15 Material Quantity Fields Defined a A Guanes ia 6 15 Entering Material Quantity Data Using BOM Calculation Paths 0 eee eee eee eee 6 15 Working With Cost la hemp Gaudi nie 6 18 Additional Tools Found in the Input Grids 2 06 s cx0sar nek tons baca 6 19 OUT WIS SECHON 4544 endear t a E A oat tue seca us Bano So 6 20 SEP ECHO sp dt 6 22 Pocos A SN 6 23 SEPS SCE rr is aba 6 23 Interacting With Process Navigation ooooooococoocrrrrrr rr nee e nent e enn e eens 6 23 Interacting With Lhe step Derili SECO musa ie Wis bod eres ane ease nue Adi ene dass 6 24 BHO EMaterials SU b lada A eet dd 6 26 Input Meris5t DESC cuore ede oso 6 27 Alternate InputTtSms SUD SCORE aia 6 29 Output tens DS ON IA sa 6 30 Alternate Output Items SubSection erener is Boke E EE hows Si 6 36 viii Global Specification Management User Guide Contents Packaging Sub lada A A SAS A AS Sateen EE 6 36 mpu hens Sub Seco 45 dd a A A e dde 6 37 Ext Data butter rason bin 6 40 Related specs TabDusscarcals aaa AA ana dae da 6 40 Trade Specifications eco iris E ae 6 40 ES labs cinta sch dua sais ip daa ndo 6 40 supporting Documents Labs A AA eet e betes bak
40. Aided Compliance Screening Computer Aided Compliance Screening CACS enables you to screen products through rules and regulations to ensure their compliance with customer market nutritional and regulatory constraints For more information refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Computer Aided Compliance Screening User Guide eQuestionnaire eQuestionnaire eQ is a tool that you can use to obtain specification data from suppliers and manage their disposition in GSM For more information refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process eQuestionnaire User Guide Document Reference Library You can associate Document Reference Library DRL documents to many Agile business objects within Agile PLM for Process applications such as GSM specifications New Product Development projects and eQuestionnaire questionnaires For more information refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Document Reference Library User Guide New Product Development Use the activities feature in New Product Development NPD to tie specifications created in GSM to projects For more information refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process New Product Development User Guide Nutrition Surveillance Management Import nutrient values from nutrient analyses or nutrient composites created in the Nutrient Surveillance Management NSM application For more information refer to the Agile Product Lifecycl
41. Application 0 ccc ccc cece eee eneren rererere rreo 1 1 ON A A A AA os sia 1 1 Formulation and Compliance To0lS ooooooooocrorononr rr 1 1 Key Global Specification Management Capabilities 0 0 ccc cee ce cece eee n eee nen enes 1 2 Touch Points with Other Applications 6 25044 adedie rada y ida y ise ii y ada aa 1 3 Computer Aided Compliance Screening erisrararto rre ies 1 3 CONE Ol Mahe sea ceased ec ces Hee adoptara dr 1 3 Deetinent Reference LDL acaat ER EAE EE pers E si rra 1 3 New Product DevelopiIneiil so00c adanntaeeeasre teen etertereed eens hendereGadiawde enna taceraeieds 1 3 Nutrition Surveillance Management 442054 nica iad hice ease a oes ai a 1 3 Product Quality Scorecard coser traes een bee a eos hese asados 1 3 PCO ON IG nas eae a a Oe ae plo aia ae cid 1 3 Supply Chain Relationship Management rre roer EE EE oa 1 4 Supplier Portal essa a a a peace da aaa E ans posa 1 4 Emudesc py orador yaoi as aaa 1 4 Understanding he scared noto ebanista 1 4 Sonic ld DIOS oran ENE E E E T E ES 1 5 OA la DE E E E tare AA 1 5 Key Held Lists by Specification Type curro iaa ii a p i a a a 1 6 Operators inserta ica 1 7 A O A E AAT 1 9 Entering Search Terms Dy Wy pin ener dis a arar pea 1 9 Entering Search Terms by Prepopulated List o vVcmmmm orar A 1 10 Usme the Subscarea NOON ss hese ec nye eae ee ere eer esis ae iio EEA 1 14 Searching for Field Types That Do Not Use the Search Terms Field 00 0 ce ee
42. EA AAA 2 17 Printing Other So Peca e e a a SA A SAA On 2 19 Documentation POorMatecion poenae ae da is OS isos 2 19 E LISO ra AAA AO 2 20 SPC Ci Catto PE a A A id aia 2 20 SCCHONG rr E NACO 2 21 Attac DINEE as haha iaa Asia 2 21 Optional Objects to Print Through the Print Dialog BOX o ooooooooocrrcrororrrrnonrooo 2 23 Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections A AA 3 1 Sn aa daa ateos 3 1 Summary Into rmaton second ibid 3 2 Cross References Seco orador doi 3 3 Avallable VOM ce 3 4 UOM Conversiones E AS DAA Ad 3 4 Approved tor Use Ii Seco sti ani Pagan weds a a een eee aoe A 3 5 Compliance labrar o A A Dee eter eee wero ates se ponte eat 3 6 Compliance Information Secho isrener at tan Esos sala 3 6 Addis Compliance ems SSA Sas 3 6 Removing Compliance Mm a A iy a ae eee ee ee ae ees 3 6 Additives Allergens and Intolerances Sections 0 cece cc cece o 3 7 Add Addie ts esas ea ae eee 3 8 Removing Additives tai Ai a A ais 3 8 Related Specs la Dd dni adoos docs id bd loa bid ENS 3 9 ASSOClaTEd SpeciMCations SECON pevierdi AE 3 9 Master Spe ciliC AMOS Seco Mite a5 8 6 cinco tas eens ie ene ea Abe iS eee ate aeeenoie a tats 3 9 i fois Bella a e e a Se eR PD e ay area 3 10 supports Documents labia serie 3 12 Supportins Documents Eco a a aca anos 3 12 COWEIVICW sitios aci A AAA ARA AA AAA ORAE 3 12 Creatine a Supporting Documento criticada 3 12 Manasine supports DOCUMEN da Cea oe ada ae Rane SEER 3 13 Docentes AAA AA E oas 3 1
43. Figure 6 21 Edit Rich Text dialog box Edit Rich Text Done Cancel B 7 U x age fl Se Y Hl Hl El E nt E E Oo Tn a large drum using approximately 00 degree heat combine the primary ingredients Whe well and cook until all ingredients are blended together and the cream cheese has melted 6 25 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process In addition GSM displays two subtabs in the Step Details section e Bill of Materials Made up of input items for ingredient and alternate input items for ingredients as figure 6 22 shows below Bill of Materials will be further described in this document in the section titled Bill Of Materials Sub Tab on page 6 26 e Packaging Made up of input items for packaging and alternate input items for packaging as figure 6 23 shows below Packaging will be further described in this document in Packaging Sub Tab on page 6 36 Figure 6 22 Bill of Materials subtab Bill of Materials Packaging Material Qty G L Yid Step o Batch USD 100g EXT Cosi e Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose 08 13 15000 1 00000 13 15000 lb 35 54054 4 66312 o 00000 9 00000 y e 30564 5077447 001 5 da salt Granular Not Iodized 038 3 00000 1 00000 3 00000 lb 8 10811 1 06383 0 00000 9 00000 DM 34131 5077441 001 db Spice Oil for Pork amp Beans Oa 20 85000 1 00000 20 85000 Ib 56 35135 7 39362 2 65809 2513861 11M 012433 5077414 00 1
44. Figure 6 51 Approximate Yield section Approximate Yield Beginning Batch Size 1 00000 kg Beginning o Total Solids 78 00000 0 Processing Loss Factor 1 00000 Water Gain Loss Factor 1 00000 Approximate Yield 1 00000 kg Labeled Units Batch Final o Total Solids 785 00000 Traded Units Batch Once you have adjusted the processing loss factor and the water gain loss factor click Calculate to have the system calculate the new yield information 6 54 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Paths include e Moisture Loss Path is used when the water gain loss factor is known The user would input the water gain loss factor and click the Calculate button This action will calculate the Approximate Yield amount and Final Moisture Total Solids e Yield Path is used when the approximate yield is known The user would input the approximate yield amount and click the Calculate button This action will calculate the Water Gain Loss Factor and Final Moisture Total solids fields will calculate e Target Moisture Path is used when the Final Moisture is known The user would input the final moisture amount and click the Calculate button This action would calculate the Approximate Yield amount and the Water Gain Loss factor The Approximate Yield section contains the yield data for a formulation specification This section is configurable One configuration captures moisture t
45. G0000 q Copper 0 00000 mg 0 00000 mg NSM Analysis 0 0000 mg 0000166 Selenium 0 00000 pg 0 00000 pg NSM Analysis 0 00000 pg 0000166 Carotene 90000 ug 10000000 00000 ug abc 1100000 00000 pg Add New Import Rollup Key fields include SS SAS A AAA Nutrient The name of the nutrient Per 100g Per 100mL The mass or volume based declaration for the nutrient Volume per 100mL column can be displayed only if the density has been defined in the Summary tab Source The source system that nutrient data was retrieved from When nutrition is imported the source will display the object 1t was imported from 8 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Per Serving Per Serving nutritional information GSM calculates this field from the Per 100g 100ml field and the Amount Per Serving data field Note The Final Values field and rounding rules are by default configured off For more information on this field refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Configuration Guide To calculate the value of the Per Serving field 1 Click Edit at the upper right of the page to put the specification in edit mode 2 Click Calculate If you have a serving size specified GSM will calculate the per serving column To add a nutrient manually 1 Click Edit at the upper right of the page to put the specification in edit mode 2 Click Add New and select the nutrients from the dialog box that appears
46. Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 11 Summary Tab Packaging Material Specifications The Packaging Material Specification Summary tab contains the following sections Q Summary Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 Q Packaging Attributes Discussed below at Packaging Attributes Section on page 11 3 Q Tare Weight Discussed below at Tare Weight Section on page 11 3 Q Cross References For discussion of this commonly used section please see Cross References Section on page 3 3 a Available VOM For discussion of this commonly used section please see Available UOM on page 3 4 a UOM Conversions For discussion of this commonly used section please see Available UOM on page 3 4 Q Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Packaging Attributes Section Tare Weight Section A packaging material specification has a number of core attributes such as description storage requirements and relative humidity List those attributes in this section Figure 11 1 Packaging Attributes section Packaging Attributes Packaging Description This label must comply with the General Specification PLOO1 Labels Pz laws and the particulars of the specification Use 1607 Acme Brand Products see Supporting Documents ul Storage Requirements Relative Humidity
47. If Measure Score g Typical for type and age vivid 2 2 Nearly correct attractive lively 1 2 Off maderized brown colorless 0 calculated sequentially poor 0 6 excellent Add New Observations Description Add New If you intend to use the testing protocol in PQS then select Qualitative from the Record As drop down list as shown in figure 19 7 below Figure 19 7 Record As drop down list Scoring Testing Protocol Analytical Property Property Name Color Section Appearance Record As Qualitative Scoring Weight Non Conformance Quantitative For more information of PQS please see the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Product Quality Scorecard User Guide If you have the applicable administrative permissions you can create observations that enable scorers to comment based on an administered list of options as shown in figure 19 8 below 19 6 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 19 Testing Protocol Library Figure 19 8 Scoring column with data ef Qualitative If Measure Score Typical for type and age vivid Nearly correct attractive lively D Po Of maderized brown colorless Weight 1 NC J0servations Does it look good Protocol ID Describes how frequently to perform this test Click the add data icon i in this column to display a dialog box in which to input test frequencies as shown in figure 19 9 below U
48. Input Grid on page 6 19 Context See Formulation Tab Additional Tools Found in the Input Grid on page 6 19 Basis See Formulation Tab Additional Tools Found in the Input Grid on page 6 19 Get Latest Issue See Formulation Tab Additional Tools Found in the Input Grid on page 6 19 Substitute Material See Formulation Tab Additional Tools Found in the Input Grid on page 6 19 Item history See Formulation Tab Additional Tools Found in the Input Grid on page 6 19 Delete See Formulation Tab Additional Tools Found in the Input Grid on page 6 19 USD 100g See Formulation Tab Working With Cost In The Inputs Grid on page 6 18 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications EXT Cost See Formulation Tab Working With Cost In The Inputs Grid on page 6 18 Quantity See Formulation Tab Establishing Quantities Within The Inputs Grid on page 6 15 G L Gain Loss See Formulation Tab Establishing Quantities Within The Inputs Grid on page 6 15 Yield See Formulation Tab Establishing Quantities Within The Inputs Grid on page 6 15 Percent Batch See Formulation Tab Establishing Quantities Within The Inputs Grid on page 6 15 Alternate Input Items Sub Section Use the Alternate Input Items subsection to define an alternate item for a BOM item when the Bill of Materials subtab is selected or a packaging item when the Packaging subtab is selected Each alternate material is related to
49. Lal 0 00000 None Fix Raise MEI None w E 0 00000 0 50000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 Lal 0 00000 0 25000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 0 50000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 Mone O 0 00000 1 00000 Ib 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 None OE 0 00000 0 10000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 None O 0 00000 0 10000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 None E 0 00000 None 0 00000 WU UO Oo O oy OF Oo U 1 00000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 Scalability factors set upper and lower controls and limits on the optimization engine The Scalability Control columns tell the optimization engine the range of adjustment that you are comfortable with The Scalability Limit columns tell the optimization engine the biggest adjustment that you will enable it to make In the Adjust column you can give the optimization engine even more granular information about how to handle each item during the optimization scenario The available options in the Adjust drop down list are Fix Do not change this item s yield Raise Do not change this item s yield in a negative manner Lower Do not change this item s yield in a positive manner 6 73 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 6 74 The Last Optimization column shows the percent change due to the last optimization performed Optimization Method Section In the Optimization Method secti
50. Salt Salt Granular Not Iodized Onion Chopped Dehydrated Caramel Color Acid Pro Strength Sodium Tripolyphosphate Soluble Celery on Dextrose Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose Final Statement pet Lean Finely Textured Water Carbonated Pork Trimmings Raw 72 Lean Textured Soy Flour Colored Breading NW 5634216 Contains less than 3 of the following Soy Protein Concentrate Pow flavors Onion Salt Salt Granular Not Iodized Onion Chopped Dehydrated Caramel Color Acid Pron Strength Sodium Tripolyphosphate Soluble Celery on Dextrose Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose Copy Edit Push To Target Label Composition Tab If you have created a label composition in the Listed Ingredient Order LIO tool and have transferred it to the nutrient profile then this tab displays the label composition Note This tab is enabled using the following configuration GSM LabelComposition Enabled Label Composition the sole section in the Label Composition tab displays the composition of the specification for labeling purposes This information can be pushed to the nutrient profile from the LIO process The data pushed to the Nutrient Profile is read only 18 20 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 18 LIO Profiles Figure 18 20 Label Composition section Label Composition Item Formulation BLENDED VEGETABLES 27 7 273 POTATOES 26 3636 0 BEEF 22 72730 BBO SAUCE 18 1818 WATER 4 9000 0 SU
51. See figure 7 7 below Figure 7 7 Label Claim Determination dialog box Comparative Reference Product tab Label Claim Determination Close Claims Determination Comparative Reference Product Comparitive Reference Product Reference Product Reference Amount 0 00000 Classification yo active Nutrient Composition Mubrient Calories peal Total Fat Ww Saturated Fat Ww Trans Fatty Acid Cholesterol Ta Sodium gt Ta Dietary Fiber Ww Sugars MINI wo 3 On the Claims Determination tab from the Label Claim Authority drop down list select a specific rule group to use for considering claims applicability 7 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 7 8 4 Click Display Label Claims to display the Applicable Claims table The system evaluates label claims against rules that you previously defined All selected claims based on the label claims authority appear in the Applicable Claims table with color coding to show whether the claim may be made for the product When the system evaluates a claim as compliant the Comments column displays supporting information for the claim along with one or more user defined values supporting the assessment in the Calculation s column as shown in figure 7 8 If the system finds that the claim is invalid no such information appears in the Comments column Select the
52. Specification Management User Guide Chapter 13 Printed Packaging Specifications Parent Packaging Material Section In this section you can connect the printed packaging specification to a parent packaging material specification Figure 13 4 Parent Packaging Material section Parent Packaging Material Spec Spec Name 5077540 001 Carton Paper Board Frozen Meal 7 x 1 25x 39 The printed packaging specification can have only one parent packaging material specification CSS Tab For discussion of this commonly used tab please see CSS Tab on page 3 10 Supporting Documents Tab The Supporting Documents tab consists of four sections a Attachments For discussion of this commonly used section please see Attachments Section on page 3 22 Q Supporting Documents Document types available for use in the Printed Packaging Specifications Supporting Documents tab are URL and Rich Text For more information please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 Q DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 a Testing Protocols For discussion of this commonly used section please see Testing Protocols Section on page 3 21 13 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process References Tab The Printed Packaging Specification References tab includes the following sections a a Suppliers For discussion of this commonly used section please see Su
53. Supporting Documentation picture Winter jpq Custom section Rich Text Please read _ Container Attributes Supporting Delivered Material 5077514 001 Wax Lined Boxes 04 Mar 1993 Packing Specs l ALE image supporting Documentation O PP 3 RawMateriallmage jpg Labeling Specifications Ll s077513 001 Pallet Label Type A 04 Mar 1993 Labeling Graphic L Attachments STE gt phic jpq Rich Text rich kext Master Specifications 0 5077412 001 Allergen Disclosure 26 Sep 2004 word 2 5k Character Document doc Attachments icture Z006 logow j Rich Text please read Figure 2 28 Formulation specification print example Specification Type Sections Attachments Current Specification 5091145 001 Orange Juice 10 Aug 2009 J Include the Expanded Bill of Materials Include Formulation Steps Include Ingredient Summary supporting Documentation Liquid Example Rich Text Additional Formulation Motes F Formulation Custom Section LI Testing Protocol Juice Sensory Test 10 Aug 2009 Outputs 5091 146 001 Orange Juice 10 Aug 2009 Master Specifications L 5077412 001 Allergen Disclosure 28 Sep 2004 2 22 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Optional Objects to Print Through the Print Dialog Box For each specification type there are objects that can be printed using the Print dialog box Note Attachments listed below refer to files and rich text
54. The composite number is linked to the actual composite associated with the specification Refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Nutrient Surveillance Management User Guide for more information Click the Related LIO Profiles link to open the Related LIO Profiles dialog box The dialog box displays the LIO number date of creation LIO name status and description for each associated profile Refer to Chapter 18 LIO Profiles for more information Select specifications contain custom data Use custom data to enter customized information in the form of extended attributes or custom sections The extended attributes and custom sections templates are created and maintained by your administrator Custom data can consist of a Extended Attributes a Custom Sections For more information on creating custom data or extended attributes see the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Administrator User Guide Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Important Ifyou remove a custom section or extended attribute the system deletes the data that you entered Delete data with caution because deleted data cannot be restored Extended Attributes Section Extended attributes define important features and characteristics of the specification You can build these attributes to meet specific needs as shown in the figure below Figure 3 33 Extended Attributes section Ext
55. This list is the aggregate of the extended attributes listed at the BOM item level on the basis Once you have selected the extended attribute values GSM automatically rolls them up from the BOM items to the formulation level taking into account the following e Formulation composition e Gain loss factor for each BOM item within each step e Processing gain loss factor at the batch level e Water gain loss factor at the batch level Note The only types of extended attributes that can be rolled up are numeric and quantitative range You can choose a rollup method of allowing null to allow GSM to roll up data even though data may be missing at the BOM item level You can also choose not allowing null in which case GSM will not roll up the data if there is missing data at the BOM item level The following columns are included Item When clicked displays the extended attribute composition dialog box The dialog box shows the formula item where the attribute is present Theoreticals Shows the rolled up data from the formulation specification Overrides Allows the user to enter a value different than the rolled up value Specification Shows the data as it exists on the specification Method This value defines how to treat the occurrence of nulls when the system is trying to roll up the extended attribute value Allow Null will provide the user a value even if all specifications in the formula do not have the ext
56. This specification requires your review and approval Please approve and send or return with comments Start Date 3 3 2007 Amber Date Red Date Event History Status User Time Comments Draft Jo Ellen Jones 8 3 2007 3 45 53 PM Draft Sally Johnson 7 1 2008 2 00 14 PM Assigned to 5 Johnson Click Workflow at the top right of the page to take action on the signature document by changing its status to approved or not approved Temporary Signature Authority Temporary signature authority enables a person who has been asked to provide a signature to assign that task to another user A user with temporary authority can view and advance or move back all signature documents that are currently owned by the original signature authority Tasks assigned to a user with temporary authority also appear in the Action Items list of that person 2 9 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 2 10 Accessing Temporary Signature Authority Access temporary signature authority from the left navigation panel as shown in figure 2 13 below Figure 2 13 Temporary Signature Authority from left navigation panel Labeling Specifications Master Specifications Testing Protocol Library Temp Sig Authority Activities Change Management Spec Comparison You can search for existing signature authorities For detailed guidance on searching please see the Agile Lifecycle Management for Process Getting Started Gu
57. UPC EAN Brand Actual Label Claims Additives Additives does WOT contain Additivesttiay contain Allergens Allergens does MOT contain Allergenstmay contain Analvtical Properties Analytical Properties Spec Limits Approved For Use In Country Associated Spec Association Associated Spec Equivalent Associated Spec Mame Associated Spec Mumber Attachment Filename BO Component BO Component COD BD Component FLL BO Component Ing Spec BD Component Term BO Component Term or Alias BO Component Text Business Unit Children Business Unit Exact Match Business Unit Hierarchical Category Complies With Country OF Origin Created Effective Inactive Ingredient Statement nutp Intolerances Intolerances does MOT contain Intolerancestmay contain Last Edit Originator Packaging Materials Potential Label Claims Short Marne Sourcing Number Status Supercedes System Equivalent System Mame UDEX Classification wWorkFlo Most of these field names are self explanatory See table A 1 Key field names of note in the search criteria key field list described on page A 1 for descriptions of search fields of note Key Field Lists by Specification Type Table 1 2 on page 1 7 is a partial list of possible fields Note that the lists of key fields varies by specification type to some degree Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Operator List The delimiter in the Operato
58. a prepopulated list configured by your administrator as shown in figure figure 4 6 below Figure 4 6 Label Owner dialog box Done Cancel Branded Manufacturer Label Distributor Wholesaler Branded Own Label Distributor Wholesaler Own Label Mo Name Label Retailer Branded Own Label Retailer Own Label 4 6 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Trade Specifications Product Classification Section In this section you can declare any relevant product classification information The trade item type declared on the specification affects which of these fields are visible based on relevance Figure 4 7 Product Classification section Traded Unit Product Classification UNSPSC Code Frozen combination meals 50192702 UDEX Classification Eozen Foods 14 Meat Poultry Meat Substitutes With Additions Frozen 435 Beef With Additions Frozen 144352387 GPC Code Meat Poultry Game and Batrachian Prepared and Processed Country Of Origin Tax Type Rate est oo Wi Figure 4 8 Product Classification section Traded Item no children Product Classification UDEX Classification Frozen Foods 14 Figure 4 9 Product Classification section Consumer Unit not for resale Product Classification MeatPoultry Meat Substitutes With Additions Frozen 435 Beef With Additions Frozen 144352387 GPC Code Meat Poultry Game and Batrachian Prepared and Processed Cou
59. additives intolerances complies with that are present in child items are displayed by default If you click on a compliance item a composition dialog box displays The dialog box contains formula items where the compliance items are and are not present The following columns are included Theoreticals Shows the rolled up data from the formulation specification Overrides Allows you to enter a value different than the rolled up value Specification Shows the data as it exists on the specification Comments Free text comments Click Add New to add compliance items to the grid Refer to Adding Complies With Information on page 6 48 for instructions You cannot remove items from the grid if the items are rolled up from the child items If you added an item to the specification or to the Output dialog box you can remove the item using the delete icon The Complies With section displays whether the item is compliant or non compliant You can click the complies with item to view a dialog box showing the formula items where the compliance items are present 6 61 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 59 Output dialog Compliance tab summary Yield Composition Nutrition Complia J Jeet RB Allergens Known to Contain Item Theoreticals Overrides Specification Comments Add New May Contain Item Theoreticals Overrides Specification Comments Add Mew Does not Contain Theoret
60. all related trade specifications and their objects that are available for printing Title Specification This drop down list controls what specification will be displayed at the top of the hierarchy Changing this value adjusts the related trade specification listing Related Trade Specifications The trade specifications available for printing are organized by item type TU Traded Unit or CU Consumer Unit The active specification is shown in the row that is highlighted The printed output includes everything that you have selected in the Related Trade Items table Those objects vary by specification but could include a Specification Indicated by the specification name and item type a Supporting Documents Indicated by the type or name of the document Types of supporting documents are e Attachments Procedures are listed as Attachment Title Filename e Rich Text Documents are listed as Rich Text Document Rich Text Name e URLs are not included in the print dialog See figure 2 23 below for examples To include any of these items in your printed output check the box next to the corresponding item in the Append Specification column You can print attachments individually outside of the printed output These attachments are listed underneath the associated trade specification and are indicated by the attachment file name Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Figu
61. an original material and allows for a substitution factor This subsection uses the get latest revision capability Figure 6 26 Alternate Input Items subsection for BOM Orig Material s dh 5030091 001 Add New Factor G L Material s Description ar 0 00000 o oo000 Granulated Sugar ai st keir H i E iferent kind of sugar includes sucrose Su crose ing 5077415 00 1 Figure 6 27 Alternate Input Items subsection for Packaging Orig Material s ds 5077540 001 Add New Factor Scrap Factor Material s Description 0 00000 o 00000 Garton Paper Board P using paper board A Frozen Meal 7x1 25x9 pkg 5077540 001 ick the add data icon to select a different specification for the original or alternate material Key fields include Orig Materials The original BOM item Factor Factor of the original quantity that will be used with new material G L Factor applied to the initial quantity to account for loss This field displays for BOM items only Scrap Factor Percentage of the quantity that will be lost This field displays for packaging items only Materials The alternate material Description Free text comments about the alternate item 6 29 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process To add an alternate item click Add New GSM displays the input items dialog box as figure 6 28 shows below Figure 6 28 Alternate input items dialog box BOM example
62. and Vegetable 123123 trd Draft CPI North Meat Poultry Yes 002 Dinner 11 oz Cu America and Game Issue Fl version Nutrient Profiles 21 19 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process You can now perform the smart issue as described in Exporting the Affected Specifications on page 21 21 To version a specification hierarchy 1 From the Type drop down list select Version Hierarchy Only as shown in figure 21 25 below Figure 21 25 Version Hierarchy Only option Save Save amp Close Cancel smi 0000384 Pending Summary Details Audit Search Criteria Type Version Hierarchy Only Ml Starting From a Smart Issue Action List Results Per Page 2 Click the Starting From hyperlink to display a search form in a dialog box 3 Use the search form to select an ingredient menu item packaging material printed packaging product or trade specification The search form closes This specification serves as a bottom level specification and displays in the Starting From field 4 Click See All Affected The Affected Specs dialog box displays a listing of specifications available for smart issue as figure 21 26 shows below Figure 21 26 Affected Specs dialog box Affected Specs Done Cancel Affected Specs Results Per Page Export Use the Select Deselect All options to help you select the specifications for the smart issue Spec Spec Name Equivalent Type Status Business Un
63. button is displayed when the specification is in edit mode Calculation also happens when you save your specification Create Copy Create a new copy of the current equipment specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing an equipment specification please see Printing Other Specifications on page 2 19 Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN _RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS Key sections in the Summary tab include Summary Tab 12 2 Summary Information For discussion of this commonly us
64. data related to the workflow status and history of a specification This page consists of the following system defined sections Current Status Event History Signature Document Lineage History appears only for nutrient profiles trade formulation and ingredient specifications UOO O Current Status Section The Current Status section contains the workflow data related to a specification Figure 2 15 Current Status section Current Status Current Owner Charlie Callas Current Workflow All Members Test Current Status Admin Review Desired Action Admin Review Start Date 9 28 2007 Amber Date Red Date Event History Section The Event History section contains the list of preceding workflow actions associated with the specification Figure 2 16 Event History section Event History Status User Time Comments Admin Review Sally Johnson 9 28 2007 4 45 28 PM Signature Document Section The Signature Document section shown in the figure below contains the list of signature documents associated with that step of the workflow All signature documents associated with a specification must be in the approved state before the specification can be moved forward in the workflow Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 2 12 Figure 2 17 Signature Document section Signature Document Draft Review Begini0 Dec 07 Jo Jones Initiator Marketing May Wu Review 10 Dec 07 Review looks good
65. edit mode Calculation also happens when you save your specification Create Copy Create a new copy of the current menu item specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 CACS Screen the current specification using Computer Aided Compliance Screening CACS an application that you can use to inspect materials for fitness against any number of user defined screens Appears only if your installation includes CACS For more information on CACS please refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Computer Aided Compliance Screening User Guide Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow pres
66. for Process 6 56 Final Density The calculated density of the batch This value is used in other areas of Global Specification Management Final Density Override Enables you to override the final density If declared this value is used instead of the value in the Final Density field in other areas of Global Specification Management Design Attributes Section The Design Attributes section displays Total Solids Final Density and Edible Portion The value used in the Total Solids field is pulled from the Final Total Solids value This section includes three columns Theoretical Shows rolled up data from the formulation specification If any of the BOM items are missing data elements that are used for rollups the error icon A is displayed Click on the icon for more information about offending specification e Override Allows the user to enter a value different than the rolled up value e Specification Shows the data that already exists on the specification If the user provides an override for Total Solids Final Density or Edible Portion that value is stored to the ingredient specification Figure 6 53 Design Attributes section Design Attributes Attribute Theoretical Override Specification Total Solids 78 00000 Final Density Edible Portion 100 00000 100 00000 o Composition Tab The Composition tab contains the regulatory BOM composition listing and generated breakdown that will be written
67. formulation specification is issued Status Displays the workflow status of the output item If the output is internal or external it shares the same workflow and status as the formulation specification The output item s workflow status will be updated when the formulation specification s status is updated Effective Date the output item becomes effective By default the system automatically assigns the date the output was created Inactive Date the output item could inactive Last Edit Last edit date of the output item or specification Composition Map Section This section shows what amount of each ingredient input goes into the output The Name column displays the same information that is displayed when a BOM item is displayed on a formulation specification Packaging Composition Map Section This section shows what amount of each packaging input goes into the output The Name column displays the same information that is displayed when a BOM item is displayed on a formulation specification 6 52 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Yield Tab The Yield tab shown in figure 6 49 below contains the packaging configuration and approximate yield information as it relates to the output and formulation specification The Yield tab contains the following sections e Packaging Configuration Described below in Packaging Configuration Section on page 6 53 e Approximate Yiel
68. from an existing specification This action creates a copy of an existing sourcing approval linking it to your active specification To import a sourcing approval from an existing specification 1 With the specification in read mode click Import GSM opens the Import Sourcing Approvals dialog box If the previous issue of the specification has sourcing approvals the dialog box will be populated with references to the sourcing approvals from the prior issue 2 Click Add Specs GSM opens the Specification Search dialog box 3 Find the specifications that reference the sourcing approvals that you would like to import 4 Once all of the specifications are selected click Add Spec to apply your selections and close the dialog box The Import Sourcing Approvals dialog box should now contain any sourcing approvals that existed on the selected specifications 5 Select the sourcing approvals to add and click Done The system creates new instances of sourcing approvals and populates them with data from the selected sourcing approvals The Suppliers section displays important identifying information from the specification You can click the add data icon F to go directly to the sourcing approval You can click the hyperlinked company or facility name to go directly to the SCRM company or facility profile Protocol ID Supplier Item Notes Facilities Approval Status Review A Facility Auburn Heights Plant Peedmont Facility Draft Global
69. have its own context specific data and references the same material Please note differences can exist between the Theoretical and Output Ingredient due to timing issues related to the push from one to the other or the inability to push when an item is referenced Designable Workflow Status 6 4 Formulation specifications provide a number of powerful tools These tools are often used during the early steps in a formulation specification s workflow As a formulation specification moves past the initial workflow steps it is expected that the organization will focus their efforts on minor changes and approving the specification for use by the greater organization Therefore in Workflow Administration an administrator can designate or tag a given step of a workflow as Designable When a specification is in that designable workflow step the following design features will be available to that specification e Costing e Optimization Snapshots e Moisture Loss Calculators Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Batch Tuning Theoretical Rollups Instance Level Ingredient Attribute Overrides or Basis e Substitute Materials Note When using a formulation specification if you are not able to access the above features please verify that the specification is in a workflow step marked as Designable Remaining Concepts and Definitions The Formulation Specificatio
70. higher sweetness level gf Aroma Swirl your wine This releases molecules in the wine allowing you to smell the aroma or bouquet 1 Lowest Take a quick whiff and formulate an initial impression then take a second deeper whiff Score g Balance Verify sweetness acidity and bitterness i Lowest Score 2 Body Texture Presented as nearly correct or better 1 Lowest Score 2 Taste Flavor 1 Initial taste or first impression Cherry and Woody 1 Lowest 2 Taste Rich and Smooth Score 2 Finish Reminds the taster of a rich cherry desert 1 Lowest Score gf Overall Quality Summary general opinion of quality 1 Lowest Score Add New 19 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Extended Attributes Section Extended attributes define important features and characteristics of the testing protocol You can build these attributes to meet specific needs as shown in the figure below Figure 19 4 Extended Attributes section Extended Attributes Extended Attributes Notes 2 Countries Sold To Australia New Zealand USA Only 5 sold to USA First Order Date Saturday April 05 2008 2 Heat Index Warm Must be between 100 and 140 degrees Labeling Required Yes Add New Testing Protocol Detail Section 19 4 In this section you can define which properties of the specification to test in this protocol and the details around the definition and scoring of the tests You can add a number of extended att
71. is where the itemized breakdown is captured and defined Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Publish Settings Section In this section you can capture information that helps determine how to use this breakdown elsewhere in the system Figure 3 26 Publish Settings section Publish Settings Restrictions Formulation Classifications Tags Suopress Printing Do Not Publish to Supplier Key fields include Restrictions A list of configurable tags that you can assign to the disclosure to prevent use in the LIO process LIO will only use disclosures with the same restriction s or no restrictions applied Formula Classification You can use formula classifications to enforce security for individual specifications Your Agile administrator can manage classifications in the admin tool Classifications are tied to user groups Only users in the associated groups can view formulas that have a formulation classification Tags e Master Formula Denotes that this formula is considered the master formulation This tag is for informational purposes only no system behavior is tied to this tag e Regulatory Designates which breakdown will be used during formulation specification theoretical breakdown creation Only one breakdown can be marked as regulatory per specification Breakdowns created by a formulation specification will be automatically tagged as regulatory Cautio
72. items and displays them in the Nutrient Profile section as shown in figure 8 6 below 8 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 8 6 Imported nutrient items Mubrient Profile a SS SS SSIS SS WS SNS Nutrient Per 100mL z Calories 834 00000 kcal Energy kJ 3699 00000 kJ Protein O 00000 q Carbohydrates S2000000 00000 q Carbohydrate 37 50000 q Available Dietary Fiber 0 32734 q Total Sugar 1 56877 q Total Fat 500 00000 q Saturated Fat 49 30000 q Copper O 00000 my Selenium 0 00000 pg Carotene 2 50000 Hg per 100 grams 3536000000 00000 kcal NSM Analysis 3885960000 00000 kcal 0000166 14796000000 00000 k NSM Analysis 1627560000 00000 kJ 0000166 O Q0000 q NSM Analysis 0 00000 q 0000166 23 00000 q NSM Analysis O O0000 q 0000012 150000000 00000 q abr 16500000 00000 q Source Per Serving Comments 1509360 00000 q abc 1440 94 60000 q b2FS060 00000 q abr 620 508 00000 q 000000000 00000 q NSM Analysis 0000000 00000 q 0000166 197200000 00000 q ASM Analysis 1692000 00000 q 0000166 0 00000 my ASM Analysis 0 00000 my 0000166 0 00000 pg ASM Analysis 000000 pg 0000166 10000000 00000 ua abc 1100000 00000 pg Add New Import NSM Rollup 6 To roll up nutrient data for menu items only click Rollup 8 8 Note This button is present only in nutrient profiles that have been associated with a menu item specification A dialog box di
73. kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services September 2010 ii Global Specification Management User Guide DOCUMENT CONTROL Change Record Date Author Version Change Reference Sept 07 Agile Oracle Initial release Part No TPPR 0019 5 1A Feb 08 Second release Part No E11004 01 Sept 09 Third release Part No E12389 01 Feb 10 Fourth release E12389 01 Sept 10 Fifth release El8532 01 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process IV Global Specification Management User Guide Contents CONTENTS About This Manual Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Documentation 0 cece cece rr xvil TTY Access to Oracle Support Services roo a AA es Rete e ss xvii A A aa a ee a ee a E E EEA ee xvii Accessibility of Code Examples in Documentation oo ooooocoococrrrrr rr xvii Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation 0 0 cece eee cece cnet e eee eeeeee xvil PU E Ann nage E 4a cea pee nuen aces Geneeawesseanoees xviii Vaftiability of Installations iesse sinag a a aa a EA a E a a E a a apaa aa aa G a E a e ER che xviii Where to Find Iniormallon us arcos eirin paia st dada a ERA a lea E es xviii Daco on O ee E E E E E E ee ee a X1X Chapter 1 Introduction The Global Specification Management
74. label is now hyperlinked as shown in figure 21 5 on page 21 5 5 Click the New Specification hyperlink to display a search form in a dialog box 21 4 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features 6 As above use that search form to locate the new specification and select it The search box closes and the new specification displays in the Select Specification Type dialog box as shown in figure 21 5 Figure 21 5 Global Succession Select Specification Type dialog box after selecting a specification to supersede and a new specification to suc ceed the old one with Close Select Specification Type Packaging Material Specification Spec To Supercede Packaging 4 pkg S083907 001 Approved 4 23 2007 5 09 58 PM New Specification Packaging B pkg 5083910 001 Approved 2 05 2008 2 19 15 PM Parent Spec Type Trade Specification w a Done 7 Select the parent specification type from the drop down box with that name The parent specification type will help further filter out your search results For example shown in the screen above the system will find all trade specifications that use Packaging A as an input and replace that input with the Packaging B specification 8 Enter a description of the global succession in the Reason for Change field and click Done The Global Successions tool queries the database and returns a list of target specifications on which you can perform a su
75. menu item Packing Configurations Specifications Section The Packing Configurations Specifications section contains the packing configurations specifications associated with the product specification In this section you can describe the multiple ways in which your specified material can be delivered for instance case packaging variants 9 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 9 6 Packing Configuration Specifications section Packing Configuration Specifications Spec Spec Name Equivalent Comments 5082071 002 Packing Configuration 20061213 5082709 002 Packing Configuration 200 70212 Add New Key fields include Equivalent Use this field to associate a cross reference equivalent per packing configuration Supporting Documents Tab The Product Specifications Supporting Documents tab consists of three sections Q Supporting Documents section The document types available are Attachments Procedures URL nutrient composition and Rich Text For discussion of this commonly used section please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 Q DRL Documents section For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 Q Testing Protocols section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Testing Protocols Section on page 3 21 References Tab The Product Specifications References tab consists of the following sections Q Supp
76. of that ingredient changes to orange juice To add a new reconstitution equivalency rule click Add New under the Reconstitution Equivalency section GSM adds to the grid a new row for you to fill out Key fields include Declare As The name that GSM will assign to the product after you have performed the defined reconstitution Target Factor The adjustment amount required to perform the reconstitution Target Factor UOM The method for calculating the reconstitution Breakdown Tab The Breakdown tab defines the contents of an ingredient specification Percent breakdowns are composed of breakdown components and their composition of the total ingredient In the Component Breakdown s section shown in figure 6 44 below you can modify breakdowns that exist on the specification or add new breakdowns for use in listed ingredient order LIO Figure 6 44 Basis dialog box Breakdown tab Basis Refresh Done BBQ Sauce Dry Mix 5077419 001 Specification Attributes Breakdown Nutrition Compliance Ext Data Component Yo Breakdown s From Spec 7 20 2009 Restrictions Formulation Classifications Tags breakdown Suppress Printing Do Not Publish to Supplier 6 44 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Component Breakdowns Section The Component Breakdowns section is the only section on the Breakdown tab Use this section to define the contents of an ingr
77. of the field BOM Calculation is performed Also the remaining tabs associated with the Output Dialog Box appear In this example only one input exists If more inputs were present then the user would need to define by input the amount of material that contributes to this output This level of detail helps the application model theoretical data 6 34 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Figure 6 33 Yield consumed Settings v Calculate Done Cancel Yield Composition Nutrition Compliance Ext Data Summary Information spec Name op Orange Feels Short Name orange Peels Output Type internal m Access Level theoretical 5pecification Mo Access Global 0 Mo Access Global 0 Issue 001 Sub Category gor Oranges Status Group Fresh Effective Thursday August 13 2009 Inactive Originator Thomas Jim Last Edit Thursday August 13 2009 Composition Map Spec Name Yield Available Yield Consumed Valencia Orange 1000 00000 lb 00 00000 lb 20 00000 5091173 0013 Packaging Composition Map Spec Name Yield Available Yield Consumed 4 Upon clicking Done the output is now presented in the output subsection You may also notice that 1t is very useful to take the time to properly name your outputs Figure 6 34 Output subsection Material Qty Process G L Water G L ld We Step EXT Cost Step 1 Output 5091175
78. only available for Known to Contain and May Contain fields To remove one or more additives 1 Click the Additives link to open the Additives dialog box 2 Select the additives to remove on the right 3 Click the remove selected data icon 5 to remove them from the selection box 4 Click Done to commit your changes 3 8 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Related Specs Tab Associated Specifications Section In this section you can relate the current specification to one or more specifications in the system The Associated Specifications section provides a context for that relationship You can define pairs of contexts such as source by product or primary alternate and can apply these contexts to both sides of an association These relationships will depend on your system configuration For example Formulation Specification ABC could be associated to one or more formulation specifications as alternates These formulations would be declared and visible as alternates of Formulation Specification ABC On the individual formulation specifications Formulation Specification ABC would be automatically displayed as a Primary System ID is a code that identifies an external system Select a system ID to display the cross reference of the specification listed in the specification column The equivalent number will appear before the specification number Figure 3 9
79. section vg Breakdown oBreakdown Documents for this Specification F E formula 1 Fa Fe Liquid Smoke formulation Add New 3 22 The Breakdown Formula section contains any percent breakdown formulas for the specification You can use these breakdowns to host different versions of the formula breakdown based on supply or regulatory differentiation Restrictions Formulation Classifications Tags Do Mok Publish to Supplier Suppress Printing Dio Mot Publish to Supplier Key fields include Restrictions This is used to help categorize different versions of the breakdowns for usage in the Listed Ingredient Order LIO tool Formula Classifications Formula classifications can be used to enforce security for individual specifications Classifications can be managed in the Admin Tool and are tied to user groups Only users in the associated groups can view formulas that have a formulation classification Note Ona trade specification this section only appears when the item type is co pack When it is available this section appears on the Supporting Documents tab Tags Breakdowns can be tagged Tags help identify breakdowns and most tags help define how you want the system to react to the breakdown Available tags are listed on page 3 23 Formula Detail On the Formula detail page you can capture header information about the breakdown such as publication sourcing and formulation information This page
80. section describes the specification participating in the primary relationship with the activity and allows users to create a dependency between the activity and the primary specification or item name Note This section appears only in activities that are tied to a specific specification It does not appear when you are creating a new specification independent activity 20 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 20 3 Primary Action Item section Primary Action Item Item Name Allergen Disclosure None 5077412 001 Process Dependency Jtem Status dependent on this activity Yes O no Activity must reach Before item leaves Key fields include Item Name Displays the name and number of the specification that the activity is tied to hyperlinked to that specification Process Dependency Users choose whether to create a relationship between an activity workflow status and a specification workflow status If a dependency is in place the specification cannot move forward into a designated specification workflow status unless the activity first moves forward into the designated activity workflow status Related Items Section The related items section contains the specifications participating in a related relationship to this activity You can add one or more specifications and or objects to this section Note Activities participating in a related relationship will not appear in a specification s Activit
81. so far Lal 15 Dec 17 Dec do Jones 10 Quality Assurance Ty Ott Review 10 Dec 07 Review Dec 07 Lal 15 Dec 17 Dec Clicking View Historical Signature Documents opens a view of signature documents completed prior to the current stage Lineage History Section The Lineage History section shown in the figure below shows a history of where a nutrient profile or ingredient trade or formulation specification was created and updated from Figure 2 18 Lineage History section Lineage History Date User Action Specification 6 9 2008 2 25 24PM Smith Mark Created Sweet Water 2 5002851 001 3 21 2008 3 16 11 PM Walsh Mary Updated From Sweet Water 2 5002326 001 View All History Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Comparing Ingredient Specifications You can compare up to 10 ingredient specifications by using the specification comparison tool To access this tool 1 Click Spec Comparison on the left navigation panel GSM displays the Spec Comparison Report dialog box as shown in figure 2 19 below Figure 2 19 Spec Comparison Report dialog box Spec Comparison Report Print Settings Paper Size 5 letter Specification s Add Run Note To ensure optimal system performance the spec comparison report is limited to ten specs 2 Click Add to select the specifications to compare GSM opens the specification search dialog box 3 Find up to 10 specifica
82. specifications and their objects available for printing Specifications available for printing vary based on specification type The final printed output is an Adobe Acrobat PDF file The print output can include multiple specifications and objects The specification listing section includes the following information Specification Type The specifications available for printing are organized by specification type The active specification is indicated by the text Current Specification 2 20 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Sections The printed output includes everything you have selected in the Sections column Those objects vary by specification type but could include Specification Indicated by the specification number and name Supporting Documents Indicated by the type or name of the document does not include supporting documents attachments that are marked as proprietary Custom Sections Indicated by the name of the custom section does not include breakdowns that are marked with the suppress printing tag Testing Protocols Indicated by the name of the testing protocol Breakdown Indicated by the breakdown name does not include breakdowns that are marked with the suppress printing tag Sourcing Approval Indicated by Sourcing Number sourcing facility receiving facilities Includes any sourcing approvals attached to the specification Nutrient Co
83. the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN_RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS This tab contains the following sections a Summary Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 Q Packing Description Discussed below at Packing Description Section on a page 15 2 Cross References For discussion of this commonly used section please see Cross References Section on page 3 3 Q Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Packing Description Section Use this section to describe the packing material 15 2 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 15 Packing Configuration Specifications Figure 15 1 Packing Description section Packing Description Description Corrugated Case with Food Grade Poly Liner id Packing Tab This tab contains the following sections Q Packing Attribute inner pack Discussed below at Packing Attribute Inner Pack Sectio
84. to a specification are those with a status of active Figure 19 1 Testing Protocol Header section Testing Protocol Protocol 0000978 Protocol Name Red Cherry Wine Sensory id Description Blind Seven Criteria Wine Tasting Scope Global Originator Foodscientist Joe Created 7 20 2009 Edited 7 20 2009 19 2 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 19 Testing Protocol Library Facility Information Section Some protocols are closely associated to facilities due to equipment or geography In this section you can specify a set of facilities that you intend for this protocol to test Figure 19 2 Facility Information section Facility Information Facility Name Country Business Unit s gf ABC Dallas USA CPI Companies Facilities CPI Facilities North America CPI Companies Facilities CPI Co packers CPI Vendors Add New Sections Section In this section you can define a section for your protocol in which to group testing attributes for scoring You can apply a scoring method and weight to each section to describe how GSM scores these attributes in the testing system Figure 19 3 Sections section Sections eee Section Description eo re 2 Appearance Red wine presented as bright red 1 Lowest Rim colour Tilt the glass slightly and look at the edge of the wine to observe a purple tint representing youth Score Swirling Visually perceive Good legs indicating a thicker body and a
85. to be in edit mode before you can add a testing protocol You can add testing protocols to the section in two ways Add a new protocol Click Add New The testing protocol dialog box displays allowing you to create a new testing protocol This testing protocol will be specific to this specification Add an existing protocol Click Pull from Library The testing protocol search dialog box displays You can search for testing protocols using the provided criteria Refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Getting Started Guide for more information about searching Note Protocols from the testing protocol library are managed centrally Changes made in the testing protocol library will be reflected on any specification which consumes that testing protocol 3 21 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Attachments Section Select protocols from your search results by clicking the protocol number of each testing protocol you would like to reference thereby adding the protocol to the selection box below it When you are finished adding protocols click Add Spec to add the testing protocols to the specification The attachments section is where you add individual documents to a specification An attachment is an individual document For instructions for adding an attachment see Attachments Procedures Document Type and the procedure under it on page 3 14 Breakdown Formula Section Figure 3 25 Breakdown
86. to solicit approval for a specification before the specification can move to the next step in the workflow All requested signature documents must be moved to an approved state before the specification can move to the next workflow step When you select a signature document whether by action item or an email link GSM displays the signature document page as shown in figure 2 11 below Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Figure 2 11 Signature document page Summary Approval Audit Trail A ee ee PS ee ee RS You have been asked to approve the specification for Liquid Smoke Flavoring on behalf of Food Please use the Workflow option in the upper right hand corner to submit your approval or returr comments once you have reviewed the specification Specification Liquid Smoke Flavoring 5081231 001 gt click HERE to review the specification The Summary tab shows the specification that you have been asked to review You can follow the link to view the specification As figure 2 12 shows below the Approval Audit Trail tab shows the current status and owner of the signature document the desired action assigned dates and the history of the signature document Figure 2 12 Signature Approval tab Current Status Current Owner Sally Johnson Current Workflow Ingredient Specification Workflow Please Review Current Status Draft Review Desired Action
87. via script For the formulation specification to be marked as compliant based on the rollup compliance items marked as negative in Data Admin only have to be declared on one item those not marked as negative must be declared on all formula items To add new items select them and then click the add selected data icon The dialog box moves the selected items to the box on the right To remove items select them and click the remove selected data icon Once you have completed your list of complies with items click Done The dialog box closes leaving you on the Compliance tab 6 48 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Output Dialog Box Data associated with output that can be modified using the Output dialog box shown in figure 6 48 below To access the Output dialog box click on the document icon O Figure 6 48 Output dialog box Output settings y Calculate Done Cancel Summary Yield Composition Nutrition Compliance Ext Data ee Availability of the Settings Summary Information button is not controlled by P Man design mode but it s underlying Spec Name P step 1 Output 5090356 001 functionality is When not in chort Hame design mode the Settings button step 1 Output 5090356 001 presents the same list but all Output Type options are greyed out Access Level Theoretical Specification No Access Global 0 No Access Global 0
88. you can describe the details about the constraint The optimizer calculates the value in the Design Conformance column based on data that is on the specification and shows what level of conformance your specification is in currently with regard to that constraint Figure 6 66 shows the Constraints section Figure 6 66 Constraints section Constraints Type Condition Conformance 99 999995 accurate 2 1 Objective Minimize Cost per 100g 0 01043 USD per 100g 2 2 Ingredient Cost lt 0 00900 USD per 1000 a 0 01043 USD per 100g 3 Extended Attribute Test Number lt 0 00500 q per 100g ll 0 053149 per 1000 4 Nutrient Content Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg per 100g 1162 62162 mg per 100g Gh The first rule that you must define is the objective constraint The system automatically includes the objective constraint place holder This objective is the main goal for your optimization scenario To edit the objective place holder constraint click the edit icon on your objective constraint as shown in figure 6 67 Figure 6 67 Edit mode Constraints Type Conformance 99 99999 accurate 2H 1 Objective Mie Ori wal _ 0 01043 USD per 100g FP 2 Ingredient Cost lt 0 00900 USD per 100g Gd 0 01043 USD per 100g a 3 Extended Attribute Test Number lt 0 00500 q per 100g ll 0 05314 g per 100g P 4 Nutrient Content Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg per 100g Ml 1162 62162 mg per 100g Add You can configure the objective const
89. yt All User Profile Asia None ENO Astralia 1 ty Empty Group E European Union E D mji data group For 6 0 Netherlands E South America F la H Amaranth dye I Anise J Annatto E Apple Arachis oil Ascorbic Acid The dialog box refreshes with a list of choices filtered based on your selected criteria 3 To filter choices alphabetically click a letter in the leftmost box The contents ofthe second box reload with only those choices beginning with the letter that you have selected Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 4 To add an item listed in the second box select the item and then click the add selected data icon gt The selected item moves over to the rightmost box Note This screen supports multiple select Control mouse in Windows 5 To remove one or more items from the rightmost box select one or more items in the rightmost box and click the remove selected data icon Laa The selected item s move to the leftmost box 6 Atthetop right ofthe dialog box click Done The dialog box closes and your revised set of fields appears listed in the search term field to the right of the add data icon in the search form There is a lot of variety in the dialog boxes that display when you click the add data icon h The basic types of dialog boxes are e Alphabetically filtered prefilled list dialog box as shown in figure 21 5 Group Filter dialog box on page 21 6 e Geographically
90. 0 lb _AddNew Consurritems Calculate Material Oty Process G L Water G L Yid gt Step EXT Cost Step 1 Gukouk 5091175 001 P 1000 00000 lb 1 00000 1 00000 1000 00000 lb 100 00 0 00000 sg Internal Total 1000 00000 lb 1000 00000 Ib Add Mew 2 Click Add New to create the second output and you will be presented with the Output Dialog Box 6 33 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 32 Output dialog box Output Summary Summary Information Spec Name e step 1 Output 5091177 001 Short Mame step 1 Output 5091177 001 Output Type Internal ha Access Level Theoretical Specification Mo Access Global 0 Mo Access Global 0 Category to Category Available Sub Category No Category Available Group No Category Available Originator Thomas Jim Composition Map Spec Name Valencia Orange 5091173 001 Packaging Composition Map 5pec Name Spec Y Issue Status Effective Inactive Last Edit Settings Y Calculate Done Cancel 2091177 001 Thursday August 13 2009 Thursday August 13 2009 Yield Available Yield Consumed 1000 00000 lb 0 00000 lb 0 00000 Yield Available Yield Consumed 3 Populate the Yield Consumed At this point you are assigning the portion of the inputs to be taken from then initial input and assigned to the output you are working with Note that once the Yield Consumed is entered and you click out
91. 0 lb 100 00000 50 00000 0 00000 Add New Order Items Calculate Key fields include Packaging Material Specification Packaging material specification that is being added as an input item for the formulation specification This field can contain additional icons e By default the BOM items are added with a locked icon 4 meaning the specification is tied to an exact specification issue combination If you want to use the get latest revision feature unlock the specification 14 This action tells GSM to go and get the latest revision e You can click the annotations icon to add annotations Added annotations display in read mode and are included in printing Pkg Type Type of packaging The four choices are Inner Outer Intermediate and Label See Packaging Material Specifications on page 11 1 for more information Qty Amount of the packaging that goes into the formula Scrap Factor Percentage of the quantity that will be lost This field displays for packaging items only Yld Actual amount of the packaging used in the formula Step That packaging s percentage as it relates to the step Batch Percentage that packaging makes up in the total USD 100g This cost is loaded from the cost library which can be loaded via an API The preferences describing the default cost data to load are managed via Profiles and Preferences Formulation Preferences under the Cost Preferences section Also within G
92. 00 0 01243 lb Textured Soy Flour Caramel Colored y 4 37000 bo 0 01093 lb Breading NW 834216 6 2 50000 6 0 00625 lb Soy Protein Concentrate Powdered 7 2 04750 0 00512 lb flavors B 2 04750 0 00512 lb Onion Salt El 1 04000 0 00260 lb Salt Granular Not lodized 10 0 87351 0 00218 lb Onion Chopped Dehydrated 11 0 72000 0 00180 lb Caramel Color Acid Proof Single Strength 12 0 25000 0 00063 lb Sodium Tripolyphosphate 15 0 22000 36 0 00055 lb Soluble Celery on Dextrose 14 0 09000 0 00023 lb Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose 100 00000 uo 0 25000 lb In addition the Preview section shows the adjusted percent yield of each item based on suppressed items and its relative weight volume per serving 18 16 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 18 LIO Profiles Note The preview will automatically combine like items including group designations based on LIO item name in the currently selected language Alias FIC Operation Click Alias FIC to open the aliasing dialog box shown in figure 18 15 below Figure 18 15 Aliasing dialog box Done Cancel Restrictions Restrictions LIO Disclosure s Term or Alias Disclosure Priority Constraints flavors 2 04750 o F Flavors gt 0 00000 Total Solids lt 100 00000 Total Solids gt 0 00000 Composition Onion Salt 2 04750 o O Onions Reg gt 0 00000 Total Solids fic 1000046 lt 100 00000
93. 0000 kg Key fields include Output The corresponding step that this output created from Input The step number where the output will be consumed This field is only available when output type is Internal Material The name of the output When the creation of a step automatically creates an output a name is generated The naming convention is Step Step Number Ouput Specification Number Issue Number The name can be updated via the Output dialog box Output dialog box The primary tool for managing data related to the output such as nutrition compliance and other rolled up data See Output Dialog Box on page 6 49 for more information Drop down arrow This arrow represents an extensibility point that has been leveraged to help BOM calculations treat this output It is primarily useful when managing multiple outputs on the Process tab By default the outputs are variable and should adjust linearly to the formula For example 2 outputs each consume a half Add two more and all four outputs receive 25 By choosing Fixed the specified quantity to the output will remain fixed regardless of adjustments made to the input BOM Output Type Available types are Internal External Owned and Referenced as defined in Outputs on page 6 2 Qty Total amount of inputs for that output This field is not shown for Internal types because the quantity associated with the material is accounted for in the final output P
94. 00000 Ih mul 13 03781 5080166 001 1 5 1000 00000 b 959 75000 lb 100 00000 Add New Calculate A Input Percent The user enters data by typing in the Total Yield and entering in the proper allotment per row When the application performs its calculations the yield for a given material or row will be established As needed the user can adjust the gain loss to establish the quantity The remaining fields will be updated as the application calculates 6 16 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Figure 6 13 User types Total Yield Summary Formulation Process Ext Data Related Specs CSS Supporting Documents Reference Inputs Step Material Oty G L Yld Wo Batch SF sugar Granulated Ha 50 00000 lb 1 00000 0 00000 Ib 5 21512 5077505 001 3 dE water Carbonated 048 200000 p 95000 783 75000 lb 81 74707 5077462 001 3 dE orange Flavor 4487 Oa 125 00000 1 00000 125 00000 lb 13 03781 5080166 001 3 1000 00000 Ib 958 75000 b 100 00000 Add New Calculate Selecting a BOM Calculation Path When a formulation specification is created the BOM calculation path is immediately assigned using the path found in the user s Profile and Preferences Once the formulation specification is saved the BOM calculation path for the formulation specification is managed via the formulation specifications Settings button A user may change the formula s BOM calculation path at an
95. 001 P o 00 00000 lb 1 00000 1 00000 500 00000 lb 80 00 0 00000 x Internal Orange Peels Lal 200 00000 lb 1 00000 1 00000 00 00000 lb 20 00 0 00000 a Internal Total 1000 00000 lb 1000 00000 lb 6 35 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Alternate Output Items Sub Section This section allows you to define an output that could be used instead of the one you created in the step This subsection uses the get latest revision capability Figure 6 35 Alternate Output Items subsection Orig Material s Factor G L Material s Description gy 77419 001 T 0 00000 0 00000 BBQ Sauce Dry Mix ah alternate BBQ A fing 5077419 005 cae Click the add data icon to select a different specification for Add New the original or alternate material Key fields include Orig Materials The original output item Factor Factor of the original quantity that will be used with new material G L Factor applied to the initial quantity to account for loss This field displays for BOM items only Materials The alternate material Description Free text comments about the alternate item To add an alternate item click Add New GSM displays the output items dialog box as figure 6 36 shows below Figure 6 36 Alternate input items dialog box BOM example Done Cancel LI Orange Flavor 123 5080091 001 E Sugar Granulated 5077505 001 Water Carbonated 5077462 00 1 Select the output item s you
96. 047 74 2 00000 F Comp 1 8 84774 10 00000 C Seasoned Cooked Pork 82 304539 87 000003 C 100 000014 Regulatory BOM Section This section displays a label composition like version of the formulation as it relates to the output This view includes any breakdown information for items in the formulation Only the breakdown that is tagged with the Regulatory tag will be included in this view 6 57 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process The declaration method for this view mimics the X Y method from LIO Ifa regulatory breakdown does not exist or only uses range values the specification name is used The data in this section is read only and will not be included when written to the ingredient specification It will be printed with the formulation specification output material print Figure 6 55 Regulatory BOM section Regulatory BOM Item Seasoned Cooked Pork Vinegar Distilled White 100 Grain Comp 1 Comp 2 Theoretical Breakdown Section Formulation 82 30453 17 695477 50 00000 50 00000 This section displays the combined view of the data in the Regulatory BOM section It includes breakdown items from the regulatory BOM and combines like items Figure 6 56 Theoretical Breakdown section Theoretical Breakdown Item Comp 1 Comp 2 Seasoned Cooked Pork Regulatory Breakdown Section Formulation a 04774 8 04774 82 30453 This section displays the breakdown buil
97. 2 mg per 100g Add Guidelines Inputs Material e Scalability Scalability Scalability Scalability Adjust otimizal Equivalent Type Prodika at di Limit d Control Control Y Limit oe 1 Onion Chopped Dehydrated oa 0 25000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 ai 0 00000 5077484001 2 Tomato Paste Grade A Fancy A 0 50000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 dl 0 00000 5077420 001 3 Spice Blend Dry 350 A 0 25000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 dl 0 00000 5077442 001 4 Beef Broth A 0 50000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 ai 0 00000 5090850 001 5 Ground Beef A 1 00000 Ib 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 8 0 00000 5090848 00 1 6 Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose f 0 10000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 dl 0 00000 5077447 001 7 Salt Granular Not Iodized A 0 10000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 a 0 00000 5077441 00 1 a Chopped Tomato Ca 1 00000 lb 30 0000 15 0000 15 0000 30 0000 A 0 00000 5090849 00 1 Optimization Method Formulation Constraints Distribution Minimize Change all Constraints Required 2 Isolated Output Distribution Emphasize Objective Incremental Constraints O Related Output Distribution Optimize Refresh 6 75 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 80 Optimized solution The optimization engine will try to provide a solution to the optimization problem with the rules that you have defined Ifthe constraints are too aggressive the o
98. 233908765423 Add New Key fields include Equivalent In this field you can associate a cross reference equivalent per packing configuration Equipment Specifications Section The Equipment Specifications section contains the list of equipment specifications linked to a packaging material specification Figure 11 8 Equipment Specifications section Equipment Specifications Spec Spec Name 50801 20 001 ACME COMPANY EUROPE Y 680MD Add New Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 11 CSS Tab Packaging Material Specifications For discussion of this commonly used tab please see CSS Tab on page 3 10 Supporting Documents Tab The Packaging Material Specification Supporting Documents tab contains the list of all supporting documents associated with a packaging material specification The Supporting Documents tab consists of three sections a References Tab Supporting Documents The document types available are Attachments Procedures URL and Rich Text For discussion of this commonly used section please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 Testing Protocols For discussion of this commonly used section please see Testing Protocols Section on page 3 21 The Packaging Material Specification References tab contains the list of all the reference data linked to a packagin
99. 3 Chapter 4 Trade Specifications OEN EW eaae A A a si ES 4 1 Pate evel PUNCHONS aid EIA AS AR A ali 4 2 Summa Dada adora acta adias 4 3 summary Intormation SECON idad 4 3 Product Ten HEC atIOl Se cho pushing bb NA se O Aoi 4 3 Next Lower Level Items Section bat 4 5 Parent Items Calculated Section A a e Gas atadas 4 5 Brand Intormation Seco A ASS 4 6 Product Classi hedi On SCHOOL i DDS AE A A RS 4 7 PACK ACIIC Lae acacia 4 8 Packasino Atrubutes Consumer Unit SECON 64 2165 nio into at eed arhan ewido ee hatha eee eeeaee 4 4 8 Packasiis Attributes raded Unit SECON a A bid iia 4 10 Sakine ICIS NE Scion tania fee aya da deen ae eid ere eae 4 11 Storage Requirements ecu A A A A AA 4 11 ME EE SHONEN ada bad 4 11 Package Materials SECO ita ns es ess 4 12 Alternate Packaging Secon ta AS AA A EAS AO 4 12 Environmental Waste per item sold Seco diia 4 13 Compliance Taba A SAS A E ead intel d ie 4 4 13 Cabell Claims 011 La 11 A aroha xs tata rgd Seine en we cake wh O POE RO ois wen Eacee eR 4 13 Label Chins De teria tl Oi 4 24 dona o a AR AAA ard Ratan 4 14 Related Sees dD ac nu eet ae ten wea SAE ee ooo Dan Gouna baa uae cee des 4 17 Ingredient Specii caon SeCHON O AA A A ee lena eee gas 4 17 a ase tak anes cy ae tet cee AT A a I ee 4 17 vii Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Suppor ae Documents Taba A ANA AA 4 18 Nutrient Protle Eco als is heed de Elo AR 4 18 Regulatory Eesisiation Secos tada Ara 4 19 Restlatory Lesis
100. 4 Attachments Procedures Document ly per rss ria AA Ri 3 14 RS eeed 3 15 Rich Texto cument ips aia e etna ach o adan heeds 3 16 Product Lacer ES AA SSA N 3 16 vi Global Specification Management User Guide Contents Nutrient Compositor AS Ra 3 16 Views Ata Dala a E Sica ed ara Erice E 3 18 DRE Documenti econ t aaron aint hese de ty aja 3 18 Viewing DRL Catalogs and Document A 3 18 Niewino d Catalogs Reference ani aia 3 18 Viewlis a Document Referencia AAA 3 19 Description econ tr e an 3 19 VETO REVISION SECO AAA AA A SOS 3 20 Attachments Se cuO Narro cies 3 20 Adding DRL Catalog and Document References ooooooooocrrcrr rr 3 20 di ia a A RR A A 3 21 Attachments SECO A IS AAA AA 3 22 Breakdown Formula SectioO ee eee eee e ee ee eee eee e eset eee eee eeeeees 3 22 OPM Uae A RRA 3 22 Publish Seane SeCHON 4 otc rot one O cet aise selec 3 23 Related Somrene Approval Second ddr A A As 3 24 O A A RO RRA 3 24 References Ta DS AA A A A AS 3 25 AVES O o ay ee et Be Giese ee eee OE eee eee 3 25 SUPPLIES Second nut akan A A aan aie te ia 3 25 Specification Dependencies Socio ddr hehe ne eee elena nee ee ate te ees 3 27 Related Documents SECO lada 3 27 Custom Dalai ta ds a A oh Oita AAA ADA EA AA 3 28 Extended Attribltes SECOS 3 29 CUStOM SCCIIONS ro AE AAA A En 3 29 Calcular dice DES tanda 3 29 Addn a CUSCO A AA 3 30 Editing a Custom Seconds an A io ias 3 31 Dele ne a COSONIC O nins sida ATEO ET paid axed 3 3
101. 7 20 2009 Overrides OR Gain Loss Factor Calories 161 29030 kcal Energy kJ 1616 87400 kJ Protein 3 22200 q Carbohydrates 2 00000 g Total Fat 40 00000 g Moisture 8 00000 g Ash 4 20000 g Sodium 19380 00000 mg The Nutrition tab consists of the Nutrient Composition section 6 45 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 6 46 Nutrient Composition Section This section shows the nutrient composition that is stored on the specification From Spec tThe nutrients that exist on the specification Overrides You can enter a new value for the nutrient and the Gain Loss factor column Gain Loss Factor You can specify a gain loss factor to be applied to the original nutrient value Compliance Tab In the Compliance tab you can enhance or modify specification information related to compliance You can add or modify the following compliance items e Complies With e Allergens Present e Allergens May Contain e Allergens Does Not Contain Intolerances Sensitivities Present e Intolerances Sensitivities May Contain e Intolerances Sensitivities Does Not Contain e Additives Present e Additives May Contain e Additives Does Not Contain Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Figure 6 46 Basis dialog box Compliance tab Basis Refresh Done BBQ Sauce Dry Mix 5077419 001 Specification Attributes Breakdown Nutrition Comp Ext Data
102. 9 Q Label Claims Discussed below at Label Claims Section on page 4 13 a Compliance Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Compliance Information Section on page 3 6 Q Allergens Intolerances and Additives For discussion of this commonly used section please see Additives Allergens and Intolerances Sections on page 3 7 Label Claims Section The Label Claims section contains the label claims linked to a trade specification as figure 4 18 shows below The label claims values and calculation rules are maintained by an administrator Figure 4 18 Label Claims section Label Claims Potential p Spee bal Actual Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 4 14 Key fields include Potential Select all of the possible label claims for the finished good This field can be populated two ways You can either click on the linked label Potential or calculate the label claims by using label claims determination To calculate label claims select the label claims determination icon si GSM opens the label claims determination popup shown in figure 4 20 on page 4 16 See Label Claims Determination on page 4 14 for more information Actual Select the actual label claims declared on the finished good This field can be populated two ways You can either click on the linked label Actual or use the copy field icon 4 When you click the copy field icon GSM displays a multi select dialog
103. 9523 001 Orange Bubbles Draft Summary Formulation Process Ext Data Related Specs CSS Supporting Documents References Approval Audit Trail Current Status Current Owner David Carter Current Workflow Formulation Spec Workflow Current Status Draft Desired Action Draft Start Date 3 5 2009 Amber Date Red Date Event History Status User Time Comments Draft Paula Cooper 6 15 2009 3 16 10 PM A Global Succession has been executed to replace ing 5077413 001 with ing 5077512 001 Draft David Carter 3 5 2009 2 33 09 PM signature Document View Historical Signature Documents Lineage History Date User Action Specification 3 5 2009 2 32 30 PM Carter David Create New View All History Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Smart Issue Tool 21 8 The Smart Issue tool allows you to create issues of entire hierarchies of specifications You are able to just issue the hierarchy only or replace specifications when issuing For example you have a finished good hierarchy where you want to replace Packaging A with Packaging B When smart issue is complete you ll see that the entire trade specification hierarchy attached to Packaging A is issued and Packaging B is attached to the new version of the hierarchy Figure 21 10 Smart Issue packaging trade specification example Smart Issue d Replacing Packaging A with Packaging B Use the Smart Issue tool to e Version a hier
104. Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Global Specification Management User Guide Release 6 0 0 3 0 Part No E18532 01 September 2010 ORACLE Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Copyrights and Trademarks Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Release 6 0 0 3 0 E18532 01 Copyright 1995 2010 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs software databases and related documentation and technical data delivered to U S Government customers are commercial computer software or commerci
105. Available columns dialog box gt Oracle Windows Internet Explorer Done Cancel Attribute Value Comment 2 Select a column and then click the add selected data icon gt 3 Repeat step 2 to add additional columns 4 Click Done GSM closes the dialog box The added columns display in the table 5 Click Save To delete a column 1 With the custom section in edit mode click Remove Column GSM displays a dialog box listing columns that can be deleted as figure 3 38 shows above 2 Select a column and then click the add selected data icon EE Repeat step 2 to delete additional columns 4 Click Done GSM closes the dialog box The selected columns no longer appear in the table 5 Click Save OO 3 32 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Deleting a Custom Section To remove a custom section 1 With the page in edit mode click Delete Section GSM displays a dialog box listing all custom sections as figure 3 39 shows below Figure 3 39 Available sections dialog box gt Oracle Windows Internet Explorer Aka Dome Cancel Adhesives Time Temperature RGS Calculated Section 2 Select a custom section and then click Done The custom section is removed 3 Click Save 3 33 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 3 34 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 4 Trade Specifications This chapter presents an overview of GSM capabi
106. CSS application As shown in the figure below this section contains additional data about each publication Figure 3 11 Initial Publication section Initial Publication Trading Publication Target Initial Last Info eg Current Partner Type Market Publication Updated Provider Manufacturer Status F GB gt MDR New GE l 12 14 2007 Acme Acme Draft MDREU Company GSi Ltd al US PDK linitial Load yus 12 14 2007 Acme Draft He Syndication GSi WebService PDK_WS Add New Validate For Publication 3 10 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections To add an initial publication 1 Click Add New under the Initial Publication table The publications requirements dialog box displays as shown below Figure 3 12 CSS Publications Requirements dialog box GSM Windows Internet Explorer Cancel Manufacturer Publication Type Initial Load New PDK Ws UCC US East The Large Supermarket 023123098121203 US East gt Food Barrel Atlanta GA 032874987434234 Jus East Food Barrel Marietta GA 03287498743001 Jus East Food Barrel Smith AR 0328749874342123 JUS East Food Barrel Penn FL 023098709874234 d US East Food Barrel New Orleans LA 011111143423 PAP m as a me internet A 100 2 Specify the following required data Manufacturer Defines the source of the data being syndicated For Global Data Synchr
107. Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features Checking the Status of the Smart Issue Use the Audit tab to view the status of the smart issue request The tab includes the user that initiated the smart issue request the data time the request was initiated and the status 21 25 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 21 26 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 22 Component Catalog This chapter describes the capabilities and applied uses of the Component Catalog function Topics in this chapter include a Component Catalog a Using Component Catalog Terms Component Catalog If you have the necessary administrative privileges in Component Catalog you can add terms to the database and manage certain properties about the terms Once these terms have been created you can use the library of predefined terms when creating percent breakdowns or when working on ingredient statements in LIO in GSM Integration with Other Applications Component Catalog is integrated with GSM Use Component Catalog terms when building percent breakdowns on ingredient specifications or when working on ingredient statements in LIO 22 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Creating a New Component Catalog Term Create and manage Component Catalog terms inside the component catalog The Component Catalog is available as a submenu of GSM on the left navigation panel You can create a new term by clicking Create New in the upper r
108. DED VEGETABLES oF FP aI SV POTATOES 26 3636 0 BEEF 22 727370 BBO SAUCE 18 1818 WATER 4 9000 0 SUGAR 0 1000 This page includes the following sections a Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 a Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 Related Specs the sole section in the Related Specs tab displays the menu item and trade specifications that use the current nutrient profile The system automatically generates the list of specifications to which this nutrient profile is tied and displays them in this section Click the linked number in the Spec column to open the specification A checkmark may be displayed next to the specifications in the Active column The checkmark signifies that the nutrient profile is marked as the active on the trade specification 8 13 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 8 11 Related Specs section Related Specs Spec 5086773 001 5087696 001 5077539 002 Spec Name SGD BEQ Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz BBQ Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz squ BBQ Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz Supporting Documents Tab In Supporting Documents the only section in this tab you can attach any background documents that may help to explain the nutrient profile The Type Trade Specification Trade Specification Trade Specificat
109. F 2 Ingredient Cost lt 0 00900 USO per 100g D 0 01043 3 Extended Attribute Gd 0 05314 2 4 Nutrient Content Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg per 100g per 1000 Gl 1162 62 The Extended Attribute constraint is composed of Extended Attribute The extended attribute to constrain GSM pulls the list of extended attributes from the theoretical extended attributes on the output dialog Operator Logical operator used for comparison purposes Options are e equal e lt less than or equal e gt greater than or equal Value The value for extended attribute that you want to optimize towards UOM The unit of measure for the extended attribute Display as GSM can display this information per 100g Design Conformance The current value of the constraint and an icon signifying if the constraint is met When you have finished creating the Extended Attribute constraint click the apply changes icon 4 to save your row GSM redisplays the row showing the current value in the Design Conformance column Ordering Once you have created all of the constraints to guide the optimization engine you can order them using the re order row icons ft at the right side of each constraint row Click the re order row upwards icon 4 to move the constraint toward the top of the list and the re order row downwards icon amp to move it toward the bottom of the list The order of constraints represents the rank priority of the constr
110. Formula Tab on page 4 22 Processing Procedures Tab on page 4 23 Comments Tab on page 4 23 Attachments Tab on page 4 24 Lt i oo O On the Cover Page tab you can define the application summary data including the application type The application type in turn drives some of the relevant fields on the rest of the cover page Cover Page has the following sections Q Application Summary Section on page 4 20 Q Application Type Cover Page Section on page 4 20 4 19 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 4 20 Application Summary Section In this section you can identify information that will help classify and generate a regulatory filing application such as the name of the product the status and the formulation specification to use to generate the procedures Figure 4 24 Application Summary section Application summary Application Type luspa w Name of Product ros Meat Mix Salisbury Steak 15 Pork Spec 0000261 Status Approved hy Approval Date E a Approval Ingredient Specification Formulation Specification Key fields include Application Type Controls which cover page attributes are visible and the printed format of the filing Status You can alter the status when the specification is in edit mode Ingredient Specification Defines the produced material that the regulatory filing is being created for Formulation Specification Choose from a list of formulation specifications t
111. GAR 0 1000 18 21 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 18 22 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 19 Testing Protocol Library This chapter describes the purpose and use of the Testing Protocol Library of Global Specification Management Topics in this chapter include DO O O O O O Overview Page Level Functions Testing Protocol Header Section Facility Information Section Sections Section Extended Attributes Section Testing Protocol Detail Section The Testing Protocol Library is a centralized location where you can document and manage quality and sampling procedures Procedures are documented in GSM for specifications Therefore you can capture protocols for raw materials ingredients products packaging printed packaging work in process ingredients and formulation and finished goods menu and trade Testing Protocols are then utilized in Product Quality Scorecard s Scorecards to assist in determining the quality of a specification A Testing Protocol can be created using one of two approaches Q Global via Library These testing protocols are global in scope and can be applied to many specifications The protocols are created and maintained via the Testing Protocol Library and applied from a given specification by Pulling from Library Q Spec via Specification Testing protocols created from an individual specification are limited in scope to that specification You ca
112. GSM in two ways a Primary Relationship A user can create an activity directly from another specification We refer to this relationship as a Primary Relationship where the activity has a unique relationship to the originating specification Related Relationship A user can create a standalone activity and link it to one or more specifications or objects We refer to this relationship as a Related Relationship and consider it to be generic in nature Creating a Primary Relationship from a Specification You can create a primary relationship from an existing specification in GSM To 4 create a primary relationship from an existing specification Access the specification to tie the activity to and click Act at the top right of the page GSM displays an activity opened to the Summary tab By creating the activity in this manner the activity has a primary relationship to the specification from which it originated Type a title for the activity in the Activity Title field Click the hyperlinked Activity Type field label A dialog box opens Via this dialog box users select an activity workflow that will be used to manage the activity The activity workflows are organized and presented by GSM business unit BU Please note activities do not resolve to workflows similar to other specification types Select an application type from the list of types in that dialog box and click Done at the top right The box closes and your selection appea
113. Information Described below in Summary Information Section on page 6 50 Composition Map Described below in Composition Map Section on page 6 52 e Packaging Composition Map Described below in Packaging Composition Map Section on page 6 52 The Output dialog uses the following action buttons Settings Displays options related to pushing data from the theoretical output to the output ingredient If items are selected then data will be pushed when the formulation specification is saved Batch Tuning Allows users to increase or decrease the yielded quantity through various options The tuning affects only the inputs tied to the output being tuned e Calculate Runs BOM calculation and performs the approximate yield and extended attribute calculations Save and Close Runs the BOM calculation and performs the approximate yield and extended attribute calculations and closes the dialog box e Close Closes the dialog box without saving any data to the specification Summary Information Section The Summary Information section contains the identity information about the output including Specification The name of the output item By default the system automatically names the output Step X Output Spec where X is the number of the step and Spec represents the system assigned number given to the output item This can be edited by the user When an output is marked as External this will be the na
114. LL Is FALSE Is TRUE Adding More Criteria In addition to the basic entry fields on the search form key field list operator and search term two action links appear more criteria and additional attributes as shown in figure 1 12 MA Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 1 12 The More Criteria and Additional Attributes action links on the main search form Packaging Material Specs Create New Category Sea rch Search Criteria more criteria additional attributes Load A Save Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page 10 When clicked the first of these action links more criteria creates a second row of the main three search fields You can use additional rows to enter additional search parameters Searching Custom Data You can use the second action link additional attributes to search for specification with existing extended attributes custom sections breakdown or BOM items Refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Getting Started Guide for more information Understanding the Category Tab The second method of finding data within Global Specification Management GSM is the Category tab which resides on the same page as the main search form see figure 1 13 Figure 1 13 Category tab as seen from the main search form tab Trade Specifications Category Search Search Criteria Contains Y Load
115. Management for Process To prepare to generate the LIO tree 1 At the upper right corner of the page click Edit GSM reloads the page in editable mode as shown in figure 18 5 below Figure 18 5 LIO Construction section in edit mode Restrictions Generate LIO Tree Format Combined Statement level 2 Inactive Rows hide show LIO Tree has not been Generated 2 Define the following summary level information e Restrictions e Format e Inactive Rows Restrictions Restrictions are a configurable list that you can use to differentiate disclosures and groupings Restrictions impact two major areas of functionality Component Catalog For example in Canada you might be able to rename salty beef to beef but in the United States because of tighter regulations around sodium you could not By setting the restrictions on the LIO tree to Canada you could see disclosures and groupings set up in the Component Catalog with a restriction of Canada LIO would be able to leverage this information to modify the ingredient statement in Canada to refer to salty beef as beef If you were creating an ingredient statement for the United States the salty beef would have to be labeled as such For more information on restrictions disclosures and groupings see Component Catalog on page 22 1 Ingredient Breakdown Similar to the Component Catalog breakdowns can contain regional or regulatory diffe
116. Name List X y List i x y List 1 x y Do NOT Declare 18 9 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Right Menu Actions View Perform Actions E Item Mame E Recon Equiv Ingredient Statement g fk Do Nok Declare 3 Rename Item E Annotate Eal Audit History Divide In the case of ingredients click View to refer to the corresponding specification in GSM In the case of Component Catalog components click View to refer to the corresponding Component Profile of the item Add New Group Perform Actions E Add Mew Group Click this menu option to create a new group directly under the current item Once the group is created you can delete it 1f empty or relocate it via drag and drop Refer to FIC MO o img Item Mame a fename Item ig Do Mot Declare Es Annotate Cel Audit History Divide Click this menu option to consider other options for disclosure based on the Component Catalog profile of the current item 18 10 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 18 LIO Profiles Recon Equiv Perform Actions A Wie E Item Mame 1 Add New Group E Ingredient Statement f Recon f Equiv ig Do Mot Declare E nnotate Ed Audit History Divide Click this menu option to work with reconstitution and equivalency factors that will adjust the moisture content of the current item Initially GSM will display the dialog box shown in figure 18 8 below
117. Output Type Quantity Process G L Water G L Yield External Product 3 70000 lb 1 00000 1 00000 3 70000 lb Constraints Distribution 2 All Constraints Required 2 Isolated Output Distribution Incremental Constraints O Related Output Distribution Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications To reset the optimization scenario to the original formulation click Refresh The Refresh button will pull the original information from the formulation specification as 1t relates to the selected output Optimization Action Buttons Optimization action buttons are defined below and shown in figure 6 81 Reset Pulls the original information from the formulation specification as it relates to the selected output and clears all constraints and guideline adjustments Snapshot Stores the optimized formula as a snapshot on the original formulation specification Save Saves the optimization scenario without adjusting the original formulation Done Pushes the optimized formula if one exists to the formulation specification based on the selected distribution method and returns the user to the formulation specification If no optimized formula exists this will simply close the optimization popup Cancel Closes the optimization popup Figure 6 81 Optimization action buttons Reset Snapshot Save Done Cancel 6 77 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 6 78 Global Specifica
118. Owner and Readers fields will be allowed to view the request b If the Private flag is selected the Readers field will appear Click the Readers hyperlink to open the user and group multi select search Only users added to this field and owners will be able to view this smart issue request 5 Enter a Description of the request 6 Optionally in the remaining sections on the page add extended attributes custom sections and attachments 7 Click Save to save the smart issue request You will be able to attach smart issue requests to NPD activities and or GSM activities You can view all NPD activities associated to this request by clicking on the NPD Activities hyperlink in the Related Documents section You will see all GSM activities associated to the smart issue request in the Activities section Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features Finding the Specifications to Version Use the Details tab to specify which type of smart issue to perform The options are e Replace Specification e Replace Specification Given Parent e Version Hierarchy Only Replace Specification Use this option to replace a specification with another specification This option is used to find all hierarchies that are attached to a given specification In the example below you would be replacing the ingredient specification IngA vl with ingredient specification IngB v1 Notice after smart issue runs all of the
119. Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons except Calculate are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are Y E Summary Tab Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Calculate Performs all custom data calculations This button is displayed when the specification is in edit mode Calculation also happens when you save your nutrient profile Create Copy Create a new copy of the current nutrient profile For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 CACS Screen the current specification using Computer Aided Compliance Screening CACS an application that you can use to inspect materials for fitness against any number of user defined screens Appears only if your installation includes CACS For more information on CACS please refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Computer Aided Compliance Screening User Guide L10 Create a new LIO profile automatically linking the nutrient profile The ingredient specification must be selected manually The LIO bu
120. Q Ingredient Statements section Discussed below at Ingredient Statements Section on page 10 5 Q Breakdown section For discussion of this section please see Breakdown Formula Section on page 3 22 Ingredient Statements Section The Ingredient Statements section contains the ingredient statement for the ingredient specification The ingredient statement can be entered in a number of ways Ifyou have the F amp C bundle you can generate and push the ingredient statement using LIO This would be pushed into the combined statement field Ifyou do not have the F amp C bundle you can build the ingredient statement from a selected breakdown or manually enter the ingredient statement 10 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 10 4 Ingredient Statements section Ingredient Statements o Combined Statement apples wax UY Compliance Tab The Compliance tab includes the following sections Q Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 Q Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 Q Compliance Information section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Compliance Information Section on page 3 6 A Additives Allergens and Intolerances For discussion of this commonly used section please see Additives Allergens and Intolerances Sectio
121. SM you can change cost using the Setting action button Cost Preferences section If a cost override has been entered the override icon lt a gt displays EXT Cost Calculated cost for the input quantity Three columns display at the end of the inputs grid as figure 6 39 shows below 6 38 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Figure 6 39 Inputs grid columns Cost 100 ASR J00 Substitute material Displays the substitution icon 9 if substitutes have been defined on the packaging specification When you click the icon GSM displays the Substitute Material dialog box Use this dialog box to swap out materials with available selections and to update quantities Item history Displays the item history icon Click on the icon to view a list of input items their issues and their statuses Delete Click the delete icon to delete the input item The step must meet the delete step criteria for the icon to appear The following buttons are found at the bottom of the inputs grid Add New Click to display the packaging specification search dialog box where you can select a specification for the step Order Items Click to change the sort order of the inputs GSM displays the Order Inputs dialog box as figure 6 40 shows below Figure 6 40 Order Inputs dialog box for packaging Order Inputs Done Cancel Material YY Step Label Paper 300 x 406 5077465 001
122. Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Specification Dependencies Section The Specification Dependencies section contains a Where Used link When clicked GSM displays a dialog box listing parent and child specifications that are directly or indirectly related on this specification This information is read only The dialog box displays a table that contains the parent or child specification type and the number of specifications of that type that are related with the specification that you are viewing If you click the specification type hypertext link the table expands and displays the specification number and name of all the dependent specifications Note The specifications listed in the popup are configurable For more information please see the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Configuration Guide You can go directly to a related specification by clicking on the linked specification name Figure 3 31 Specification Dependencies dialog box expanded Close Trade Specification 24 Master Specifications 3 Labeling Specifications 1 Printed Packaging Specifications 7 5077541 001 Carton Beef w BBO Sauce Child trd 5077539 001 5077541 001 Carton Beef w BBO Sauce Child pkg 5077540 001 5077542 001 Corrugate Case Beef w BBO Sauce Child pkg 5077482 001 Packaging Material Specs 3 Formulation Specifications 0 Ingredient Specifications 0 Packing Configuration Spe
123. Specification on page 2 1 CACS Screen the current specification using Computer Aided Compliance Screening CACS an application that you can use to inspect materials for fitness against any number of user defined screens Appears only if your installation includes CACS For more information on CACS please refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Computer Aided Compliance Screening User Guide Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing a packaging material specification please see Printing Other Specifications on page 2 19 Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN _RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS
124. User Guide Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing a printed packaging specification please see Printing Other Specifications on page 2 19 Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN _RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 13 Printed Packaging Specifications Summary Tab The Printed Packaging specification Summary tab contains the following sections Q Summary Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 Q Label Information Discussed below at Label Information Section on page 13 3 Q Tare Wei
125. Volume Serving Information Section on page 8 3 Q Ingredient Statements Discussed below at Ingredient Statements Section on page 8 4 Q Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Weight Volume Serving Information Section Figure 8 1 Nutrient Profile Weight Volume Serving Information section Weight Volume Serving Information Density Label Volume Label Weight Reference Amount Servings Per Pack semmoset semmosta Special Attributes Key fields in this section include Density Captures the density which value is used in volumetric nutrient declarations You can define nutrients per 100 g or per 100 ml Density is used in the conversion between these two Label Volume The volume that is intended to show up on the label There are two entry fields to accommodate two units of measure for example 1 gal US 5 fl oz US Label Weight The weight that is intended to show up on the label There are two entry fields to accommodate two units of measure for example 3 lb 8 oz US Reference Amount Also known as Reference Amount Customarily Consumed RACO the value in this field is the typical amount that someone consumes in one sitting Click the Reference Amount link to search for a RACC set forth by an authority such as the U S Food and Drug Administration This data is used in determining label claims 8 3 Agile Prod
126. Warning One or more formula items have missing nutrient information that may affect theoretical rollups Please review the warnings on the individual nutrients for details Nutrient Composition Nutrient Calories Energy kJ Protein Carbohydrates Total Sugar Total Fat Saturated Fat Ash Vitamin A Total Pyridoxine B6 Vitamin Panthothenic Calcium 6 60 Theoreticals Overrides Specification Per Serving Source Comments 247 44444 kcal kcal 247 44444 kcal Theoretical E 2469 66667 kJ o kJ 2469 666657 kJ Theoretical lp 33 45267 g g 33 45267 g Theoretical ci 0 53086 g 0 53086 g Theoretical ae The Following Specification s do not contain this nutrient Theoretical Seasoned Cooked Pork 5082158 001 PR 13 08971 g o g 13 08971 g Theoretical gt g 0 53086 IU 0 53086 IU Theoretical g 0 05350 mg mg 0 05350 mg Theoretical a 21 10700 mg ma 21 10700 mg Theoretical amp 1 12263 mg ma 1 12263 mg Theoretical w g 0 53086 mg ma 0 53086 mg Theoretical E The nutrient composition follows previously defined functionality around overrides namely Theoreticals This column shows the rolled up data from the formulation specification Overrides This column allows you to enter a value different than the rolled up value Specification This column shows the data as it exists on the specification Per Serving This column displays a value calculated
127. With Cost In The Inputs Grid Two columns present cost data in the inputs grid They are a USD 100g The cost per 100 grams of material This cost is derived and presented in one of two ways e Cost Library Cost can be loaded to the cost library via an API If this is performed then the data presented on the screen is controlled through settings found on Profiles and Preferences Formulation Preferences under the Cost Preferences section e Override Also within GSM you can change cost using the Setting action button Cost Preferences section If a cost override has been entered the override icon a displays a EXT Cost The calculated cost for the input material based on the quantity A total field is presented as the final row of this column representing the total ingredient cost for the formula specification Figure 6 14 Cost data summary Formulation Process ExtData Related Specs CSS supporting Documents References Approvyal Audit Trail Step Material Oty G L Yid Batch USD 100g EXT Cost dE sugar Granulated FS so oo000 lb sp 100000 S0 00000lb 521512 0 2500 56 69905 507 7505 0017 AF Water Carbonated FS 825 c0000 b sel 0 95000 783 75000lb 81 74207 0 10000 a 374 21371 5077462 001 3 SF Orange Flavor 4487 ga 125 00000 b sel 1 00000 125 00000lb 13 03781 o0 03000 2 17 00971 5080166 001 Add New Calculate 1000 00000 lb 958 25000 Ib 100 00000 E o EE
128. Ww Saturated Fat Ww Trans Fatty Acid Cholesterol Tm Sodium Ta Dietary Fiber Ww UE Ww Sugars 3 On the Claims Determination tab from the Label Claim Authority drop down list select a specific rule group to use for considering claims applicability 4 Click Display Label Claims to display the Applicable Claims table The system evaluates label claims against rules that you previously defined All selected claims based on the label claims authority appear in the Applicable Claims table with color coding to show whether the claim may be made for the product When the system evaluates a claim as compliant the Comments column displays supporting information for the claim along with one or more user defined values supporting the assessment in the Calculation s column as shown in figure 4 20 If the system finds that the claim is invalid no such information appears in the Comments column Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 5 Select the claims you want to push to the specification All compliant claims are automatically selected You can unselect any claims you do not want to push to the specification Once you have all the claims selected click the Push Label Claims button at the bottom of the grid This action will close the dialog window and populate the potential label claims field with the selected claims This action will replace all existing potential label claims in the field if you
129. a Alternate Products Menu Items section Menu Item Build Section The Menu Item Build section contains the products or menu items that make up a menu item You can adjust the quantity and comments around that item in the build when the specification is in edit mode GSM calculates the weight and build percentage when you click the apply changes icon in that row Figure 7 2 Menu Item Build section detail showing one item in edit mode Menu Item Build Product Menu Item Quantity Weight Build Comments 5082117 001 Bun Fresh Global ig 1 9 33 35 5080383 002 4 1 Beef Patty ig 1 9 33 35 5084160 001 Total 3g Add New The units of measure UOMs for the build quantities may vary By default mass based units of measure are available for each product specification If the product specification has a relative density then volume based UOMs are also available If the product specification also has a unit conversion factor then a unit count unit of measure will be available You can use unit count units of measure when referring to menu items that are represented in the build Alternate Products Menu ltems Section The Alternate Products Menu Items section contains the product and menu item specification data that you can use as a substitute for one of the items in a build You can replace each item in the primary build with one or more alternate items In this section you can define alternate products or menu items t
130. a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 9 Product Specifications Summary Tab The Product Specification Summary tab contains the following sections Q Summary Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 Q Product Attributes Discussed below at Product Attributes Section on page 9 3 Q Design Attributes Discussed below at Design Attributes Section on page 9 3 a Cross References For discussion of this commonly used section please see Cross References Section on page 3 3 Q Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved fo
131. acking Configuration e Attachments Respect OLS Labeling Specs linked to the Delivered Material Packing Specifications e Attachments Respect OLS Master e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Packaging Material 1 Current Specification a Attachments Respect OLS b c d Custom Sections Respect OLS Testing Protocols Sourcing Approvals Respect OLS and SCRM BU Security 2 Related Objects All objects listed respect WFA and BU Security a Packing Configuration e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Delivered Material Packing Specs linked to the Packing Configuration e Attachments Respect OLS Labeling Specs linked to the Delivered Material Packing Specifications e Attachments Respect OLS Master e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Equipment 1 Current Specification a Attachments Respect OLS b c Custom Sections Respect OLS Sourcing Approvals Respect OLS and SCRM BU Security 2 Related Objects All objects listed respect WFA and BU Security a b Packaging Material e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Master e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Printed Packaging 1 Current Specification a Attachments Respect OLS b Custom Sections Respect OLS c Testing Protocols 2 25 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process d Sourcing Approvals Respect OLS
132. acking Description Section Use this section to describe the packing material Figure 14 1 Packing Description section 14 2 Packing Description Description Corrugated Case with Food Grade Poly Liner W Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 14 Delivered Material Packing Specifications Compliance Tab Environmental Waste Section This section the only section in the Compliance tab provides a place to log known waste materials for this specification material along with other relevant attributes required for environmental waste reporting Figure 14 2 Environmental Waste section Environmental Waste Material Class Weight Percent Recyclable o Composed of Recycled Materials J GREEN GLASS 1 b 0 io a io Add New Related Specs Tab This tab contains the following sections Q Labeling Specifications Described below in Labeling Specifications Section on page 14 3 a Associated Specifications For discussion on this commonly used section please see Associated Specifications Section on page 3 9 Labeling Specifications Section In Labeling Specifications the only section in the Related Specs tab you can associate this specification with one or more labeling specifications that describe the labeling requirements for delivered items Figure 14 3 Labeling Specifications section Labeling Specifications Spec Spec Name F 5077515 001 Pallet Label Type B Add New Supporting Do
133. aft CPI North No Category MenuA 20090305 508958 7 001 America Available Spec Name Equivalent Type Status Business Unit Category Smart Issue Oracle menu Draft CPI North No Category MenuA 20090305 5089587 001 America Available Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features You can sort results grids by column by clicking the column head View specifications by clicking the hyperlinked Spec Name field Exporting the Results You can export a listing of ALL specs Top level and the lower specifications related to each from the original and the new hierarchies The resulting spreadsheet will include the following columns Original New marker Spec Spec Name Equivalent Type Status Business Unit Category Top Level Parent Level and specification Pkid The Export button is available in Read and Edit mode Failed Requests If the request is in a status of Failed this Results tab displays the reason the smart issue request failed and a results summary Generally a smart issue request will fail because the link to the specification can no longer be found Once the problem is corrected manually you are able to restart the smart issue request and it will be begin re issuing where it stopped The results summary grid lists all hierarchies that were attempted by smart issue An Issued column includes status icons representing whether that hierarchy was completely issued or not This i
134. aints during optimization see figure 6 76 below Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Figure 6 76 Ordering constraints Constraints Formulation Specifications Type Condition Design Conformance 99 99999 accurate 1 Objective Minimize Cost per 100g 0 01043 USD per 100g 2 Ingredient Cost lt 0 00900 USD per 100g 0 01043 USD per 1009 A thx 4 Nutrient Content Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg per 100g D 1162 62162 mg per 1009 Ed P 4H 3 Extended Attribute Test Number P Add Figure 6 77 Guidelines section Guidelines Inputs Material Equivalent Type Prodika 1 Onion Chopped Dehydrated 5077484 001 2 Tomato Paste Grade A Fancy 5077420 001 3 Spice Blend Dry 350 5077442 001 4 Beef Broth 5090850 00 1 5 Ground Beef 5090848 001 6 Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose 5077447 001 7 Salt Granular Not lodized 5077441 001 3 Chopped Tomato 5090849 001 Guidelines Section In the Guidelines section you can give the optimization engine additional Information about how far it can go with certain items to reach a solution You can supply the necessary information using scalability factors and the Adjust column The Guidelines section see figure 6 77 1s always in edit mode so you can quickly adjust guidelines on a formula item Yield Scala bility Scala bility Scala bility Scalability _ AE AALimit AControl v Control wwlmt t A 0 25000 lb
135. al technical data pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such the use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract and to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract the additional rights set forth in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software License December 2007 Oracle USA Inc 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications which may create a risk of personal injury If you use this software in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of this software Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software in dangerous applications Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any
136. alability Sc Equivalent Type Prodika Contra Control 1 Onion Chopped Dehydrated E 0 2500 Vitamin A Total 115 000 15 0000 5077484 001 Thiamin B1 2 Tomato Paste Grade A Fancy E 0 5000 15 0000 15 0000 5077420 001 Pyridoxine B6 Cobalamin B12 5 1d ae i y 3 Spice Blend Dry 350 T O 2500 Vitamin C 15 0000 15 0000 5077442 00 1 Panthothenic Beef Broth g 5000 Calum pe dE O Iron 15 0000 15 0000 5090850 00 1 Magnesium 5 Ground Beef 1 0000 Phosphorus he gt O Polaca 15 0000 15 0000 5090848 001 Sodium 6 Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose 0 1000 Zinc elas She SE O is 15 0000 15 0000 5077447001 6 68 Minimize Maximize an Extended Attribute Optimize based on minimizing or maximizing a selected extended attribute GSM pulls the theoretical extended attribute list from the selected output You can display this information per 100g per serving per consumer unit and per traded unit Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Figure 6 70 Extended attribute list Constraints Type De A 1 Objective Maximize Extended Attribute per 100g a 2 Ingredient Cost lt 0 00900 USD per 100g Las PF 3 Extended Attribute Test Number lt 0 00500 g per 100g Las P 4 Nutrient Content Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg per 100g a Once you have selected your optimization objective click the apply changes icon g to save your obj
137. an be populated two ways You can either click on the linked label Potential or calculate the label claims by using label claims determination To calculate label claims select the label claims determination icon zi GSM opens the label claims determination popup shown in figure 7 8 on page 7 9 See Label Claims Determination on page 7 7 for more information Actual Select the actual label claims declared on the finished good This field can be populated two ways You can either click on the linked label Actual or use the copy field icon 4 When you click the copy field icon GSM displays a multi select dialog box containing all values in the potential label claims field You can use the dialog box choices to populate the actual field only with potential options Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 7 Menu Item Specifications Label Claims Determination Using the label claims determination feature you can interrogate a product for claims applicability based on a centralized group of rules segregated by label claims authority 1 Click the label claims determination icon GSM opens the Label Claim Determination dialog box 2 Some claims require another product to compare to such as Low Fat The system can evaluate comparative claims if you provide additional nutrient information that describes the comparative product Select the Comparative Reference Product tab and fill in the appropriate information
138. and Alternate Packaging Materials 21 2 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features Accessing the Global Succession Tool Access the Global Succession tool as described in the procedure below To access the Global Succession tool 1 Click GSM gt Change Management gt Global Succession Agile PLM displays a Global Successions search page with a Create New button in the top right as shown in figure 21 2 below Figure 21 2 Global Succession search page Global Successions Search Criteria vp mre criteria ia Load A Save Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page Finding the Specifications to Supersede The process of identifying the specifications to supersede and the specification to replace them with includes these basic steps Narrowing down the list of specifications Selecting the individual specifications to replace Executing the global succession Verifying the change UO DOO To narrow down the list of specifications 1 Before entering search criteria at the upper right of the Global Successions page click Create New A Select Specification Type dialog box appears as shown in figure 21 3 below Figure 21 3 Global Successions Select Specification Type dialog box Close Select Specification Type Packaging Material Specification Spec To Supercede Mew Specification Parent Spec Type Trade Specification w E AAA _Done Agi
139. and SCRM BU Security 2 Related Objects All objects listed respect WFA and BU Security a Packaging Material e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Packing Configuration linked to the Packaging Material e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Delivered Material Packing Specifications linked to the Packing Configuration e Attachments Respect OLS Labeling Specifications linked to the Delivered Material Packing Specifications e Attachments Respect OLS Master e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Delivered Material 1 Current Specification a Attachments Respect OLS 2 Related Objects All objects listed respect WFA and BU Security a Labeling Specs e Attachments Respect OLS Packing Configuration 1 Current Specification a Attachments Respect OLS b Custom Sections Respect OLS 2 Related Objects All objects listed respect WFA and BU Security a Delivered Material Packing Specifications e Attachments Respect OLS b Labeling Specifications linked to the Delivered Material Packing Specifications e Attachments Respect OLS Labeling 1 Current Specification a Attachments Respect OLS Master 1 Current Specification a Attachments Respect OLS b 2 26 Custom Sections Respect OLS Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 3 Commonly Used Sections This chapter describes sections that are used in many or mos
140. and alphabetically filtered prefilled list dialog box as shown in figure 1 4 One variety of data entry dialog box on page 1 11 Single select tree of hyperlinked choices as shown in figure 1 6 below Figure 1 6 Single select tree of hyperlinked choices Done Cancel Ps Composites Glass Glass Containers No Category Available O Bottles Jars O Kits Other Miscellaneous Packagin Obsolete Needs to be Deleted Other Paper Based x W200 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Single select tree of choices with option buttons as shown in figure 1 7 below Figure 1 7 Single select tree of choices with options buttons Done Cancel Acme Africa 3 Acme Asia Acme Australasia Clicking a Acme Latin America hyperlinked Food Service branch O Brazil beneath it Acme North America A ll e Calendar dialog box as shown in figure 1 8 below used exclusively for date fields Figure 1 8 Calendar dialog box Close Jun July 2009 Bug sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 1 2 3 4 2 b f i 3 10 11 12 13 14 ls db 1f 1l 19 DO 44 25 4 5 46 dd 46 29 30 31 e Subsearch search within search dialog box for use in narrowing down a large number of options as described in Using the Subsearch Tool on page 1 14 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Using the Subsearch Tool Possibly the most complex method of enter
141. apter 18 LIO Profiles Figure 18 2 Output Material Selection section Output Material Selection Target Specification Vinegar Distilled White 100 Grain 5077413 001 Select Context fk Nutrient Profile Section This section allows the user to select which nutrient profile will be used if the user decides to push the LIO data to the ingredient and nutrient profile using the Push to Spec functionality from the Final Statement tab Figure 18 3 Nutrient Profile section Nutrient Profile Nutrient Profile LIO Construction Tab The LIO Construction tab consists of one section LIO Construction described below This tab and section is where a labeling administrator will perform a majority of their work grouping overriding formatting and in the end creating the ingredient statement LIO Construction Section Use this section to build the ingredient statement In the LIO Construction tab you can manipulate formula items based on certain constraints imposed by each item s underlying specification LIO profile and currently selected labeling restriction The first time you open the LIO tab of a profile the LIO tree does not appear because the system will not have generated it yet as shown in figure 18 4 below Figure 18 4 LIO Construction section LIO Construction Restrictions Format Combined Statement level 2 Inactive Rows Hide Show LIO Tree has not been Generated 18 3 Agile Product Lifecycle
142. arating each item with a new line Columnar Uppercase Arranges the final statement in a columnar list separating each item with a new line and converts all text to upper case Linear Arranges the final statement as a linear paragraph Linear Uppercase Arranges the final statement as a linear paragraph and converts all text to upper case Contains Less than 2 of Inserts Contains Less than 2 of at the appropriate point in the statement based on the percent composition of each item 18 19 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Contains Less than 3 of Inserts Contains Less than 3 of at the appropriate point in the statement based on the percent composition of each item Once you have set the fields in the Ingredient Statement Options section and the generated LIO is displayed you can click Copy Edit to move the generated statement into the Final Statement page At that time you can make any manual adjustments that are necessary Final Ingredient Statement Section Use this section to review the ingredient statement perform final editing and push the changes to the specification Figure 18 19 Final Ingredient Statement section Final Ingredient Statement Generated LIO Beef Lean Finely Textured Water Carbonated Pork Trimmings Raw 72 Lean Textured Soy Flour Colored Breading NW 4634216 Contains less than 3 of the following Soy Protein Concentrate Pow flavors Onion
143. arch form in a dialog box 3 Use the search form to select a formulation menu item or trade specification to designate as the parent specification The search form closes 4 Click the Specification to Remove hyperlink to display the Spec to Remove dialog box as shown in figure 21 21 below This dialog box will display all lower level specifications associated with the parent specification selected 21 17 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 21 21 Spec to Remove dialog box Spec to Remove Cancel Spec to Remove Results Per Page Spec Spec Name Status Business Unit Category 5077482 Corrugated Casel pkg Developmental CPI North America Paper Based 001 CPI Asia 5077541 Carton Beef w BBO Sauce qwer 123 ppkg Draft Review CPI North America Paper Based 001 5077609 WALMART PROMO CARTON ppkg Draft Review CPI USA Retail Paper Based 001 Atlanta 5077639 BBO Beef and Vegetable trd Approved CPI North America Meat Poultry 001 Dinner 11 oz for Syndication cu and Game 5077644 BBO Beef Dinner Portion 11 trd Approved CPI North America Meat Poultry 001 oz for Syndication cu and Game 5077672 BBO Beef and Vegetable ird Approved CPI North America Meat Poultry 001 Dinner 11 oz for Syndication cu and Game 5080186 BOTTLEGOOML pkg Approved CPI North America Resin Based 001 5081380 BBO Beef and Vegetable trd Approved CPI North America Meat Poultry 001 Dinner 11 oz for Syndication cu and Gam
144. archy only e Replace one specification with another without specifying a parent Replace one specification with another while specifying a parent The following specification types are supported Table 21 2 Affected specifications Specification Type to Add or Remove Parent Specification Type O Packaging Printed Packaging Trade Packaging Materials and Alternate Packaging Materials Packaging Printed Packaging Menu Packaging Materials and Alternate Packaging Materials Mena Item Mean pome Mean Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features Caution Because this tool enables such sweeping changes typically only an administrator with the highest security level will have access to it Three roles are associated with the Smart Issue tool SMART_ISSUE_CREATOR Allows the user to create smart issue requests SMART_ISSUE_EDITOR Allows the user to edit and run smart issue requests SMART_ISSUE_READER Allows the ability to search and view smart issue requests Note Additional security can be placed on the smart issue request itself by leveraging the Private and additional readers fields This ability is explained further in this chapter Accessing the Smart Issue Tool Access the Smart Issue tool as described in the procedure below To access the Smart Issue tool 1 Click GSM gt Change Management gt Smart Issue Agile PLM displays the Smart Issue search pag
145. are designating an alternate for and then click Done The dialog box closes and your selections are added to the Alternate Output Items grid Provide additional details for the alternate item using the fields defined above Packaging Sub Tab The Packaging Sub Tab allows users to describe Packaging Material and Printed Packaging Material specifications used in a manufacturing process Some Important items to note regarding packaging 6 36 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications o It is commonly recommended to model packaging used to ship products to customers on the trade specification This provides the user the ability to define a material using output ingredients and reuse it across many different trade specifications It is on the various trade specifications that you distinguish the product via packaging Q Packaging on a formulation specification is used to describe how an output ingredient is packaged The output of a formulation specification cannot be a packaging material or printed packaging material specification Input ltems Sub Section Adding Materials To The Input Item Sub Section Unlike other areas of the formulation specification there is only one path for adding items to this sub section and that is by clicking the Add New button Upon doing so you are presented with a standard search screen The only major difference is the ability to select packaging material or printed packagin
146. as shown in figure 2 25 below If the related specification includes attachments the attachments will be listed below the specification To print attachments click on the linked attachment file name By default the custom data on the selected specifications is included in the printout after the activity summary unless your administrator has indicated to suppress printing Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 2 24 Additional related items Packaging Material Specs Plastic Bottle Lid 5091137 001 Testing Protocol Special Samples 101 8 28 2007 Printed Packaging Specifications Orange Plastic Bottle 12 oz 5091141 001 Orange Juice Label Brand 4 5091142 001 El BrandA Artwork jpg Master Specifications Allergen Disclosure 5077412 0017 Nutrient Profile Orange Juice 5067356 001 2 18 COO Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Figure 2 25 Additional related items co pack trade specification Packaging Material Specs Plastic Bottle Lid 5091137 001 7 d Testing Protocol Special Samples 101 8 28 2007 F Printed Packaging Specifications Orange Plastic Bottle 12 oz 5091141 0017 ae Orange Juice Label Brand 4 5091142 001 El BrandA Artwork jpg OO Master Specifications Allergen Disclosure 5077412 001 E Ingredient Breakdown Composition F Nutrient Profile Orange Juice 5082356 001 L Pr
147. ate data Modeling operational and moisture gain loss to better reflect manufacturing conditions Describing the various items created by a formula including Products Co Products and Waste Identifying alternate inputs and outputs that are available at the time of production Q Making better decisions Rolling up an output s theoretical values for nutrition compliance information yield and custom data in order to understand and verify 1f a recipes goals have been achieved Performing ingredient substitutions using predefined and approved substitute items Modeling appropriate batch sizes to better understand the impact of scaling Optimizing a formula to achieve identified goals and constraints See Optimization on page 6 65 for more information Q Efficiently managing information Concepts and Definitions Outputs Finding and reviewing historical recipes Creating new issues of formulations to reflect specification changes over time Capturing Snapshots of a given formula while developing a new or modified item as described in Snapshots on page 6 64 Verifying and approving accuracy through a formal workflow process When ingredient specifications are added to the formula and processing occurs an output is created The output should be considered the result of a manufacturing process or formulation specification Data associated with an output material includes Q Ingredient specification attribute
148. atement level 2 w Inactive Rows O Hide Show a L Ingredient Statement 100 00000 5 al Beef Lean Finely Textured 36 85500 3 o TmMnos how Lean 16 JOD Wo y 2 AnnotateElement Windows Internet Explorer gt lt 3 la Done Cancel 3 Annotation From leftover hog parts l a Soluble Celery on Dextrose 0 22000 o lg Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose 0 06840 E l Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose 0 02160 Audit History Perform Actions A Mie E Item Mame E Add Mew Group E Ingredient Statement E Rename Item Breakdowns a Annotate IA Do Not Declare ici Audit History Divide Click this menu option to get an accounting of the current disclosure method and any relevant actions that have been performed against the selected item GSM displays a dialog box as shown in figure 18 12 below 18 13 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 18 12 Audit History dialog box Audit History Element Wo Date Ttem Name Reference Yield Declaration 8 20 2009 11 47 AM New Group 0 00000 Item Mame 8 20 2009 11 47 AM 1 3 bis 6 24688 To Item Name hydroxymethyl 5 5 dimethylimidazolidin High Level Source Destination Action Add Group Divide 1 3 bis hydroxymethyl 5 5 dimethylimidazolidin Close Message Group Added under Rootlevel Item Divided into 1 3 bis hydroxymethyl 5 5 dimethylimi
149. bal Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Note Calculation also happens when you save your specification Create Copy Create a new copy of the current formulation specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 Optimization Optimize the formulation by defining goals and establishing constraints related to ingredient costs nutrients and extended attributes See Optimization on page 6 65 for more information CACS Screen the current specification using Computer Aided Compliance Screening CACS an application that you can use to inspect materials for fitness against any number of user defined screens CACS provides limited functionality when run on a formulation specification due to the fact that most material data is defined on the output ingredient Therefore CACS can perform screening for extended attributes defined on the formulation specification as opposed to an output ingredient and approved for use in business units Please note CACS appears only if your installation includes CACS For more information on CACS please refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Computer Aided Compliance Screening User Guide Target Revision Allows users to create a new issue of a given specification by e Starting with an established specification Using Target Revision to point to another spec
150. bed as follows o Input Quantity The user enters data by typing in the quantity As needed the user can adjust gain loss to establish the yield The remaining fields including yield are populated when the application recalculates 6 15 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 11 User types in Quantity summary Formulation Process Ext Data Related Specs CSS Supporting Documents Reference Inputs Step Material Oty G L Yid Yo Batch SF Sugar Granulated GA 50 00000 tb s 1 00009 S50 00000 lb 5 21512 5077505 0017 5 a k SF Water Carbonated og 625 00000 lb E o 9s000 783 7500016 81 74707 5077462 001 S SF Orange Flavor 4487 0 4 125 00000 1b se 1 00000 125 000001 13 03781 5080166 001 1000 00000 lb 958 75000 lb 100 00000 Add New Calculate A Input Yield The user enters data by typing in the yield As needed the user can adjust gain loss to establish the quantity The remaining fields including the quantity are populated when the application recalculates Figure 6 12 User types in Yield Summary Formulation Process Ext Data Related Specs CSS Supporting Documents Reference Inputs Step Material Oty G L Yid Batch SF Sugar Granulated Ga 50 00000 lb 1 00000 50 00000 lb fw 521512 SO7 7505 001 1 sel SF Water Carbonated HA 525 00000 lb 0 aso0o 783 75000 lb sw 81 74707 5077462 001 1 SF orange Flavor 4487 Fe 125 00000 lb 1 00000 125
151. below A From formulation specifications click the specification history icon in the Inputs table as shown in figure 2 2 below GSM displays the input s history Figure 2 2 BOM table in editable mode showing specification history icon Wo Batch USD 100g ExT Cost pious 100 00000 0 00000 Figure 2 3 Spec History dialog box Spec History Close Reason Name Spec Number Create Date Originator Last Modified Status for Change Vinegar Distilled 120 GRAIN 5077511 003 9 22 2007 Ott Mel 9 22 2007 Draft Added z Regulatory Extended Data Vinegar Distilled 120 GRAIN 5077511 002 9 22 2007 Wu May 9 22 2007 Approved Adjusted Formulation Vinegar Distilled 120 GRAIN 5077511 001 9 30 2004 Jones Jo 9 22 2007 Approved The Spec History table displays all issues of the specification that exist Along with other identifying information this table also displays the reason that the specification was changed The value in the Reason for Change column appears in most specifications in a field in the Summary Information section of the Summary tab This section is ordered from newest to oldest highlighting the specification that you are on 2 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Managing Specifications Action Items 2 4 All GSM specifications are workflow enabled A workflow is a business process in whole or in part during which documents information or tasks are passed from one participant to another
152. box containing all values in the potential label claims field You can use the dialog box choices to populate the actual field only with potential options Label Claims Determination Using the label claims determination feature you can interrogate a product for claims applicability based on a centralized group of rules segregated by label claims authority 1 Click the label claims determination icon GSM opens the Label Claim Determination dialog box 2 Some claims require another product to compare to such as Low Fat The system can evaluate comparative claims if you provide additional nutrient information that describes the comparative product Select the Comparative Reference Product tab and fill in the appropriate information needed You can also import data from another trade specification by selecting the Reference Product label Data will be imported from the trade specification s active nutrient profile See figure 4 19 below Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Trade Specifications Figure 4 19 Label Claim Determination dialog box Comparative Reference Product tab Label Claim Determination Close Claims Determination Comparative Reference Product HA A A A A ee AA Comparitive Reference Product Reference Product Reference Amount 0 00000 Classification yo active e Mutrient Composition Mubrient Calories ea Total Fat
153. cation or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN _RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Summary Tab Trade Specifications Key sections in the Summary tab include Q Summary Information Discussed below at Summary Information Section on page 4 3 Q Product Identification Discussed below at Product Identification Section on page 4 3 a Next Lower Items Discussed below at Next Lower Level Items Section on page 4 5 a Parent Items Discussed below at Parent Items Calculated Section on page 4 5 Q Brand Information Discussed below at Brand Information Section on page 4 6 Q Product Classification Discussed below at Product Classification Section on page 4 7 Q Cross References For discussion of this commonly used section please see Cross References Section on page 3 3 Q Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Summary Information Section Fields in the Summary Information section are described in Summary Information Section on page 3 2 For trade specifications two additional fields are included Available Date Indicates when the product will be availabl
154. ccession as shown in figure 21 6 Figure 21 6 Global Successions page showing Target Specifications section Global Successions Succession Request Reguest Number 5000723 New Specification Packaging 4 pkg 5083907 001 Approved 4 23 2007 5 09 58 PM To Supercede Packaging E pkg 5083910 001 Approved 2 05 2008 2 19 15 PM Scope Trade Specification Reason for Change Status Draft Target Specifications Spec Y Spec Name Status Approved for Use In BU F 50910 0 001 Case Orange Juice Approwed CPI Arica CPT Asia E 5095574 001 Case Apple Juice Approved CPI North America Select All Unselect All Run Global Succession You have now narrowed down the list of specifications to choose from and are ready to choose individual specifications to replace Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Performing the Global Succession You can now select specifications to replace To select and replace individual specifications 1 On the Global Successions page with the narrowed down list of specifications in the Target Specifications section click Edit The page reloads in editable mode showing the Select All Unselect All and Run Global Succession buttons as shown in figure 21 7 below Figure 21 7 Available buttons at the bottom of the Global Successions Target Specifications section in editable mode LL O 508 1342 001 Copy of BBO Beef Mixture Approved CPI North America Select All Unselect All
155. claims you want to push to the specification All compliant claims are automatically selected You can unselect any claims you do not want to push to the specification Once you have all the claims selected click the Push Label Claims button at the bottom of the grid This action will close the dialog window and populate the potential label claims field with the selected claims This action will replace all existing potential label claims in the field if you would like to just append to the list make sure the Append to existing list checkbox is selected See figure 7 8 below Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 7 Figure 7 8 Label Claims Determination dialog box Label Claim Determination Menu Item Specifications Close Label Claim Authority Label Claim Authority 5 FDA Nutrient Claims 2005 Display Label Claims Applicable Claims Label Claim Type of Claim Yes No Saturated Fat Low Lite or Light w Calories disclosure Cholesterol Free Cholesterol Low L q a Push Label Claims Dl Append to existing list Comments Individual Foods 1 gor less per reference amount and 15 or less of calories From saturated Fat ATTENTION Mext to all saturated Fat claims must declare the amount of cholesterol if 2 ma orf more per reference amount and the amount of total Fat iF more than 3 g per reference amount for 0 5 g or
156. cle Management for Process Getting Started Guide Formulation and Compliance Tools The following features included in this guide are available only through the Formulation and Compliance solution package of Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 2 Label Claims Determination Q Regulatory Filings Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process U O O O U Listed Ingredient Order LIO tool Formula Optimization tool Computer Aided Compliance Screening CACS Nutrition Surveillance Management NSM Product Quality Scorecard PQS Key Global Specification Management Capabilities 1 2 a Trade specifications Contain all the attributes required to describe the finished products sold by your company Process specifications Replaced by formulation specifications Formulation specifications Describe the manufacturing and packaging processes that your company uses to produce your products Menu item specifications Describe products or menu items that make up a menu item Nutrient profiles Contain the nutrient data related to process and trade specifications Product specifications Contain the data related to product specifications Ingredient specifications Enable your company to manage all attributes related to ingredients that it purchases for use in the bill of materials contained in the formulation specifications Packaging material specifications Contain the data relat
157. create output ABC the theoretical access level would be 400 This access level is used when deciding which custom data on the output item the user can see Theoretical access level is always calculated by the system regardless whether the formulation specification is in design mode or not b Specification Access Level This is the read only view of the External or Referenced Ingredient specification s access level By default when an output item is typed as external the theoretical access level is pushed to the specification This value can be overridden on the ingredient specification itself For example with output ABC even though the theoretical access level is 400 its corresponding material specification can be set to 200 Note After the specification access level is set it can still be reset by the system This happens if the output composition is changed resulting in a different theoretical access level than it previously had At this time the new access level value will be pushed to the ingredient specification regardless whether the formulation specification is in design mode or not For example if Spec D 500 was added to Output ABC the specification access level of 400 will be replaced with 500 when the formulation specification is saved If you are not familiar with access level and object level security in general refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Administrator User Guide for more information Ca
158. cs 2 Process Specifications 0 Delivered Material Packing Specs 1 Related Documents Section The Related Documents section contains links to a listing of NPD activities NSM documents and LIO profiles that are related to a specification This list contains system generated information that is read only 3 27 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Custom Data 3 28 Figure 3 32 Related Documents section Related Documents NPD Activities Display all NPD activities that have been related to this specification Related NSM Documents Display all MSM Items that have been related to this specification Related LIO Profiles Display all LIO Profiles that have been related to this specification Click the NPD Activities link to open the NPD Activities dialog box The dialog box displays all related NPD activities Refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process New Product Development User Guide for more information Click the Related NSM Documents link to open the Related NSM Documents dialog box The dialog box displays two sections Nutrient Analysis and Nutrient Composite The Nutrient Analysis section displays a table that contains the analysis number date of analysis source facility and description The analysis number is a link to the actual analysis associated with the specification The Nutrient Composition section displays a table with composite number date of composite title and description
159. ct Actual Label Claims Contains All uh y Additives Contains One e Additives does NOT contain e Additives may contain Allergens Allergens does NOT contain e Allergens may contain Breakdown Component COO country of origin Breakdown Component Term or Alias e Classification e Complies With e Country of Origin Input Item Intolerances e Intolerances does NOT contain Intolerances may contain e Material Type e Menu Item Build e Packaging Materials e Potential Label Claims Standard Approved for Use In Country Contains One Equals e Activity Equals e Associated Spec Number Starts With e GTIN UPC EAN e Primary Item Spec Related Item Spec e Spec e System Equivalent Number e x 100g Calories Equals e x 100g Carbohydrates Greater Than e x 100g Cholesterol Less Than e x 100g Protein e x 100g Sodium e x 100g Total Fat e x 100g Total Sugar e x Serv Calories e x Serv Carbohydrates e x Serv Cholesterol e x Serv Protein e x Serv Sodium e x Serv Total Fat e x Serv Total Sugar MB Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 1 Table 1 2 Sample list of search tool fields by field type and operator sets continued Field type Single option Subsearch list search within search dialog box FF Subsearch list search within search dialog box F Field s continued e Analytical Properti
160. ct the entire page All of these buttons are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions include a Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it The LIO Profiles Summary tab consists of the following sections a LIO Profile Discussed below at LIO Profile Section on page 18 2 Q Output Material Selection Discussed below at Output Material Selection Section on page 18 2 Q Nutrient Profile Discussed below at Nutrient Profile Section on page 18 3 Use the LIO Profile section to define the LIO profile Figure 18 1 LIO Profile section LIO Profile LIO 10014 uname SCS _ O Originator Johnson Sally CreatedDate 7 8 2009 12 33 38 PM Last Edit 7 8 2009 12 33 38 PM Key fields include LIO Number assigned to the LIO profile by GSM LIO Name Name of the LIO profile The LIO name will often be very similar to the trade specification or nutrient profile name as you are usually labeling a finished good This field is required Output Material Selection Section 18 2 Use this section to define which ingredient specification will be used as the basis for the LIO Click the Target Specification link to search for the targeted specification The Select Context drop down list allows the user to select which formulation specification to pull the child items from when generating the LIO tree Global Specification Management User Guide Ch
161. ction contains a list of business units that the specification is approved for use in Business Units is a required field Business Unit is used in relation to search visibility The Business Unit field can also be used as the deciding factor in workflow resolution 3 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process This section is configurable One configuration is Concepts and Business Unit the other is Business Units and Countries as shown in the figures below Figure 3 5 Approved for Use In section with Concepts and Business Units fields Approved for Use In Concept s Other North America Figure 3 6 Approved for Use In section with Business Units and countries fields Approved for Use In Business Unit s Countries fF North America dh USA m Add New The Compliance tab contains the compliance additive allergen and intolerance data related to a specification Depending on your system configuration some of these sections may not be visible Compliance Tab Compliance Information Section Adding Compliance Items Figure 3 7 Compliance Information section Compliance Information Complies With Non GM Halal Kosher To add items 1 Click the Complies With link to open the Compliance dialog box Select the compliance items to add on the left holding down the Ctrl key to select multiple compliance items 2 Click the add selected data icon i gt to move your selections to the right 3 When you ha
162. ction header Ingredient Attributes From Spec 7 27 2009 O Override Total Solids 100 w Edible Portion 100 w Once you close the Basis dialog box and return to the main tab you can use the Refresh action button to pull current specification data for the entire BOM The system prompts you to confirm the global update When you select OK the system pulls the information from the specifications for all items in your formulation specification This is only available in edit mode Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Figure 6 43 Basis dialog box Basis Refresh Done BBO Sauce Dry Mix 5077419 001 Te S es a Combined Ingredient Statement From Spec 7 20 2009 Override Dehydrated Onion and Garlic Paprika Mustard Flour Spices Natural Hickory Smoke Flavor and not more than 2 Silicon Dioxide added to prevent caking Ingredient Attributes From Spec 7 20 2009 Override Total Solids 100 25 Final Density Edible Portion 100 So Reconstitution Equivalency Declare As Target Factor Comments The Basis dialog box consists of the following tabs Specification Attributes Described below in Specification Attributes Tab on page 6 43 Breakdown Described below in Breakdown Tab on page 6 44 Nutrition Described below in Nutrition Tab on page 6 45 Compliance Described below in Compliance Tab on page 6 46 Ext Data Described below in E
163. ctions a 10 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Key fields include Material Type Defined by the system There are two types of materials e Raw Material General ingredient specification representing a sourced material Formula Output Ingredient specification created by a formulation specification Ifyou purchase as well as produce a material the ingredient will be considered both a raw material and a formula output Output Type See Output Types Sub Types on page 6 3 for a list of output types Classification Depending on your configuration this could be a required field This field could potentially drive workflow resolution Shelf Life Section Shelf lives can be declared in multiple contexts usually based on storage conditions You can store one set of shelf life conditions for frozen material and another for refrigerated material For each separate context you can store values such as storage requirements and instructions relative humidity and supplier and internal shelf life Figure 10 2 Shelf Life section Shelf Life storage Supplier s Internal Min Days s Relative Requirements Tags Shelf Life Shelf Life Remaining eo Pstruchons Humidity P Preferred Shelf Life Do Not 1 days 1 days 2 days 3 months stored intact Dry Publish and unopened containers Ambient to Supplier at ambient temperature ina dean dry area away from malodorous materials Add New Key fields include Type D
164. cuments Tab The Supporting Documents tab contains two sections Q Supporting Documents The document types available for use are Attachments Procedures URL and Rich Text For more information please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 Q DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 14 3 14 4 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process References Tab The References tab includes the following sections a Activities For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Q Specification Dependencies For discussion of this commonly used section please see Specification Dependencies Section on page 3 27 Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 15 Packing Configuration Specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding packing configuration specifications Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions Summary Tab Packing Tab Related Specs Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab 0 O O OO U ODI Overview The Packing Configuration Specification page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 15 2 Packing Tab on page 15 3 Related Specs Tab on page 15 4 Supporting Docume
165. d Described below in Approximate Yield Section on page 6 54 Design Attributes Described below in Design Attributes Section on page 6 56 Figure 6 49 Output dialog Yield tab 4 Warning One or more formula items have missing design attributes information that may affect yield calculations Please review the warnings for details Packaging Configuration Classification Container Net Contents Quantity Traded Unit Tare Weight Approximate Yield Beginning Batch Size Processing Loss Factor Approximate Yield Final Yo Total Solids Design Attributes Attribute Total Solids Final Density Edible Portion 243 00000 lb Beginning Total Solids Reference Amount lb lb Serving Size lb C g Servings aa 0 0000 lb 72 84362 Ta 1 00000 Water Gain Loss Factor 1 00000 243 00000 Ib Labeled Units Batch 72 84362 Traded Units Batch Theoretical Override Specification 72 84362 id 72 84362 1 00000 g 1 00000 mL 44 1 00000 g 1 00000 mL 100 00000 5 The Following Specifications do not contain a density value 00 00000 Seasoned Cooked Pork 5082158 001 Packaging Configuration Section In the Packaging Configuration section you can enter high level packaging information about this formulation With this section shown in figure 6 50 below you can populate your output with reference amount and classification data that would be used by Label Claims You can also set t
166. d hierarchies regardless of what checkboxes are selected Exporting the Action List You can export a listing of ALL specifications in your Action List top level and the lower specifications related to each The resulting spreadsheet includes the following columns Spec Spec Name Equivalent Type Status Issued Business Unit Category Top Level Parent Level and specification Pkid The Export button is available in Read and Edit mode The export will only include the hierarchies included in the Action List Performing the Smart Issue Figure 21 27 Smart Issue Action List smart Issue Action List Once hierarchies selected for the smart issue are displayed in the Smart Issue Action List you are able to select the Issue button as figure 21 27 shows below Results Per Page Export HR 5077539 002 1 Spec Name Equivalent Type Status Business Unit Category Issued BBO Beef and Vegetable 123123 trd Draft CPI North Meat Poultry Yes Dinner 11 0z cu America and Game Issue Fl version Nutrient Profiles Linked pages allow you to page through the results You can also sort the data by clicking the column head To issue the smart issue request the request must have a status of Pending or Failed 21 21 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process To perform the smart issue 1 If desired click the Version Nutrient Profiles checkbox If selected the approved nutrient profiles associated to any spec
167. d search In Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process the first two search criteria fields contain a default value in the case of a trade specification Spec Name as shown in figure 1 1 on page 1 4 The top few choices in the drop down list are the most frequently used fields search Field Definitions See table 1 1 for a description of search fields that appear on the main search form Table 1 1 Fields on the main search form Field Description Key field list Select from a list of search criteria based on the GSM menu search option that you chose Operator Select from a list of operators based on the criteria that you chose in the key field list A few examples include Equals Not Equals Contains and Starts With The actual word or words that you are looking for If this field is preceded by an add data icon fs click it to view a dialog box with available choices You can also enter a percent sign to perform a wildcard search Results per page Sets the number of search results to display at one time Key Field List The first drop down list in the search form the Key Field list consists of field names that specifications can include See figure 1 2 below for a list of field names in this drop down list for a trade specification 1 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 1 6 Figure 1 2 Choices in the key field drop down list for a trade specification search Spec Equivalent GTIM
168. dazolidin 50 00000 and 1 3 bis hydroxymethyl 5 5 dimethylimidazolidin 50 00000 Note The Action Performed column of the Audit History dialog box will be recorded in the user s currently selected language and will not be language aware Divide Perform Actions A View 3 Item Mame i Recon Equiv lig Do Mot Declare E Refer to FIC JE Rename Item Annotate Ey Audit History Click this menu option to create a new instance of the current item based on a percent or quantity of the original item that is to split an item into two separate instances GSM prompts you to indicate a percentage or a quantity Once you have created the new item it will appear at the same level as the original item in the LIO hierarchy and you can move it via drag and drop to another area Any item affected by a divide action will be flagged with a special divide icon in the LIO tree view margin 18 14 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 18 LIO Profiles Declaration Descriptions Item Name Click this option to list the item as a single entry in the LIO using the default name of the current item Ingredient Statement Click this option to list the item as a single entry in the LIO using the ingredient statement of the current item if available List X y Click this option to suppress the current item in the LIO disclosure and create individual entries for each lower level item that is
169. dd data icon Field types that require entry from a prepopulated list include e Multiple select Date e Single option e Subsearch list search within search field For a sample list of fields of these types see table 1 2 on page 1 7 The type of dialog box from which you select a search term can vary by field type and by individual key field There are a large number of fields for every specification type Because there are too many combinations to illustrate each one see the following section for a sampling of dialog boxes To select data from a filtered prepopulated field 1 Click the add data icon to the left of the search term field as shown in figure 1 3 below Figure 1 3 Add data icon a Create New Ingredient Specifications Category Search Search Criteria more criteria additional attributes v v Load El save Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page A multiple select dialog box appears WO Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 1 4 One variety of data entry dialog box Done Cancel Show choices for User Profile dl orange Yellow 5 Oyster Extract Oysters A B E D E F G H I K L M N O 2 If desired narrow down your choices by filtering them using the Show choices tor drop down list by selecting a grouping Figure 1 5 A Show choices for drop down list detail Show choices for User Profile
170. de To edit a supporting document 1 When the specification is in edit mode click the edit icon P in the row of the document to edit The page reloads and displays the row in edit mode 2 Open the document in edit mode by clicking the hyperlinked document name or click the delete icon to delete that document from the specification 3 After making your changes to your document click the apply changes icon to apply the changes 4 Click Save at the upper right of the page to save your changes 3 13 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Document Types Attachments Procedures Document Type Figure 3 14 Attachment Procedures window Attachment Procedures Done Summary Information Spec Name Yinegar Distilled White 100 Grain Spec Status Approved Approved Access Level Category Other Spec 5077413 Sub Category Liquids Issue 001 Group Mater Status Approved Effective Wednesday September 03 1997 Originator Warren Angela Inactive Last Edit Tuesday June 16 2009 Supercedes 012405 06 21 1906 Reason for Change Added copacker to spec dl Attachments Add New An attachments procedures document is a collection of attachments Each document includes the noneditable summary section which pulls its content from the parent specification Use the Security Classification field to assign a security level to the document This field appears when object level security
171. describes the nutrition based on how a consumer will prepare the item In this case the industry considers it common that the consumer will add a cup of whole milk to the cereal Therefore after the user defines the steps needed to create the output in this Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications example cereal the user will add one more step In this step the cereal and the whole milk will be added as inputs The output from the consumer prep step will describe the theoretical data for the item as used by the consumer Specific functionality provided by the Consumer Prep flag A consumer preparation step can consume external outputs from the same specification e Any additional materials added to the consumer preparation step will not affect the general formulation specification I e inputs to a consumer prep step will not appear on the Formulation tab s BOM and will not impact quantity yield or percentages A consumer preparation step can consume a normal output Once you mark a step as consumer preparation you can add external outputs from the same specification Anything you add will not affect the standard formula Instructions Information describing the actions being performed during the step Click the hyperlinked field to display the Edit Rich Text dialog box as figure 6 21 shows below Enter instructions about the step and then click Done to close the dialog box
172. dit modes Users must have the role SUBSTITUTE_MATERIAL_DEFINER to create new or modify existing raw materials Figure 10 8 Substitute Materials section Substitute Material s Substitute Material s Factor Substitute Restrictions F Yinegar Distilled 150 Grain 5077512 001 1 OD000 inegar Distilled White 100 Grain 5077413 001 1 00000 Add Mew 10 8 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 10 Ingredient Specifications Key fields include Substitute Materials Substitute materials associated with this raw material Factor The factor to apply during the substitution process Substitute Restrictions Lists substitute restrictions which are maintained in the Data Administration application These restrictions will work to filter the substitutions available to the formulator For more information about substitute restrictions refer to the Formulation Attributes Section in Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 10 9 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 10 10 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 11 Packaging Material Specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding packaging material specifications Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions Summary Tab Compliance Tab Prin
173. e 5082225 BBO Beef and Vegetable trd Draft CPI North America Meat Poultry 001 Dinner 11 oz 2 TU and Game 5083226 Attachments for DWB trd Inactive CPI North America Mo Category 001 20070402 Cu Available 12 5 Select a specification to remove The dialog box closes and the selected specification displays in the Specification to Remove field 6 Click the Specification to Add hyperlink GSM displays a search page containing specifications of the same type you selected to remove in step 5 7 Use the search page to select a specification to replace the specification being removed and then click Done Your selection appears in the Specification to Add field as figure 21 22 shows below Figure 21 22 Selected specifications Parent 880 Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz 5077539 002 Specification to Remove pen Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz for Syndication 5077 Specification to Add BBO Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz 5077539 010 See All Affected 8 Click See All Affected The Affected Specs dialog box displays a listing of all of the specification hierarchies that are linked to the specification to remove as figure 21 23 shows below 21 18 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features Figure 21 23 Affected Specs dialog box Affected Specs Done Cancel Affected Specs Results Per Page Export Use the Select Deselect All options to help you sel
174. e 6 25 shows below 6 27 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 25 Order Inputs dialog box 6 28 Order Inputs Done Cancel Material Yo Step So Batch Sugar Granulated 5077505 001 a w 4 Orange Flavor 123 5080091 001 A 44 Water Carbonated 5077462 001 ip Use the up and down arrow icons if to change the order of input items and then click Done GSM closes the dialog box and the new sort order is reflected in the Inputs grid Establishing Quantities Within The Input Items Sub Section Establishing quantities for the most part is similar to the methods described on the Formulation tab Therefore please review Establishing Quantities Within The Input Items Sub Section on page 6 28 However it is worth noting that all values are specific to a single step Additional features available in this sub section include Percent Step tThe percent yielded for a given material in a given step as compared to the total yield for the step e Consume From Step Quantities for consume form step items are established when adding the material to the grid See page 6 27 for additional information Remaining Fields and Tools within the Input Items Sub Section Due to the fact that many of the fields and tools are the used by both the Formulation and Process tabs the remaining fields will point you to the appropriate definitions Annotations See Formulation Tab Additional Tools Found in the
175. e BOM item and have GSM look up available entries leveraging the existing search model You can tailor auto complete to lookup based on specification name specification number cross reference and by how many characters the user must enter before auto complete starts These settings are configurable See the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Configuration Guide for more information Adding Materials To add materials 1 Click the Add New button leaving the field to the left of the button null as figure 6 3 shows below Figure 6 3 Add New button Summary Formulation Process Ext Data Related Specs CSS Supporting Documen Inputs Step Material Qty GL Yid Batch U USDr100g EXT Cost 0 00000 Ib 0 00000 lb 0 00000 0 00000 Add New Calculate A GSM opens a search page as figure 6 4 shows below 6 11 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 4 Search page Search Criteria Spec Marne e orange Flavor more criteria F Load El Save Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page Spec Y Spec Name Status Supercedes Equivalent 5080091 001 Orange Flavor 123 Draft Reviews 5080166 001 Orange Flavor 4487 Draft 306016 0011 Orange Flavor 3399 Inactive 506801 78 001 Orange Flavor 236 Approved 5082928 001 Orange Flavor 236 test Draft 5082529 001 Orange Flavor 236 test 2 Draft 5082535 001 Orange Flavor 236 Draft 5087 732 001 Orange Flavoring Draft 5090617 001 Class 2 O
176. e Management for Process Referenced outputs can be described by Sub Types similar to External Owned outputs Because the referenced output ingredient lives independent of the formulation the Sub Types merely describe the role the output plays in relation to the formulation specification Theoretical Ingredient Verses Output Ingredient There are two parts to every output a Theoretical Ingredient Describes how the inputs of a formulation come together and create technical definition for composition nutrition custom data and other data elements This technical definition represents a rollup of data from the input ingredients The theoretical ingredient is described by a given formulation and is considered part of the formulation specification The theoretical ingredient is represented on an output s BOM Item Definition screen Q Output Ingredient The formal definition of the material This portion is represented using an ingredient specification When an ingredient specification is owned by a formulation specification theoretical data is pushed from the formulation specification to the ingredient specification When an ingredient specification is referenced the formulation specification 1s not able to push data Therefore users manage updates and changes Using both the Theoretical and Output Ingredient it is possible to have multiple formulation specifications that create the same output Each of the formulation specifications would
177. e Management for Process Nutrition Surveillance Management User Guide Product Quality Scorecard You can syndicate GSM core data to other Agile Product Lifecycle for Process applications as well as to other systems in your company Product Quality Scorecard PQS uses testing protocols which must be configured in GSM For more information see the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Product Quality Scorecard User Guide Reporting The Reporting application provides reporting capability for data in GSM For more information see the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Reporting User Guide 1 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Supply Chain Relationship Management GSM specifications are syndicated to Supply Chain Relationship Management SCRM where sourcing approvals are created Refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Supply Chain Relationship Management User Guide for more information Supplier Portal Suppliers can view specifications created in GSM using Supplier Portal For more information see the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Supplier Portal User Guide Finding Agile Data There are two basic ways of locating information in Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process a By searching a By category This section explores the first method For guidance on using the category method see Understanding the Category Tab on page 1 17 Understanding the Sea
178. e below you would be versioning all hierarchies attached to ingredient specification IngA v1 This action will also issue the ingredient specification IngA v1 to Ing A v2 You could achieve this same result if you were to manually create IngA v2 and use the replace specification type You may use only one option per smart issue request The type selected will display different fields below the Type drop down list Figure 21 16 Example of issuing the hierarchy only without replacing a specification Outputs e L nl I i 21 14 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features To replace a specification 1 From the Type drop down list select Replace Specification as shown in figure 21 17 below Figure 21 17 Replace Specification option Ka Save Save amp Close Cancel smi 0000382 smart issue 02 Pending Summary Details Audit Search Criteria Type Replace Specification This icon clears search criteria and the Action List Specification to Remove Specification to Add Smart Issue Action List Results Per Page 2 Click the Specification to Remove hyperlink to display a search form in a dialog box 3 Use the search form to select an ingredient menu item packaging material printed packaging product or trade specification The search form closes 4 Click the Specification to Add hyperlink to display a search form This form
179. e eee eee 1 16 Adding More Ciera eei tone aeaud 34h anaes Sten ad ploteo ala aos 1 16 Sieries over a Custom BC Lc ee rae ee et rastas pa o eS eee ee ea ee ee en 1 17 Understanding the Category Tab ss sea ra da ira eee 1 17 Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Gita cs A e T E E o 2 1 Creatine d New Speciaol 2s spsso cortaron capcom tae rosal 2 1 Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification corona 2 1 As E eee ee eee ee ee eee eee AA 2 3 Manatcias Peci ON erario ora ts eins 2 4 o NR 2 4 Accessing YOU Achion eM esos ba 2 4 Understanding the Action Items Page eonicira ra porras 2 4 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Resolving WorkilOws 0100 A IS AS AS AE 2 6 IansiMoOnin Ga WOLKOW sicario da epi ae 2 7 Selecting Workflow Participante as A AAA ES 2 8 Working with Sighature Docampo a 2 8 Temporary Siena ure AUNOU 44 08 bii eee E es 2 9 Approval Audi Trad A A TA A Sead ne eed eee 2 11 Current Status Seconds AROS 2 11 Event DUSIOLY ECHO radar ads 2 11 Signature Document SCCHIOI iaa ir atu E a a RO A a 2 11 Lineage History ECOS A A ee SA od Mas aah ed meal arabs 2 12 Companne Insredient pecan si dai 2 13 PRINTING Speca ONS paete perdana E AR de as 2 13 Pinuno Trade opecilicaNoN cera inaa aa is 2 13 Documentation Formal Seco E E aa ee ene es 2 14 PACK ACIS Elie dt E deeds 2 16 Wille SpeCMIC ANON 3 cteesustasicdraaacase duras rd cados ade 2 16 Related Made Specllicacons errar iiO pecto loa 2 16 Additonal Related estic SAA
180. e for a retailer to order End Available Date Indicates when the product will no longer be available to order Product Identification Section In this section you can document product identifiers like GTIN Global Trade Item Number Additionally the Item Type chosen here determines which fields and sections appear elsewhere in the specification Figure 4 1 and figure 4 2 below demonstrate some of the field variations based on the Item Type field Figure 4 1 Product Identification section Traded unit Product Identification Item Type consumer Unit co pack GTIN UPC EAM o00000000000123 Description Description ll PLU Description BEEF BBO DINNER W POS Description BEEF BBO DINNER id 4 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 4 4 Item TYPE consumer Unit not for resale Figure 4 2 Product Identification section Consumer Unit not for resale Product Identification Description 11 0 oz single server meal consisting of seasoned cooked beef and shoestirng carrots dl Key fields include Item Type The item type selected determines which fields and sections are visible on specification For example co pack items have sections available to create supply associations and formulation breakdowns These sections are unavailable for other trade item types Available item types are as follows Consumer Unit Represents the lowest levels of the item hierarchy This type can be used to repre
181. e list in the Specification Categories section of the Applies To tab 7 Click Save or Save amp Close Document Note Master specifications can also be associated explicitly at the specification level See Master Specifications Section on page 3 9 for more information Supporting Documents Tab This Supporting Documents tab consists of the following sections a Attachments For discussion of this commonly used section please see Attachments Section on page 3 22 Q Supporting Documents The only document type available for use in the Master Specifications Supporting Documents tab is rich text For more information please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 Q DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 Ext Data Tab This tab consists of two sections a Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 a Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 References Tab For discussion of the Activities section the only section in the References tab please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 17 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 17 6 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 18 LIO Profiles
182. e with a Create Request button in the top right as shown in figure 21 11 below Figure 21 11 Smart Issue search page Create Request smart Issue Requests Search Criteria Starts With v __ more criteria additional attributes Load f Save Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page 2 At the upper right of the Smart Issue page click Create Request The Smart Issue page displays as shown in figure 21 12 below 21 9 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 21 12 Smart Issue page smi 0000371 Pending ry Details Audit Summary Information vale 2 Originator Smith David Owners David Smith Private E Status Pending Description Extended Attributes Extended Attributes Add New _ Custom Sections Remove Section Attachments Attachments There are no attachments Add New Related Documents MPD Activities Display all NPD Activities related to this Smart Issue request Activities Activity Type Description 21 10 Request 0000371 Create Date 6 1 2009 3 23 46 PM Last Edit 6 1 2009 8 23 46 PM Status Relationship Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features The tabs on the Smart Issue page include Summary Defines the smart issue request and the users and groups able to view and edit it Detail Designates the specifications impacted by the smart issue request e Resul
183. each distinct attribute to a specification once only Only distinct attributes inside the Extended Attributes table are pulled into formulation specifications for use in prototyping Additionally extended attributes tagged as design attributes will automatically be added to the output Important Ifyou remove a custom section or extended attribute the system deletes the data that you entered Delete data with caution because it cannot be retrieved Adding a Custom Section To add a custom section 1 With the page in edit mode click Add Section GSM displays a dialog box listing available custom sections as figure 3 35 shows below Figure 3 35 Custom section selection dialog box gt Oracle Windows Internet Explorer Ja Ex Done Cancel Average Temps Adhesives Additional Details Adhesives Time Temperature Epoxies Japan Allergen Information Key Date Key Date partial list Key Dates full list Marketing 10 Marketing 20 Marketing 2 Select a section name and then click Done The custom section is added to the company profile 3 30 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Editing a Custom Section To edit a custom section table row or column 1 To add values to the custom section click Edit Section A dialog box displays the custom section in edit mode as figure 3 36 shows below The edit icon displays for every editable row and column I
184. earch against Component Catalog terms that are declared Term within the percent breakdown BD Breakdown Component Search against Component Catalog term or alias that are Term or Alias declared within the percent breakdown BD Breakdown Component Search against the free text name of component declared Text within the percent breakdown Combined Statement Search against the free text combined statement used to declare materials in aggregation for labeling purposes Concept Children Search against the concept including concepts that exist as a child in the hierarchy Concept Exact Match Search against the exact match of the concept Concept Hierarchical Search against the hierarchy both up and down that the concept exists in Equivalent Search against the equivalent number designed to identify the material as it is referenced by other cross reference systems A 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Table A 1 Key field names of note in the search criteria key field list described Key field Description GTIN UPC EAN Search against the Global Trade Item Number GTIN or European Article Number EAN or Universal Product Code UPC barcode number Menu Item Build Search against the Menu item specification or product specification listed in a menu item build Supplier signed spec Search against the flag on a sourcing approval that indicates the supplier has acknowledged a specification System Equivalent Search a
185. ect the specifications for the smart issue F Spec Spec Name Equivalent Type Status Business Unit Category Issued O Ue 5088350 Trade Spec Mango ird Approved CPI Latin America CPI North v521rc10 Trade Yes 001 20080812 Cu America BU Top spec Top F E 5088350 New Issue Trade Spec trd Draft CPI Latin America CPI North v521rc10 Trade Yes 002 Mango 0080812 cu America BU Top spec Top Ol 5090407 Trade Spec Mango trd Draft CPI North America CPI No Category Yes 001 Orange 20090410 cu Northern Europe Available i All hierarchies are listed using the top level specification to represent the hierarchy For any hierarchy listed you can click on the hierarchy investigation icon gj to display a popup window listing all specifications in the hierarchy that will be issued Take notice of the Issued column which will state whether the specification will be issued or not based on the get latest revision setting on the specification 9 Click the checkbox next to the hierarchies to issue and then click Done The dialog box closes and selected specifications appear in the Smart Issue Action List as figure 21 24 shows below The Action List represents all of the hierarchies that will be issued when the smart issue request is performed Figure 21 24 Smart Issue Action list smart Issue Action List Results Per Page Export Spec Spec Name Equivalent Type Status Business Unit Category Issued 5077539 BBO Beef
186. ected snapshot To preview a snapshot 1 Click Snapshot in the upper right corner of the application GSM opens the Snapshots dialog box which lists saved snapshots 2 Click the view details icon of the snapshot GSM displays a dialog box showing snapshot details Optimization Optimization can be used to adjust an output of a formulation specification based on any number of constraints related to ingredient costs nutrients and extended attributes It uses a linear optimization algorithm to generate the most optimal formulation based on the constraints guidelines and optimization methods Optimization is started from the action menu of a formulation specification and opens the optimization scenario in a popup As shown in figure 6 64 the Optimization tab is composed of the following sections Target Specification Constraints Guidelines Optimization Method a a a a 6 65 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 64 Optimization tab Reset Snapshot Save Done Cancel Target Specification Specification Spaghetti Sauce with Meat ing 5090858 001 External Product e Constraints Type Condition Design Conformance 99 99999 accurate 2 1 Objective Minimize Cost per 1009 0 01043 USD per 100g Add Guidelines Inputs Material l Scalability Scalability Scalability Scalability l A ivalent Type Prodika Yield i A Limit A Control nea aca Adjust Last Optimization 1 Onio
187. ection The Alternate Packaging section contains information related to any acceptable alternative packaging options Figure 7 5 Alternate Packaging section Alternate Packaging Packaging Material Specification Units Substitutes Scrap Factor Carton Paper Board Frozen Meal 7x 1259 0 1 5077540 001 Add New 7 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Compliance Tab Label Claims Section 7 6 The Compliance tab includes the following sections a Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 a Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 Q Label Claims Discussed below at Label Claims Section on page 7 6 a Compliance Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Compliance Information Section on page 3 6 Q Allergens Intolerances and Additives For discussion of this commonly used section please see Additives Allergens and Intolerances Sections on page 3 7 The Label Claims section contains the label claims linked to a menu item specification as figure 7 6 shows below The label claims values and calculation rules are maintained by an administrator Figure 7 6 Label Claims section Label Claims Potential Actual Fat Free bal Key fields include Potential Select all of the possible label claims for the finished good This field c
188. ective GSM displays the current value for the objective in the Design Conformance column as shown in figure 6 71 below Figure 6 71 Constraints section Constraints Type Condition esign Conformance 99 99999 accurate 1 Objective Minimize Cost per 100g 0 01043 USD per 100g gf 2 Ingredient Cost lt 0 00900 USD per 100g Gd 0 01043 USD per 100g 3 Extended Attribute Test Number lt 0 00500 q per 100g ll 0 053140 per 1009 4 Nutrient Content Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg per 100g ll 1162 62162 mg per 100g Add After you have defined the objective of your optimization scenario you can begin to build constraints to help the optimization engine produce a solution that is in line with your requirements To add a new constraint click Add New A dialog box opens as shown in figure 6 72 below from which you can select the type of constraint you want to add 6 69 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 72 Selecting a constraint Optimization Constraints Done Cancel Extended Attribute Ingredient Cost Nutrient Value GSM supports the following constraint types Ingredient Cost e Nutrient Content e Extended Attribute Ingredient Cost Using the Ingredient Cost constraint type you can set up a condition to monitor the total ingredient cost associated with your formula as shown in figure 6 73 below Figure 6 73 Ingredient Cost constraint Constraints Type Condition Design Con
189. ecycle Management for Process Administrator User Guide 2 6 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Transitioning a Workflow Within a specification or signature document use the workflow feature to move a document from one workflow step to another To move a document in a workflow 1 Click Workflow at the top right of the page The Document Workflow dialog box opens as shown in figure Remember that the buttons and fields that display vary based on the workflow and current workflow step Figure 2 7 Document Workflow dialog box Windows Internet Explorer all E Document Workflow Next Action Developmental y Current Status Select a step from this Current Owner spec app drop down list Current Workflow Trade Specification Current Status Draft Review Desired Action Draft Review Start Date 12 10 2007 Amber Date 12 13 2007 You must enter comments Red Date 12 15 2007 in the Your Comments field Your Comments I think we can provide more background information in the Supporting Documents section frmLinearWorkfowActionPopup Es Internet E 100 2 Enter comments in the Your Comments field required 3 Select a step from a drop down list in the Next Action section 4 Click the advance workflow icon gt to forward the specification or signature document to the next step in the approval process or click the move back icon 433 to return it to a prior step The
190. ed 6 41 References Taberno dise 6 41 Approval Arde Mal Taba A ani bute eh Reae enna kone 6 41 Nadine Oo er capo sanan dota daba nee It 6 41 OV e WO Pta tetris ans a isa 6 41 Biisalalo DO dai diras 6 42 Speciticalomattbutes abi o a ds ds aos died 6 43 Combined Ingredient Statement seca A E Ad a 6 43 Ineredient Attributes SECOND aa a a Dine ede abinain ee ete hana es 6 44 Reconstitution Equivalencia A in ha aca eats ie ae wee Waa as ee ae 6 44 Uo Breakdown labs 42 440 SS AS AS AAA A eae eseka 6 44 Component Yo Breakdowns Seco o a ae ee Ms 6 45 Nutrition TaD s cevusntec iea a tated SNS 6 45 Nutrient Composition Seco errata eat act a gene oad Pa bode tasa da 6 46 COP HAM CS Tab arta sides arta 6 46 Adding Gompli s With Information ios a A AA A ds 6 48 Output Dialos BOK arts ae icra ees Soha E Bee el 6 49 Summa lactato sedan nd dad ai Marea eas 6 50 Summary Information SeCHON ss bare ine cao ren dee ea Senet ee he Buea heehee osos 6 50 Gomposition Map Second rin 6 52 Package ine Composito Map Seco sea ia is a a AA euataeies 6 52 Med VAD dd ia 6 53 Packacino Contisutation Seco aora dayana dec 6 53 Approximate Yield Secon eee NA Cana a beaten alm kate ee wen 6 54 DESIST At EID UTES e Cone to e o e a al Aten a boa toate 6 56 TIO STEIN A yr ii A A A 6 56 Reculator BOM Seco oca escitas Gah eres restate ee 6 57 Theoretical Breakdown Seco o A A mains 6 58 Regulatory Breakdown Section nania AS A AA 6 58 NUMICO Ta ata eya caida iia 6 59
191. ed section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 Equipment Identification Described below at Equipment Identification Section on page 12 3 Cross References For discussion of this commonly used section please see Cross References Section on page 3 3 Approved for Use In For discussion on this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 12 Equipment Specifications Equipment Identification Section This section provides model information about the equipment Figure 12 1 Equipment Identification section Equipment Identification Model Ryco 780 9 Description ROYAL VENDORS RYCC 780 9 single package coin and bill transaction vender For 355mL cans Compliance Tab The Equipment Specification Compliance tab consists of the following sections Q Equipment Attributes This section contains a table called Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 a Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 Q Environmental Waste per item sold Discussed below at Environmental Waste per item sold Section on page 12 3 Environmental Waste per item sold Section This section provides a place to log known waste materials for this specification material along with other relevant attributes r
192. ed specification type as laid out in the chapter in this manual that specifically addresses that type of specification Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification To create a copy of a specification you will use the Create Copy button which is visible only to those with the user role of SPEC_COPIER and the specification creator role for the specification type you are trying to copy To create an issue of a specification you must have the role SPEC_ISSUER and the specification creator role for the specification type you are trying to issue For more information on user roles please see the Agile Product Lifecycle for Process Administrator User Guide 2 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 2 2 To create a copy of an existing specification 1 Navigate to the specification to copy 2 On the specification page click Create Copy at the upper right of the page GSM displays a dialog box as shown in figure 2 1 below Figure 2 1 Create New Specification links Sweet Water 2 Draft compliance Related Specs CSS Supporting Documents References 9 Approval Audit Sweet Wate 3 Oracle Microsoft Internet Explorer atd Sweet Wate Create NEW ISSUE for this Specification Create NEW SPECIFICATION based on this one ay July O End Available Date pes Last Edit Wednesday July 0 3 Click the Create NEW ISSUE for this Specification link to create another issue of the specification This action duplicat
193. ed to the packaging materials used to package trade specifications Equipment specifications Contain the data related to equipment specifications Printed packaging specifications Describe the printed packaging to be used in trade specifications Delivered material packing specifications Contain the data related to the inbound packing materials specified for incoming goods ingredients and packaging materials GSM then pulls these specifications together into packing configuration specifications which fully describe the conditioning of incoming goods Packing configuration specifications Describe the inbound packing configurations required by your company for incoming goods ingredients and packaging materials Labeling specifications Contain the labeling and coding requirements that suppliers need to affix on delivered material packing specifications for incoming goods ingredients and packaging materials Master specifications Represent generic specifications such as general terms and conditions company programs and directions regulatory guidelines and so on You can use such a specification to capture high level organizational standards for related traded products formulations ingredients or packaging Using master specifications can increase flexibility and improve document control Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Touch Points with Other Applications Computer
194. edient specification using the following fields From Spec The value that exists for that field on the ingredient specification Restrictions This is used to help categorize different versions of the breakdowns for usage in the Listed Ingredient Order LIO tool Formulation Classifications Formula classifications can be used to enforce security for individual specifications Classifications can be managed in the Admin Tool and are tied to user groups Only users in the associated groups can view formulas that have a formulation classification Tags Breakdowns can be tagged Tags help identify breakdowns and most tags help define how you want the system to react to the breakdown Available tags are listed on aQS on page 3 23 Nutrition Tab In the Nutrition tab of the Basis dialog box you can modify the nutritional information that is stored on the specification as shown infigure 6 45 below You can edit the existing nutritional information by providing a custom value or you can add new nutrients You can add nutrients from the standard nutrient list NSM or from the data that is stored in the Food Composition Library Note The Food Composition Library will need to be configured as a part of your implementation Figure 6 45 Basis dialog box Nutrition tab Basis Refresh Done BBQ Sauce Dry Mix 5077419 001 Specification Attributes Breakdown Nutrition Compliance Ext Data Nutrient Composition From Spec
195. ef Seasoned Cooked Strips amp Ingredient Admin Review Binder Product Reduced Sodium Specifications Exp uy Late Red La Meeds Attention Amber Normal Green The RAG status is an indicator of compliance with the established service level agreement SLA timelines for that document type SLAs for a specification are defined in that specification s workflow 2 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Resolving Workflows When you first save a specification within GSM the application associates a workflow with the specification In some cases when the specification resolves to multiple workflow templates you will need to select the workflow template from the available options In such a situation select a template for this specification from the Select Workflow Template dialog box shown in figure 2 6 below and then click Done at the top right corner of the dialog box Figure 2 6 Select Workflow Template dialog box Select Workflow Template Done Cancel es Trade Spec Short Template T Trade Spec EQT Visibility Short Template Trade Spec Template Important Once you have selected a workflow template you will not be asked to define the workflow again If your specification needs to be re resolved you will need to use the Resolve Workflow button which is visible only to those with the user role of CAN_RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS For more information on user roles please see the Agile Product Lif
196. eld o Total Solids Water Water tomato paste 0 00000 911111 100 00000 2 0 1101 g 0 00000 o ds Water Source Item Using Yo From Yield Total Solids Water Water copy of CACS Water j 0 51151 0 00000 3 21818 g 100 00000 Water Carbonated OOo e 1 51155 0 00000 9 45834 q 100 00000 en Enter the source from which to get the water necessary for performing the reconstitution and click Done The results of your reconstitution appear in the LIO tree Delete Group Perform Actions E Add Mew Group E Item Mame E Rename Item Breakdowns ig Delete Group fk Do Not Declare Annotate Eal Audit History Divide Click this menu option to delete the selected group You can delete a group only if it has no subitems Annotate Perform Actions Bo A YJE E Item Mame 1 Add Mew Group E Ingredient Statement E Rename Item Breakdowns E Annotate E Do Not Declare ad Audit Hi Divide 18 12 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 18 LIO Profiles Click this menu option to add a narrative comment to the item Annotations are typically used to provide additional explanation rationale to help others understand the decisions made during the LIO process Any item containing an annotation will be denoted with a special icon in the left margin of the LIO tree as shown in figure 18 11 below Figure 18 11 Annotation LTO Construction Restrictions Reset LIO Tree Format Combined St
197. elds Field Name Importance Spec Name Required Access Level System Generated Details Use it to identify your specification This data is used throughout the Agile PLM for Process suite when linking referencing specifications Short name is a shorter reference to the specification name Depending on your configuration Short name may or may not be required or even displayed Represents the access level for secured objects on that specification Depending on your configuration this field may not be visible For more information about object level security see the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Administrator User Guide Category Sub Category Group Required Drives behavior Defaults to the first node in 3 2 the specification category Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Table 3 1 Summary Information key fields continued Field Name Importance Details Originator System Generated Auto populated field that denotes the person who created the specification e Originator Name e Originator Country Supercedes Manual Entry or System Identifies the superceded Generated specification Reason for Change Manual Entry Shows the reason given for changing the specification System Generated Number used to identify specifications The issue number generated when an issue is created Shows the current workflow status Shows the date of the
198. em within the tree represents a material that may be considered for inclusion in the final ingredient statement Each LIO item is represented by an icon indicating its type and current method of disclosure and includes its relative percent composition yield based within the final formula In the LIO tree you can right click an individual LIO item to reveal a number of declaration options actions that you can use during LIO construction as shown in figure 18 7 below 18 6 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 18 LIO Profiles Figure 18 7 LIO right mouse menu al Lab Dry SOULE LF yY PILA ee FAA FO E Salt Granular Not Iodized 1 137189 0h lm Beef Seasoned Cooked Strips E Perform Actions gt 4 view 22 7272 ol Sauce BBQ 18 18182 lig Item Name ME add New Group E Water Carbonated 5 90000 li Do Not Declare Recon Equiv E 1 7200 Oe le aC Comp pe lig Rename Item 34 Comp A 1 18000 B Brown Sugar Light 4 72727 Annot SA Wheat Oats 4 72727 EE Audit History 8 vinegar White Distilled 100 Grain 3 81818 Divide 33 Salt 1 90909 354 Suger 1 90909 Yo al L Tanta Manin Hrana A Carno 2 Oe A These options are contextual based on the type of item selected and the data inherited from its underlying specification LIO profile and the currently selected labeling restrictions Using the described options actions you can build your ingredient statem
199. ement for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are 16 2 Y E Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Create Copy Create a new copy of the current labeling specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing a trade specification please see Printing Other Specifications on page 2 19 Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current speci
200. en ingredient in a given formulation specification Therefore the override values are not associated with the input ingredient and are not available when using the input ingredient as an input to other formulation specifications Refer to Basis dialog box on page 6 42 for a detailed explanation of basis a Get Latest Issue When the user adds an ingredient specification to the inputs grid by default the relationship is specific to the ingredients issue number i e issue 001 Later if the ingredient is changed and a new issues is created 002 then some form of change management must be performed to update the formulation specification 6 19 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Outputs Section 6 20 However if Get Latest Issue is used when creating the relationship between input ingredient and the formulation specification the relationship is only based on specification number and workflow status Therefore the next time the specification is viewed the BOM will return the maximum issue number that is in a workflow status marked with the Is Approved system action 4 Substitute Material Displays the substitution icon if substitutes have been defined on the ingredient specification When you click the icon GSM displays the Substitute Material dialog box Use this dialog box to swap out materials with available selections and to update quantities a Item history Displays the item history icon Click on
201. ended Attributes Ed Ed A Ed P Extended Attributes Notes Countries Sold To Australia New Zealand USA Only 5 sold to USA First Order Date Saturday April 05 2008 Heat Index Warm Must be between 100 and 140 degrees Labeling Required Yes Add New Custom Sections Custom sections are configurable sets of extended attributes The custom data that you enter is displayed in a table as shown in the figure below Figure 3 34 Custom section Child Mutrition Custom Section AS Soy Hydration Factor Minimum Soy Flour 4 mm 0 002 mL Minimum Soy Protein Concentrate 10 mm 0 05 mL Minimum Soy Protein Isolate 8 mm 0 04 mL Edit Section Add Section Remove Section Calculated Attributes Some extended attributes inside the Extended Attributes table and in custom sections can be calculated A calculated extended attribute is an attribute that references other specification attributes and performs calculations When you add a calculated attribute to your specification GSM calculates it when you click any of the following buttons at the top right of the page 3 29 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process e Calculate e Save e Save amp Close Document GSM can calculate attributes only when the specification is in edit mode If GSM encounters an error while calculating the attribute it displays a calculation error icon 1 In some cases you can click the error icon to see error details Note You can add
202. ended attribute defined Do Not Allow Null will not return a value if any of the formula items do not have the extended attribute defined Comments Comments about the extended attribute Click Add New to add extended attributes Ifan attribute has already been rolled up it cannot be added again 6 63 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Snapshots 6 64 You cannot remove items from the grid if the items are rolled up from the child items It you added an item to the specification or to the Output dialog box you can remove it using the delete icon Custom Sections Section This section displays custom sections for the formula item Custom sections can be added to the output popup just like anywhere else If a custom section is being added that has a distinct extended attribute that already exists in the rollup section it will not be added Custom sections do not get rolled up only the distinct extended attributes from the BOM items will be rolled up and displayed in the simple extended attribute section of the output popup Custom sections that are added to the output popup will be pushed to the ingredient specification just like the other output data When a formulation specification is in edit mode you have the ability to create snapshots using the Snapshot action button This feature allows you to take and store a picture of your formulation specification at any time during the development process U
203. ent 18 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Declaration Options and Actions The table below describes the various presentations methods for disclosing each LIO item and the corresponding declaration options and actions available Table 18 1 Declaration options actions Icon Current Method for Disclosure Declaration Options Actions Ll Base level for LIO authoring Perform Action gt Add new Group does not appear in LIO Ingredient that is listed as a single item in Perform Action gt View Perform Action gt Add new Group Perform Action gt Recon Equiv Perform Action gt Rename Item Perform Action gt Annotate Perform Action gt Audit History Perform Action gt Divide Item Name Ingredient Statement Do NOT Declare Ingredient that is broken out into separate Perform Action gt View subitems in the LIO Perform Action gt Add new Group Perform Action gt Recon Equiv Perform Action gt Rename Item Perform Action gt Annotate Perform Action gt Audit History Perform Action gt Divide Item Name Ingredient Statement Breakdown List x y Breakdown List e y Breakdown List i x y Context List x y Context List it Y Context List i x y Ingredient that is flagged as Do NOT Perform Action gt View Declare and will not appear in the LIO Perform Action gt Add new Group Perform Action gt Rename Item Perform Action gt Annotate Perform Action gt Audi
204. ent Catalog Note If your configuration is set to use strict breakdowns you can only add Component Catalog terms to the breakdown Description Country of Origin Complies With Formulation OR Range Total Solids Function Critical USA 50 00000 min Yo Ye max Yo Total 50 min 0 max Oo Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 References Tab Activities Section Commonly Used Sections The Reference page contains the list of all reference data linked to a specification The following sections appear on most specification types e Activities Suppliers e Specification Dependencies e Related Documents The Activities section displays all GSM activities that contain this specification as the primary object The description of an activity is the activity s name and number To view an associated activity click the description For more information on GSM activities refer to Chapter 20 Activities Figure 3 29 Activities section Actress Activity Type Description Status Relationship Activity Ingredient Analysis Approval Activity 5086958 001 Draft Primary Mew packaging request Label Change 5021444 001 Draft Primary Suppliers Section Supply Chain Relationship Management SCRM is the application dedicated to managing supplier information However you can manage some supplier related tasks from within GSM For detailed information on SCRM see the Agile Product Lifecycle Managment for Proces
205. ent only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN _RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 7 Menu ltem Specifications Summary Tab Key sections in the Summary tab include Q Summary Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 Q Menu Item Description Discussed below at Menu Item Description Section on page 7 3 Q Cross References For discussion of this commonly used section please see Cross References Section on page 3 3 Q Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Menu Item Description Section This section provides fields that you can use to categorize and classify menu items Additionally it has enriched text fields that enable descriptions of menu items packaging and appearance as well as sensory descriptions Figure 7 1 Menu Item Description section Menu Item Description Standard ocal Meets Global Standard Ww Menu Item Class any Emerging Brand Identified Big Stuff Hamburger Meal Packagina Paper Cover with Big Stuff Branding Images Appearance Large Hamburger with pickles onions and tomato Sensory Served fresh hot and made to order 7 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Build Tab The Build tab consists of two sections A Menu Item Build section
206. enter the composition data for that specification as shown in figure 3 19 Nutrient Composition page on page 3 17 A specification can have only one nutrient composition Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Figure 3 19 Nutrient Composition page Nutrient Composition Summary Information Spec Name Short Name Spec Status Access Level Category Sub Category Group Originator Supercedes Reason for Change DRL migration nga Draft Draft Pulses Other Beans Dried Dehydrated3 Johnson Sally Nutrient Composition 8 ISIS SS SS SSS SS Add New Nutrient Calories Energy kJ Protein Carbohydrates Dietary Fiber Total Sugar Total Fat Saturated Fat Polyunsaturated Fat Trans Patty Acid Cholesterol Manganese Per 100mL gt Per 100 grams 1340 00000 kcal 4635 000 kcal 5608 00000 kJ 193162 000 kJ 89 32000 g 30837 730 g 242 60000 g83757 650 g 97 69200 g 33728 163 g 15 57600 g 5377 614 g 5 12000 q 1767 680 g 1 32400 g 457 111 g 2 20800 g 762 312 g 0 26000 g 89 755 g 0 00000 mg 0 000 mg 5 23600 mg 1807 729 mg Import NSM Key fields include Per 100g Values per nutrient Spec Issue Status Effective Inactive Commonly Used Sections 5084931 001 Draft Thursday July 19 2007 Comments USDA Nutrient Database USDA Nutrient Database USDA Nutrient Database USDA Nutrient Database From Nutritional Database From Nutriti
207. equired for environmental waste reporting Figure 12 2 Environmental Waste per item sold section Environmental Waste a i Composed of Material Class Weight Percent Recyclable Recycled Materials F GREEN GLASS 1 b Add New S io S io Related Specs Tab The Related Specs tab contains the following sections a Packaging Specifications Discussed below at Packaging Specifications Section on page 12 4 Q Master Specifications For discussion of this field please see Master Specifications Section on page 3 9 12 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Packaging Specifications Section In this section you can associate this specification with one or more packaging material specifications Figure 12 3 Packaging Specifications section Summary Compliance Related Specs Supporting Documents References Af Packaging Specifications Spec Spec Name 5085064 001 Packaging Material Security 20070728 Supporting Documents Tab The Equipment Specification Supporting Documents tab contains the list of all supporting documents associated with an equipment specification This tab consists of three sections Q Supporting Documents The document types available are Attachments Procedures URL and Rich Text For discussion of this commonly used section please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 Q DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section
208. er This program can be downloaded from the Adobe Web site http www adobe com If you need additional assistance or information please go to http metalink oracle com or phone 1 800 233 1711 for assistance Before calling Oracle Support about a problem with an Agile PLM for Process manual please have the full part number which is located on the title page TTY Access to Oracle Support Services Agile Training Aids Oracle provides dedicated Text Telephone TTY access to Oracle Support Services within the United States of America 24 hours a day 7 days a week For TTY support call 800 446 2398 Outside the United States call 1 407 458 2479 Go to the Oracle University Web page http www oracle com education chooser selectcountry_new html for more information on Agile Training offerings Accessibility of Code Examples in Documentation Screen readers may not always correctly read the code examples in this document The conventions for writing code require that closing braces should appear on an otherwise empty line however some screen readers may not always read a line of text that consists solely of a bracket or brace Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation This documentation may contain links to Web sites of other companies or organizations that Oracle does not own or control Oracle neither evaluates nor makes any representations regarding the accessibility of these Web sites xvii Agile Pr
209. es Business Unit Children e Business Unit Exact Match e Business Unit Hierarchical e Category e Concept Exact Match e Concept Hierarchical e Concept Children e System Name e UDEX Classification Effective Inactive e Last Edit e Created e Facility e Menu Item Class e Output Item e Receiving Facilities e Source Facility Standard Workflow Originator Introduction Operator set Equals Greater Than Less Than Exists Sourcing Approval Is NULL True or False Supplier signed spec Is FALSE Is TRUE Add data icon opens a dialog box to further retine field entry Search Term Field The third main field is for entry of search terms Depending on the type of field selected in the first drop down list the Key Field list the search term field e Accepts data entry that you type e Accepts data entry that you select from prepopulated forms Does not accept data Entering Search Terms by Typing You can type your search term directly into the search term field when searching for data in the following two field types e Free text fields Number fields See table 1 2 Sample list of search tool fields by field type and operator sets on page 1 7 for a list of fields of this type 1 9 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Entering Search Terms by Prepopulated List Several field types require that you choose your terms from prepopulated lists as indicated by the a
210. es Aca 21 23 Worktlo wine SPE AON rosada AS 21 24 Checkine the Status onthe Smart SUC cas as 21 25 Chapter 22 Component Catalog Component Cat 10 Ces atea a Aaa 22 1 Integration with Other Applications 20 A A AS A A A A 22 1 Creating a New Component Catalog TM ti di AA A AA AAA 22 2 Carta to A ANA 22 4 E A eas cheer ee aca ao E e E r aun tease San ouaes 22 4 LAO Disclosure Seco AA dd 22 5 EIO TOUPIN tiny ap A A da ds 22 6 Reconstitution Equivaleney Secos riadas rd ardid UESREAT RATED a 22 7 Approved Esee s Seco Misas rr riada area none erento seen 22 7 Usme Component Catalos TES cria A ds 22 8 AppendixA Key Search Fields o a O A 1 XV Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process xvi Global Specification Management User Guide ABOUT THIS MANUAL Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Documentation The Agile Product Lifecycle Management PLM for Process documentation set includes Adobe Acrobat PDF files The Oracle Technology Network OTN Web site http www oracle com technology documentation agile html contains the latest versions of the Agile PLM for Process PDF files You can view or download these manuals from the Web site or you can ask your Agile administrator if there is an Agile PLM for Process Documentation folder available on your network from which you can access the Agile PLM for Process documentation PDF files Note To read the PDF files you must use the free Adobe Reader version 7 0 or lat
211. es most of the data on the specification increasing the latest Issue by 1 for the current specification number prefix Note The action in this step is the method of choice when you want to issue the specification GSM appends issue numbers to the end of the specification number when specifications are referenced For example in the specification 5077456 001 the last 3 digits 001 represent the issue number GSM tracks specification issues by using the item history feature For more information please see Item History on page 2 3 4 Click the Create NEW SPECIFICATION based on this one link to create a copy of the specification This action duplicates most data on the specification assigning a new specification number This method saves time when creating similar specifications Note When a copy or issue of a specification is created the resolved workflow and active workflow step will not follow the specification The specification will re resolve to a workflow when saved within GSM For more on workflows please see Resolving Workflows on page 2 6 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications ltem History Specification issues are tracked using the item history feature To access the item history of a specification navigate to the specification and do one of the following Q Click Item History at the upper right of the page GSM opens the Spec History dialog box as shown in figure 2 3
212. escribes the context for the shelf life Each specification can have only one shelf life record for each type Tags These tags describe how the shelf life will be used elsewhere in the system The following tags are available Suppress Printing Prevents the shelf life record from being printed Do Not Publish to Supplier Prevents the shelf life record from being included in eQ and Supplier Portal 10 4 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 10 Ingredient Specifications Design Attributes Section The design attributes in this section can be used by formulation specifications Figure 10 3 Design Attributes section Design Attributes Density alla _ Ml Unit Conversion Total Solids 78 00000 Edible Portion 100 00000 0 Key fields include Density Necessary for calculating density in formulation specifications Unit Conversion Necessary for calculating mass in some areas of the application in which units are used as a UOM This is also used to convert between mass and volume in formulation specifications Total Solids Necessary for calculating total solids in areas of the application such as for formulation specifications Edible Portion ingredient specification only Percentage of the material that is edible Formulation Tab The Formulation tab contains the data related to the ingredient statements and formulations of an ingredient specification This tab has two sections
213. ested tree as shown in figure 18 6 below 18 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 18 6 LIO Tree LIO Construction Restrictions Reset LIO Tree Format multi part Statement level 1 Inactive Rows O Hide Show gt O ingredient Statement 100 00000 E Blended Vegetables Corn Ca E 27 72727 Vo E Corn Whole Kernel Grade A IQF 16 63636 Yo J A Carrots Shoestring IQF 5 54545 gt _ Peas Grade B IQF 5 54545 ie Potato Sliced Seasoned 26 36364 Yo l Potato Half Slices Skin on IQF 25 24318 Yo E Dil Soybean Refined Bleached Deodorized 0 79091 ere Seasoning Skced Potato 0 32955 E A O Sauce Dry Mix 0 19773 Yo G Salt Granular Not Iodized 0 13182 al Sauce BBQ 18 18182 J P Water Carbonated 5 90000 a Comp B 4 72000 a Comp A 1 18000 O Brown Sugar Light 4 72727 BIF Wheat Oats 4 72727 Yo 8 Mnegar White Distiled 100 Grain 3 81818 Pal Salt 1 90909 Yo 35 Suger 1 90909 l F Tomato Paste Grade A Fancy 2 00000 E Lemon Juice Single Strength 0 54545 Wo E Unsulphured Molasses Imported 0 36364 Yo Ch E Ll i I au E ii 2S se Refresh Preview Alias Grouping Audit GSM displays the tree directly under the inactive row handling information and will display the entire formula tree Each it
214. et CAR eae a Ree aren oe te Re oca de Recon EQUIV Hck bt poeta no Meee hand eae ais Delete Groups csc fant eka Loba ANNO 66 sea eee hei a hle hia oo eis Sat Declaration Descriptlous senil da se Ingredient Statement 0 cee eee eee Beate on area ee ments ete rare re ene eee ee E E IGG OGY A E ao oe nana vedas E LSU ed 00 90 ES eee ke Bates DONOW Dedates acotada IO peras iaa es Rettesh Operation pactados nba laico Preview Opera auto diaria da Alias FIC Operational eds Grouping Operan dada Audit Operation daa Pinal Statement Taba o dan Ingredient Statement Options Secti0N o o oo Formatear ideada dada SUV Fle Cadena bs ne de ata h eee eset reads Final Ingredient Statement Section Label Composition TDi ana ed Chapter 19 Testing Protocol Library Di A IN E Page Leve PUNCHONS 4 202400 52chasnbidetsamita tena oan Testing Protocol Detal tec issue Vee awe an Testing Protocol Header Section oooooooooo Facility Information Section o ooo ooocooommommo Sections S ECHO daa Extended Attributes Section o ooooooomoomm Testing Protocol Detail Section oo ooooooo XIV Global Specification Management User Guide Contents Chapter 20 Activities CCL VAC E ARAN RA 20 1 reatino an AC A SAA AAA 20 2 Creating a Primary Relationship from a Specification 0 cece cece cee eect ereenn 20 2 Creating an Activity That Is Independent o
215. f Specifications 0 cece cece eee ence eens 20 3 Seat CMI Oran CUM Veiene cers deta AA eE Gre aie cae acagti hare a S tide a Aenean ee 20 3 Sumatra A A a ee eerie a aot 20 4 ACUP SUNMA SCClION 5245 00 AAA AA nae ae oe r a eek 20 4 Primary Action Tem EOS AO EA A Cette 20 5 Related eis Echo ori 20 6 Supportline Documents Taba cada dardos 20 7 PBDI Der rica PEE een es aes A veda es 20 7 References TD A AA A A ES 20 7 Approva Audit Tra Tabs sabi dt als 20 7 Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features ONIS EL E ENE ES AA AAA OS 21 1 Global SUCCESSION olaaa a btt 21 1 Accessme the Global SUCCESSION TOO asp ARAS ea oe 21 3 Finding the Specifications to SUpersedeii a AAA han AAA AA 21 3 P ertormins the Global SUCESO AE AAA it 21 6 Vorn nie he SUCCessIOMns 2 iit ois ed 21 7 Sidatt SsUC 1O00l tac ira TIRE beste a hee raros darias 21 8 Accessing the Smart Issue TOOL ee eas ede ea ead Seen A A See ea aoe 21 9 Detining he Simare Issue Request A 21 11 Finding the Specifications lo Vertaal A 21 13 Replace SPeCiNCaHOM 54 204 AS rs barat eee Aad Sa 21 13 Replace Specthication Given Parts a AAA eden esha SA ds AAA 21 13 Versi n Hieratehr Onis sos dot ada 21 14 Exportine the Atected SpeciticadONS sastre ita cada 21 21 Expor ne MS ACUOn Liar Erer EERIE ERNEA onto ca 21 21 Pero ram tes marti iS 21 21 Veribyine ne smart daa dais 21 22 EXportine NO Restisedas sacara EUA Era 21 23 Paled Requests sui paid ras adidas 21 23 EMPOLUINS Failed R
216. f you provide additional nutrient information that describes the comparative product Select the comparative reference product tab and fill in the appropriate information needed You can also import data from another trade specification by selecting the Reference Product label Data will be imported from the trade specification s active nutrient profile See figure 8 8 Label Claim Determination dialog box on page 8 11 On the Claims Determination tab from the Label Claims Authority drop down list select a specific rule group to use for considering claims applicability Click Display Label Claims to display the Applicable Claims table The system evaluates label claims against rules that you previously defined All selected claims based on the label claims authority appear in the Applicable Claims table with color coding to show whether the claim may be made for the product When the system evaluates a claim as compliant the Comments column displays supporting information for the claim along with one or more user defined values supporting the assessment in the Calculation s column as shown in figure 8 9 Label Claim Determination Claims Determination tab on page 8 12 If the system finds that the claim is invalid no such information appears in the Comments column When you click the Comments column head within the Applicable Claims table the Comments column of those claims that are not applicable displays additional information about c
217. fective off sulferous vinegary Clean pleasant scented delicate Fruity pronounced developed essence Weight i NC lt 0 Observations Qualitative If Measure Score Cloying syrupy sugary lacking Appropriate to type balanced normal Sweet edged slightly lacking Weight 1 NC lt 0 Ola Observations Key fields include Property Description Section Click the add data icon a If the item is an analytical property GSM opens a search form with which you can select a different property description From the Section drop down list choose a section defined above to categorize which section this testing item belongs to If the item is an extended attribute then it opens up a multi select dialog box with active extended attributes for testing protocols Specification Limits Define target upper and lower bounds for this test as well as a unit of measure Scoring Set up the scoring for the item in this subsection This field defines how to score this item in the testing system Click the add data icon 4 in this column to open the Scoring dialog box from which you can make your selections as shown in figure 19 6 below 19 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 19 6 Scoring dialog box Scoring Done Cancel Testing Protocol Analytical Property Property Name Color Section Appearance Record As Qualitative Scoring Weight Non Conformance s Scoring
218. fication or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN_RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 16 Labeling Specifications Summary Tab The Label Specifications Summary tab contains the following three sections Q Summary Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 Q Labeling Description Discussed below at Labeling Description Section on page 16 3 Q Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Labeling Description Section This section provides a place to describe the labeling requirements for this specification Figure 16 1 Labeling Description section Labeling Description Description Each container shall be dearly and properly labeled with the following information Ingredient Name Ingredient Number 33302 Manufacturer s Name and Address Processing Date or equivalent lot number or date code Net Weight Keep Frozen Ingredient Number labeling is requested but not required on containers packed with receipt of a order spot buys after the pack as long as this number is referenced on with
219. fication Management User Guide Chapter 4 Trade Specifications Regulatory Legislation Section The Regulatory Legislation section displays summary details of the regulatory documents that have been created for this trade specification Figure 4 23 Regulatory Legislation section Regulatory Legislation Filing Mame Type Status Approval 20000564 Meat Mix Salisbury Steak 15 Pork 11 19 2007 Generic Draft 20000565 Meat Mi Salisbury Steak 15 Pork 11 19 2007 USDA Approved 252545 PF 0000566 Meat Mix Salisbury Steak 15 Pork 11 19 2007 CFIA Pending Add New Key fields include Filing A system assigned number associated with the regulatory filing Approval An internal tracking number that you can enter in the Regulatory Legislative Detail page Cover Page tab Application Summary section See Application Summary Section on page 4 20 below Regulatory Legislation Detail Page Cover Page Tab On the Regulatory Legislation Detail page you can generate and document data that supplements the trade specification in order to produce regulatory filing documentation This page is unusual in that you access 1t from within another tab Supporting Documents To access the Regulatory Legislation Detail window click the hyperlinked specification name in the Regulatory Legislation section of the Supporting Documents tab A new window opens with five tabs Cover Page Tab on page 4 19 Product
220. figure 6 30 shows below The edit all feature lets you make updates as you enter quantities 6 31 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 30 Output dialog box Cancel summary Information Spec Name de step 2 Output 5090468 001 Short Name step 2 Output 5090468 001 Access Level Theoretical Specification No Access Global 0 No Access Global 0 Category No Category Available Spec 3090308 aes Issue 001 Sub Category No Category Available Sh Inactive Originator Johnson Sally Last Edit Friday July 31 2009 Composition Map Spec Name Yield Available Yield Consumed Spice Oil for Pork amp Beans 0 00000 lb 0 00000 lb 0 00000 5077414001 Vinegar Distilled White 100 Grain 0 00000 lb 0 00000 lb 0 00000 4 5079840 001 Packaging Composition Map Spec Name Yield Available Yield Consumed You can add multiple outputs from a single step Note The Yield Consumed can be less than the Yield Available when an additional output is modeled Therefore use the Composition Map to describe the quantity or percentage of each input needed to make a given output Packaging inputs can be mapped and follow the same concept as material inputs Refer to Summary Tab on page 6 50 for more details on this dialog box Adding Materials To The Outputs Grid By default when a step is created an output is also created for that step Therefore if y
221. for action according to a set of procedural rules In Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process workflows are managed using the Workflow Administration WFA application For more information on WEA please see the Workflow Management for GSM chapter in the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Administrator User Guide As a document moves through the workflow process the system generates a to do list or action items for designated team members When a specification or business object moves from one workflow status to another GSM adds an entry to the Action Items list for the current owner of that object There are three types of action items Q Specification a Signature document a Activity Accessing Your Action Items You can access the Action Items page in three different ways Q Click Applications gt GSM gt Action Items on the Application menu in the top menu bar Q Click GSM gt Action Items on the left navigation panel from the Portal Q From within GSM click Action Items on the left navigation panel Understanding the Action Items Page As shown in figure 2 5 the Action Items page contains a table with the following sortable columns Spec The number of the specification Title The number and name of the specification Type The type of action item hyperlinked to the actual object NPD Project The name of the New Product Development NPD project tied to the specification
222. formance 99 99999 accurate g 1 Objective Minimize Cost per 100g 0 01043 USD per 100g 2 Ingredient Cost al 0 01043 USD per 1009 LX gf 3 Extended Attribute Test Number lt 0 00500 gp san p 0 05314g per 100g 4 Nutrient Content Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg pe se Consumer Unit GH 1162 62162 mg per 100g per Traded Unit Add The Ingredient Cost constraint is composed of Operator Logical operator used for comparison purposes Options are e equal e lt less than or equal e gt greater than or equal Value tThe value for cost that you want to optimize to UOM The unit of measure for the cost 6 70 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Display as GSM can display this information per100g per Serving per Consumer Unit or per Traded Unit Design Conformance The current value of the constraint and an icon signifying if the constraint is met When you have finished creating the Ingredient Cost constraint click the apply changes icon 4 to save your row GSM redisplays the row showing the current value in the Design Conformance column Nutrient Content Using the Nutrient Content constraint type you can set up a condition to monitor the amount of a selected nutrient associated with your formula as shown in figure 6 74 below Figure 6 74 Nutrient Content Constraints Type Condition Design Objective Minimize Cost per 100g 0 01043 2 Ingredie
223. from the value to be stored on the specification and the serving size from the Packaging Configuration section This is an un rounded value Source The original location of the nutrition If the user provides an override the rolled up value the user must pick a source Otherwise it defaults to theoretical Comments Free text comments around the nutrition The default source for all rolled up items is Theoretical If you provide an override the source is blanked out If you delete an override value the source defaults back to Theoretical Theoretical cannot be selected from the list You cannot remove items from the grid if the items are rolled up from the child items However if you added an item to the specification or to the Output dialog box you can remove the item using the delete icon Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Click Add New to add new nutrient items GSM displays the nutrient item list in a dialog box You can then enter a value in the Overrides field for the new item Click Import to add nutrient items that are tied to existing food composition items FCL items ingredient specifications or nutrient profiles Click NSM to import nutrient items from nutrient analyses or composites Compliance Tab This tab displays the rolled up compliance information for the output and formulation specification All of the compliance items allergens
224. g material specifications in the top left corner See figure 6 37 below Figure 6 37 Packaging search page Cancel Packaging Material Specification we Search Criteria Y Load El save Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page 10 wa Spec Y Spec Name Status Supercedes 507 7465 001 Label Paper 300 406 Draft 5077540 001 Carton Paper Board Frozen Meal T 1 2589 Draft 06808 001 BL Carton Paper Board Frozen Meal 7 1 2549 Draft elle ele far Oil Logo Paper Wrap Draft l Selected Items Remove Clear Done 6 37 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process The fields in this section are carried over from the Inputs section on the Formulation tab As you add additional steps and details on this tab the Formulation tab reflects those changes This section behaves much like the Input Items section on the Formulation tab using the quick entry and edit all features Figure 6 38 Input Items section Packaging subtab Bill of Materials Packaging Packaging Material Specification Pkg Type Qty Scrap Factor Yld Step Batch USD 100qg EXT Cost df Carton Paper Board FrozenMeal 7x1 25x9 Outer 5 00000 1 00000 5 00000 lb 100 00000 50 00000 9 9909 0 00000 DX 5077540 001 db BL Carton Paper Board Frozen Meal 7x 1 25 of Inner w 0 00000 ib 1 00000 0 00000 Ib 0 00000 0 00000 o o0000 2 00000 y 5086808 001 Total 5 00000 lb 5 0000
225. g material specification It includes the following sections a a Suppliers For discussion of this commonly used section please see Suppliers Section on page 3 25 Substitute Materials Discussed below at Substitute Materials Section on page 11 7 Activities For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Specification Dependencies For discussion of this commonly used section please see Specification Dependencies Section on page 3 27 Related Documents The available related documents include only NPD activities For discussion of this commonly used section please see Related Documents Section on page 3 27 Substitute Materials Section The Substitute Materials section allows users to capture substitute materials for their raw materials Users must have the role SUBSTITUTE_MATERIAL_DEFINER to create new or modify existing raw materials Figure 11 9 Substitute Materials section Substitute Material s Substitute Material s Factor Substitute Restrictions F Yinegar Distilled 150 Grain 5077512 001 1 00000 inegar Distilled White 100 Grain 5077413 001 1 00000 Add New 11 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Key fields include Substitute Materials Substitute materials associated with this raw material Factor The factor to apply during the substitution process Substitute Restrictions Lists substitute restrictions w
226. gainst the equivalent number designed to identify the material as it is referenced by other cross reference systems Search against the specification category of a specification You can also browse for specifications using specification categories in the Category tab UDEX Classification Search against taxonomies used by UDEX Electronic Exchange A 2 Global Specification Management User Guide
227. ght Discussed below at Tare Weight Section on page 13 3 Q Cross References For discussion of this commonly used section please see Cross References Section on page 3 3 a Available UOM For discussion of this commonly used section please see Available UOM on page 3 4 a UOM Conversions For discussion of this commonly used section please see Available UOM on page 3 4 Q Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Label Information Section Tare Weight Section This section contains identifying information for the packaging label as shown in figure 13 1 below Figure 13 1 Label Information section Label Information Brand acme Food Variety Title Beef and Vegetable Dinner Description Grilled beef patty and assorted mixed vegetables id Language s Note The languages in the Language s field are different from the application languages that you can specify in the user profile These languages refer to the languages that are represented on the physical label The Tare Weight section for a packaging material or printed packaging specification is shown in the figure below Use this section to define the mass to unit count conversion In addition UOM Conversions can define tare weight Please note that the Tare Weight fields must be populated in addition to the UOM Conversion fields for this to calculate properly 13 3 Agile Product L
228. gile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 6 8 Snapshot A tool used to take a picture of a specification at a given point in time Snapshots can be retrieved at any point in time while a specification is in edit mode Snapshots are considered useful during early design when a developer is refining a formula and wants to protect data Refresh Replaces override values on the Basis with input ingredient specification values Upon clicking this button the system prompts you to confirm the global update When you select OK the system pulls the information from the input specifications for all items in your formulation specification This is only available in edit more If you do not want to perform a global refresh then use the Basis screen to select specific sections for a given input specification to refresh Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another Please note that this workflow button may control more than just the given formulation specification If the output ingredients are of the Type External Owned then the output ingredient specifications will also be impacted by this action For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a W
229. gned to capture information about a consumer unit Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Trade Specifications Figure 4 10 Packaging Attributes Consumer Unit section Pa ckaging Attributes Consumer Unit Ring pa Variable Weight Type Label Weight Label Volume Min Net Weight Max Net Weight Container Net Weight Inner Pack Inner Pack Label Text acme Delicious Beef n Veggie Dinner Length Volume i a pridih Height Product Dimensions 5 Jr Ml 75 E T s Coding MFG CODE 121223 23 Key fields include Packaging Type Click the hyperlinked field label to display a dialog box from which you can choose a packaging type from a list of available types Variable Weight Select this flag if the traded unit is best represented by a min max weight Variable Weight Type Pre packed and Loose represent how the product content is packaged Min Net Weight The least weight that is acceptable for the product Max Net Weight The greatest weight that is acceptable for the product Tare Weight This section appears when the item type is a consumer unit or a traded unit no children For more information on tare weight and gross weight see Tare Weight Section on page 11 3 Gross Weight Net weight tare weight Click the hyperlinked field label to choose Note Net weight is defined as the weight of the food content or non packaging related mater
230. grid 9 shows below Summary Formulation Process ExtData Related Specs CSS Supporting Documents References Approval Audil Inputs Step Material Oty G L Yid o Batch USD de Sugar Granulated 08 o 00000 lb e 1 00000 9 00000 lb 0 00000 0 1 5077505 001 3 dE water Carbonated 08 O 00000 lb p 1 00000 9 00000 lb 0 00000 Ou S07 7462 001 dE orange Flavor 4487 O8 o 00000 lb se 1 00000 9 00000lb 0 00000 p 5080166 001 0 00000 b 0 00000 lb 0 00000 Add New Calculate Additional Notes Regarding Adding Materials To The Inputs Grid a Changing a BOM Item To change the specification for an item in the inputs grid click the add data icon F in the Material column GSM displays the search page where you can search for and select an ingredient specification Q Using either approach the grid is placed in an edit all mode so the user can easily continue to enter data in the grid Note Auto Complete can be configured to search based on specification name specification number cross reference and by how many characters the user must enter before auto complete starts Refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Configuration Guide for more Information 6 14 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Establishing Quantities Within The Inputs Grid Once one or more materials are established the user can describe the amount of each mater
231. hat are tied to this trade item The formulation specification identified here is the one that the system uses to generate data elsewhere in the filing document Application Type Cover Page Section This section enables you to capture information necessary for generating different regulatory forms Figure 4 25 Application Type Cover Page section Generic sample Generic Cover Page Label UPC 2131 ersion Code 154 Met Weight ppm Regulatory Agency USA Reference Approval No 555 92 Reference Approval Date 3 18 2007 Regulatory Reference No 5555555 Comments trd spec Approved By Kim Turner Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Trade Specifications Figure 4 26 Application Type Cover Page section USDA sample USDA Cover Page Estabishment No ara Foreign Country A A Pane Eaki Type of Approval Requested Prior Approval Previous Approved Area ot Principal amenes Display Name oe Total Available Labeling po dj Space for Entire Package Square inches Name and Address of Firm Generate Formula Procedures Key fields include for the USDA sample include Agent Name Address Telephone No Click Agent Name the hyperlinked part of the field label to open a dialog box from which you can choose a company from a prepopulated list When you select the company the dialog box closes and the company name address and telephone number appear in the text box to the right of t
232. hat may be used You can replace each item in this section with one or more alternate items You assign to each alternate a substitution factor to denote how users doing formulation work should use the alternate item to replace the original 7 4 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 7 Menu ltem Specifications Figure 7 3 Alternate Products Menu ltems section Alternate Products Menu Items Orig Material s Substitute Factor Substitute Material s Description F 5084160 001 1 4 1 Beef Patty Australia 5080389 001 F 5080383 002 1 Bun Fresh Australia 50830386 00 1 Add New Packaging Tab The Packaging tab contains information related to the packaging of a specific menu item specification and consists of two sections e Packaging Materials e Alternate Packaging Packaging Materials Section In this section you can describe the packaging associated with this specification by associating and categorizing packaging and printed packaging specifications Figure 7 4 Packaging Materials section Packaging Materials Pkg Type Packaging Material Specification Units Scrap Factor F Outer Label Paper 300 x 406 1 00000 units 1 00000 5077465 00 1 98 inner 19 Cotruaated Case isje Add New Key fields include Pkg Type Enables you to categorize how the packaging is applied to this item for example whether the packaging is considered inner intermediate or outer packaging Alternate Packaging S
233. he document types available are Attachments Procedures URL and Rich Text For more information please see Supporting Documents Tab on page 3 12 a DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 15 5 15 6 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process References Tab The References tab includes the following sections a Activities For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Q Specification Dependencies For discussion of this commonly used section please see Specification Dependencies Section on page 3 27 Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 16 Labeling Specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding labeling specifications Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions Summary Tab Compliance Tab Related Specs Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab 0 O O OO U O Overview The Labeling Specifications page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 16 3 Compliance Tab on page 16 4 Related Specs Tab on page 16 4 Supporting Documents Tab on page 16 4 References Tab on page 16 4 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 16 4 DOODODUCO O 16 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Manag
234. he field label HACCP Process Category From the drop down list select an HACCP Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point process category Click Generate Formula Procedures to pull information from the selected formulation specification and nutrient profile to build the filing 4 21 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Product Formula Tab The Product Formula tab contains only one section Product Formula Product Formula Section In the Product Formula section you can store an enriched text rendering of the product formulation for use when generating the document Using the Generate Formula button you can automatically generate an enriched text version of the formulation information from the label composition of the attached nutrient profile This label composition will be generated when the LIO statement is pushed from the LIO profile to the nutrient profile If LIO has not been performed the label composition will not be present and the automatic rendering will not be available Figure 4 27 Product Formula section Save Save amp Close Save amp Print Cancel Cover Page Product Formula Processing Procedures Comments Attachments Product Formula Product Formula INGREDIENTS Sugar sucrose Cumin Composite Granulated Listing Extra fine 9 inch uncooked pie 100 0000 93 0233 crust Ground coves 100 0000 46512 4 22 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Trade Specificatio
235. he net weight and serving size and see the calculated tare weight for your output material 6 53 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 50 Packaging Configuration section Packaging Configuration Container Net Contents Serving Size Quantity Traded Unit e Servings eT Tare Weight 0 0000 OO ka Key fields in the Packaging Configuration section include Classification Type of food product The system uses this information when you run Label Claims Determination against the specification Container Net Contents The weight volume or share of total of the contents excluding the container Quantity Traded Unit The number of consumer units in each traded unit Reference Amount The amount customarily consumed for this type of product Approximate Yield Section In the Approximate Yield section shown in figure 6 51 below you can enter process level loss and water gain loss information and calculate the approximate yield for the formulation This section also shows you the calculated Total Solids and Density values and gives you the ability to manually override them Note Ifthe relative density of any one of the formula items in the current formulation is undefined the system cannot calculate the final density value If the total solids value of any one of the formula items in the current formulation is undefined the system cannot calculate the final and beginning percent total solids values
236. he other captures solids as shown in the figures below Figure 6 52 Approximate Yield section Approximate Yield Labeled Unit Contents Quantity Traded Unit ol Beginning Batch Size 1383 00705 lb Beginning Yo Total Solids 4 60031 9 Processing Loss Factor 1 00000 Water Gain Loss Factor 1 00000 Final Yo Total Solids 8 60031 Approximate Yield Labeled Units Batch Final Density g mL Traded Units Batch 7 00000 Final Density Override lb 1 00000 Calculate Approximate Yield Pull Relative Density Override From Batch Key fields include Labeled Unit Contents The amount per consumer unit Beginning Batch Size The batch size calculated from the specification Processing Loss Factor Estimated total loss for the process Approximate Yield The calculated yield based on the batch size processing loss and water gain loss factor Labeled Units Batch The calculated number of consumer units per batch Traded Units Batch The calculated number of traded units per batch Quantity Traded Unit The quantity of labeled units per traded unit Beginning Total Solids The percent of total solids not accounting for water gain or loss Water Gain Loss Factor Estimated gain loss factor for water Final Total Solids Percent of total solids after adjusting for water gain loss This value is used in other areas of Global Specification Management 6 55 Agile Product Lifecycle Management
237. he upper right of the page click Edit GSM reloads the page in editable mode showing the Edit Applies To button as shown in figure 17 3 above 2 Click Edit Applies To GSM displays a dialog box with two large fields Currently viewing items from and Selected Classifications as shown in figure 17 4 below Figure 17 4 The Edit Applies To dialog box Currently viewing items from Ingredient Specifications Process Specifications Packaging Material Specs Printed Packaging Specifications Trade Specifications Back Add Next gt gt selected Classifications Ingredient Specifications Dairy Products Ingredient Specifications gt Dairy Products Buttermilk Ingredient Specifications Dairy Products Buttermilk Chilled Clear Remove Done 3 In the Currently viewing items from field select one specification type Note This dialog box does not support multiple select 4 To choose from a preset list of subcategories associated with the selected specification type click Next gt gt GSM displays the list of subcategories for your selected specification type Continue this process until you arrive at the subcategory that you need 5 Click Add Your selected subcategory appears in the Selected Classifications box 17 4 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 17 Master Specifications 6 Click Done GSM closes the dialog box and adds your selections to th
238. hich are maintained in the Data Administration application Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 CHAPTER 12 Equipment Specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding equipment specifications Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions Summary Tab Compliance Tab Related Specs Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab 0 O O OO U O Overview The Equipment Specification page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 12 2 Compliance Tab on page 12 3 Related Specs Tab on page 12 3 Supporting Documents Tab on page 12 4 References Tab on page 12 4 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 12 4 DOODODUCO O 12 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons except Calculate are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are Y E Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Calculate Performs all custom data calculations This
239. hips via this tab Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 20 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 20 8 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 21 Using Change Management Features This chapter discusses the Change Management activities used to manage specifications Topics in this chapter include a Global Succession Tool a Smart Issue Tool Overview The Change Management feature provides tools for efficiently managing GSM specifications and for approving the modifications to specifications The Change Management submenu in GSM is shown in figure 21 1 below Figure 21 1 Change Management submenu Change Management FP Global Succession Component Catalog Smart Issue Two tools are available a Global Succession Tool on page 21 1 Globally replace specifications without versioning the specifications a Smart Issue Tool on page 21 8 Replace and version specifications Global Succession Tool As an Agile PLM for Process administrator from time to time you may need to elobally replace specifications without versioning the host specifications The Global Succession tool is designed to assist you in making non material changes to relevant specifications in your Agile PLM for Process database In this case non material refers to changes that do not affect the composition or labelling of the finished good Using this too
240. i 16 3 Compliance abres tiesa coa rana iras adas 16 4 Related Specs Tab OO epee nacre A A EE N 16 4 Delivered Material Packing Specifications That Rely on This Specification Section 00 0ee eee 16 4 Supportne Documents Lab 2423 25 00 cat ede caste A bie 16 4 References Tan a ala gaia ecg tacts Seite Berd eater dc a ae tr area att gece eee ee re 16 4 Approval Audit Ira labs cs ioee eae deere hana cetera A E 16 4 Chapter 17 Master Specifications OE tetera 17 1 EA A ean et edhe peat he ewe Me eee eae eh dete tee a eee 17 2 SUMMA lada Sad aie A aa hae Man ait hemes Aa 17 2 Master Description Se CUO IN usara pee alicia lada 17 2 Applies Lo Tabs SA A AAA O E delat aS tes 17 3 Specification Categories SECO lea a o 17 3 Supporting Documents labo SA O NA AA A 17 5 EEDA TD aca bie She eater a ae ea Gre ee reel E E a ie Ete a eee ees 17 5 References TAD ir EAE NE ee cuhebsouee neem E E Ea E 17 5 Approval aA NAE e A E A E dada A ee eee es 17 5 xiii Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Chapter 18 LIO Profiles INE WE ai a Pase Level BUNCHONS adan Summary labor vette ot NEREA END TAANOA LUO Profile Secon once iach A Output Material Selection Section o oooo Nutrient Profile Sections diaria caia CO Construcion abarrotes NaCUVEROWS curras rr skeen ao Usine the LO Meana rad cie Declaration Options and Actions o oooooomom o Right Ment Acoso dai todas A eke edo e eu uae te ete ws Retro
241. i aa 7 10 Supportins Documents Lab A A A A a esl ce 7 11 Nutricarerolle ecos cn 7 11 Rerne o td sado tias add al poa aia sed 7 11 APpprovallAUd Haddad AA AA ARAS EAN 7 11 Chapter 8 Nutrient Profiles ON sita iiO A Aarne eae onan teenie ees 8 1 Page evel P UNCHON aid AA AS A ES 8 2 SD sr ts Sets A a es dae pode lo dea Mae eaten 8 2 Weicht Volume Servine Information SECO dd Es 8 3 Meredientastatements Sections eri ia oe bee eats aa 8 4 Nutrition Panel labo SAA AE Ae 8 4 Kamienne rone ec Mera oca 8 4 abris e e ad ini a ed 8 10 abel Compositi n Tadeo ultrieeisio oda Bhi ee eee ae eee adas Hui dee 8 13 PEDI Lab acta ate at Sasi Sialic an added Med a adtoie dig Giahs Gaia tee aie ee A Stata a Mee eee 9 ieee eee de aed eae 8 13 Related Specs a Des a torent anon AS AENA ARA hares O 8 13 supportins Documents labia sosa Esa elsa aia 8 14 References Taba AS A AS Tease 8 14 Approval Addie tral aaa dis SR es 8 14 Chapter 9 Product Specifications ONE WA AA A A Ge ND A Oia 9 1 Pace evel Fun O nr ia do aes 9 2 o A O O 9 3 Product AtB ECHO cara e aia ce 9 3 Desion AttriDUtes Secos iaa AR SA AA ES 9 3 FORMULATION Tae ia dar db dad ol obte 9 4 Ingredient Statements echo AS SAA 9 4 Compliance Lab ASS TES ASA de Bhs ea Bie on 9 4 Related Specs Tabu idas beba ica ideados 9 5 Global Regional Standard SECON iria a A 9 5 Alternate standards SECO shee ee Seka ce ee nen eee Aan a eee eae ee 9 5 Packing Configurations specifications Section ir a A RA
242. ial 4 9 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Packaging Attributes Traded Unit Section 4 10 As with consumer units depending on the item type of the specification different packaging attributes can appear in this section This section appears when the item type is a traded unit The attributes below are designed to capture information that help describe a traded unit such as case and pallet Information The Net Weight calculations for case and pallet on a traded unit trade specification use the net weight of the lower level item and the net weight of the case as packaging is accounted for in the tare weight value The Tare Weight calculation takes into account packaging at all levels of the hierarchy Ifthe user calculates the tare weight of the lowest level no child trade items consumer unit trade specification GSM adds the packaging associated directly with the consumer unit and any packaging associated with the formulation specification that is linked directly to the consumer unit trade specification The inclusion of the packaging associated with the formulation specification is dependent on a configuration The Gross Weight calculation has been modified so that 1t adds the net weight and the tare weight of the specification Users can select the UOM prior to calculating This allows them to select the final UOM instead of returning in the default UOM Figure 4 11 Packaging Attributes Traded Unit section
243. ial for each row Figure 6 10 Defining amounts of material Summary Formulation Process Ext Data Related Specs C55 Supporting Documents References Approval Audit Trai Inputs Step 1 Material Sugar Granulated SO7 7505 0014 Water Carbonated S07 7462 0014 Orange Flavor 4437 5080166 001 Oty G L Yid Batch USD 100g EXT Cost La 4 30 00000 lb 1 00000 50 00000 Ib alta 0 000001 0 00000 w C1 4 S25 00000 lb 0 95000 8s 75000lb 81 74707 0 00000 0 00000 w C1 A o 125 00000 lb 1 00000 125 00000 lb 13 03781 0 00000 0 00000 w 1000 00000 Ib 356 75000 1b 100 00000 0 00000 Material Quantity Fields Defined Quantity The amount of material gathered and placed into the manufacturing process A total field is presented as the final row of this column G L Gain Loss A factor used to describe the amount of material either gained or lost during a manufacturing process As an example when cookie dough is placed in a bowl some amount sticks to the bowl and is lost Yield The amount of material contributing to the output item s Quantity G L Yield A total field is presented as the final row of this column Percent Batch The percent yielded for a given material as compared to the total yield Entering Material Quantity Data Using BOM Calculation Paths When the formulation specification is in edit mode the user is limited to enter data based on predefined BOM calculation paths The paths are descri
244. iance F amp C bundle has been installed Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing an ingredient specification please see Printing Other Specifications on page 2 19 Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN_RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 10 Summary Tab Ingredient Specifications The Ingredient Specification Summary tab contains the following sections a Summary Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 Ingredient Attributes Discussed below at Ingredient Attributes Section on page
245. icals Overrides Specification r Add New L Ext Data Tab This tab includes the rolled up custom data information for the output and formulation specification Distinct custom data tagged with the Is Design Attribute tag in ADMN which are present on formula items are included Two sections are included Extended Attributes and Custom Sections Figure 6 60 Output dialog Ext Data tab Extended Attributes Item Theoreticals Overrides Specification Comments Method khe Brix 0 530864197530864 Brix 0 530864197530864 Brix allownull w OOO A target 0 530864197530864 target target 0 530864197530864 slownull pe min 0 530364197530364 at min 0 530364197530864 max 0 530864197530864 min max 0 530364197530864 aa w Test Number 82 8353909465021 g Do o ol 82 8353909465021 g alownul B o Add New Custom Sections Add Section Remove section 6 62 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Note When rolling up distinct extended attributes added to the Output dialog box only the security classification on the extended attribute will be used The security classification on the custom section where the extended attribute may have existed on the raw material will be ignored Extended Attributes Section In the Extended Attributes section you can select from a list a number of extended attributes related to the formulation
246. ide Creating a Temporary Signature Authority To create a new signature authority click Create New at the upper right of the page Figure 2 14 below shows the fields on this page Figure 2 14 Temporary Signature Authority fields Current Owner Joe Foodscientist Temporary Owner Allen Aynes Start Date Friday July 03 2009 End Date Friday July 03 2009 Status 5 Enabled Disabled Temporary Owner You can designate temporary signature authority by clicking the Temporary Owner link GSM displays the user selection dialog box which you can use to search for the desired user Selecting the user name closes the dialog box and populates the Temporary Owner field Start Date and End Date These fields represent when the temporary signature authority begins and ends To change the dates listed click the date GSM displays a calendar popup window that you can use to select new dates Status Using this field you can enable and disable the signature authority Editing an Existing Temporary Signature Authority You can edit existing signature authorities that you have created Search and select the signature authority to edit and click Edit at the upper right of the page When done editing click Save Close Document Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Approval Audit Trail Tab All workflow enabled specifications contain an Approval Audit Trail tab This tab contains the
247. ies section unless you select Reference this Activity on the above Specifications Figure 20 4 Related Items section Related Items Type Description Status Comments Ingredient Beans Peas White Navy Dr C55 Draft Specifications 50774158 001 Add New Reference this Activity on the above Specifications d 20 6 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 20 Activities Supporting Documents Tab Ext Data Tab References Tab The Supporting Documents tab contains the following sections Q Supporting Documents The document types available are attachments procedures URL and rich text For more information please see Attachments Procedures Document Type on page 3 14 and Rich Text Document Type on page 3 16 a DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 The Ext Data tab can contain an Extended Attributes section one or more custom sections or it can be empty Q Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 Q Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 The Reference tab presents a list of primary and related activity relationships Similar to other specification types activities can participate in these relationships with other activities Therefore a user can nest activities and view the relations
248. ifecycle Management for Process Figure 13 2 Tare Weight section Tare Weight Reference Weight From within a trade specification Packaging Attributes section click the hyperlinked Tare Weight field label to have GSM calculate the appropriate tare weight as shown in the figure below If you have supplied the net weight GSM can also calculate the gross weight of the product net weight tare weight Figure 13 3 Portion of a trade specification Packing Attributes section showing the hyperlinked Tare Weight field label Packaging Attributes Consumer Unit Packaging Type Ring Yariable Weight O Label Weight tel a Label Yolume 0o24 ma Container Net Weight kg Ml Tare Weight Gross Weight oe w Inner Pack Inner Pack Label Text acre Delicious BBO Beef Length Maitn Product Dimensions PP lin lo Compliance Tab The Compliance tab consists of two sections a Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 a Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 Related Specs Tab The Related Specs tab contains the following sections Q Parent Packaging Material Discussed below at Parent Packaging Material Section on page 13 5 Q Master Specification For discussion of this field please see Master Specifications Section on page 3 9 13 4 Global
249. ification the target and generating a new issue based on the target specification s lineage Specification Number and Issue Number This feature is valuable when designers developers create many different variations of a potential product yet want to conform to a specific issue number Q Compare Allows users to compare the input bill of materials between two or more formulation specifications or snapshots In addition using the Formula Basis users can choose to compare based on the following options e Quantity Recursive 100 Provides items from the exploded bill of materials and determines percentage based on the input quantity e Yield Recursive 100 Provides items from the exploded bill of materials and determines percentage based on the yielded quantity e Quantity Top Level Only Provides items from the selected specifications only and determines percentage based on the input quantity e Yield Top Level Only Provides items from the selected specifications only and determines percentage based on the yielded quantity Print Opens dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats Act Create a primary activity or an additional workflow object to manage parallel work streams associated with this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification 6 7 A
250. ification that is re versioned will also be re versioned The new version of the nutrient profile will be attached to the new revision of the specification and the old version will be removed Only Nutrient Profiles that are in a workflow step with a system tag of is Approved will be versioned The new version of the nutrient profile that was marked as Active will become the active profile on the new specification Click Issue to perform the smart issue and the status is changed to executing At this point the fields become read only When the smart issue request reaches either a Failed or Complete status an email is sent to the owner s and issuer of the request Once the smart issue request is in either a Failed or Complete state the Results tab will be available Verifying the Smart Issue Agile PLM for Process displays the Results tab upon completion of the smart issue request This page shows two grids one for the original hierarchies and one Figure 21 28 Results tab displaying the newly issued hierarchies as figure 21 28 shows below smi 0000032 v60rc7 Replace Product on Menu Completed Summary Details Results Audit Copy UA A A A MIOS A smart Issue Results Results Per Page Export Original Specs Spec ke 5089587 001 1 New Specs Spec E MA 5089587 002 1 21 22 Spec Name Type Status Business Unit Category Smart Issue Oracle menu Dr
251. ight be used for a barrel of vegetable oil that is produced on your company s behalf Traded Unit no children This type would represent a specification that is both the orderable unit and the consumer unit all in one It does not have any children linked to it GTIN UPC EAN This field is not visible for Consumer Unit Not for Resale trade items PLU Description This field is not visible for Consumer Unit Not for Resale trade items POS Description This field is not visible for Consumer Unit Not for Resale trade items Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Trade Specifications Most other specifications are static in nature but the trade item is dynamic The trade item specification can display different attributes fields or sections based on the item type selected Next Lower Level ltems Section In this section you can capture the next lower level in the trade item hierarchy along with quantity information Figure 4 3 Next Lower Level Items section Next Lower Level Items Spec Spec Name GTIN UPC EAN Quantity 5077539 001 BBO Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz 00000000000123 1 5077644 001 BBQ Beef Dinner Portion 11 oz for Syndication 1234567 8909886 1 5061380 001 BBQ Beef and Vegetable Dinner 12 oz 11111112272771 1 gf 5082225 001 BBQ Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz 2 00000000000123 1 Add New Note This section does not appear when the item type is a T
252. ight corner of the search page as shown in figure 22 1 below Figure 22 1 Create New button Component Catalog Search Criteria _ more criteria Load El Save Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page As shown in figure 22 2 below the Catalog Term page contains six sections of data e Catalog Term e Aliases e LIO Disclosures e LIO Groupings e Reconstitution Equivalency e Approved Usages 22 2 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 22 Component Catalog Figure 22 2 Catalog Term sections a Catalog Term Component Catalog Modified Food Starch Term 1000386 SpecialNotes Created By Johnson Sally Alias es Alias 2 Modified Corn Starch QU sen LIO Disclosure s Disclosure Restrictions Priority Constraints Modified Food Starch USDA Reg gt 0 00000 Composition Special Notes Change Order LIO Grouping s Grouping Method Restrictions Priority Constraints Vegetable List ix y FDA Southern Europe 3 gt 0 02000 Total Solids white powdery USA lt 90 00000 Total Solids gt 0 00340 Composition Starches List Oc y USDA Reg gt 0 00000 Composition x Add New Change Order Reconstitution Equivalency Declare As Target o Factor Comments Liquid Starch 75 Water Ed va 0 00324 from 9928374 48804 x S Water Mw Approved Usages Business Unit s Countries Add New 22 3 Agile Product Lifecyc
253. ing Protocols Attachments Breakdown UOO O O Supporting Documents Section Overview The Supporting Documents section enables you to add unique documents to the specification You can add the following document types Attachments Procedures URL Rich Text Product Facts Sheet Nutrient Composition UOO O O Note The Supporting Documents section is unique to each specification type Not all document types can be found on all specification types Creating a Supporting Document The specification needs to be in edit mode before you can add a supporting document to it To create a supporting document 1 Click Edit at the upper right corner of the page The page reloads with several hyperlinks displayed below the table in the Supporting Documents section 2 From the links below the supporting documents table click the type of document to create 3 12 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Figure 3 13 Supporting Documents section Ingredient Specification example Supporting Documents Supporting Documents for this Specification Security Classification J Nutrient Composition Attachments Procedures Attachments Procedures Attachments Contextual Attachments Procedures URL Rich Text View Thumbnans Managing Supporting Documents To view a supporting document click the hyperlinked document name You can only edit supporting documents when the specification is in edit mo
254. ing data in the search terms field is through use of the subsearch search within search dialog box This dialog box enables you to do a mini search with selected criteria in order to populate a large text field that you can then manually edit before sending its contents into the search terms field of the main search form The fields displayed in the subsearch vary based on context and there are a large number of possible combinations There are three basic steps to using the subsearch or search within search tool 1 Search for your criteria using the search form at the top 2 Select one or more hyperlinked search results which then appear in the Selected Items box 3 Click Done to close the dialog box and send the contents of the Selected Items box to the search terms field of the main search window See figure 1 9 for an illustration of how to use the subsearch tool Figure 1 9 Using the subsearch too Printed Packaging Specification Cancel lt q 1 Performa preliminary search using the search Spec Name mM Name bil 3 form at the top more criteria Load A Save Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page Spec 5077541 001 5077542001 5077609 001 5030409 001 Spec Name Status Supercedes Carton Beef w BBO Sauce Draft Review Corrugat e Beefw BBO Sauce Draft Review PROMO CARTON 2 Click the links of t Review printed packaging eg the search results that your p
255. inting Other Specifications Generally all specifications other than trade specifications use the same print function The printing dialog box for these specifications contains two sections e Documentation Format e Specification Listing Documentation Format The specification format section shown in figure 2 26 contains fields that directly affect the format of the printed output Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 2 26 Specifications Format dialog box Print Close Documentation Format Business Unit North America Please select the business unit on behalf of which you would like Paper Size Us letter Document Control Controlled Copy 2 Uncontrolled Copy Print Template Default v Include Activity Summary F Key fields include Business Unit Controls which master specifications are available for printing Changing this value changes the master specification listing in the Specification Listing section Paper Size Controls the page size Document Control Dictates which watermark to display CONTROLLED COPY or UNCONTROLLED COPY Print Template If enabled this field lists all format options for the specification type Include Activity Summary Attach a summarized printout of each activity that is attached to the specification See page 2 14 for more information on this option Specification Listing The specification listing section contains a list of all
256. ion Active document types available are Attachments Procedures URL and Rich Text For discussion of this commonly used section please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab 8 14 The References tab consists of the following sections Q Activities section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Q Related Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see Related Documents Section on page 3 27 For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 9 Product Specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding product specifications Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions Summary Tab Formulation Tab Compliance Tab Related Specs Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab Doo oO UO DO O O Overview The Product Specification page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 9 3 Formulation Tab on page 9 4 Compliance Tab on page 9 4 Related Specs Tab on page 9 5 Supporting Documents Tab on page 9 6 References Tab on page 9 6 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 9 6 ODOoUooOCOUO O 9 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of but
257. ions Discussed below at Equipment Specifications Section on page 11 6 Q Master Specifications For discussion of this field please see Master Specifications Section on page 3 9 Sub Components Section The Sub Components section contains any packaging material specifications that are subcomponents of this specification You can categorize each subcomponent based on packaging type for example inner outer and intermediate Additionally you can declare the quantity of each subcomponent Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 11 6 Sub Components section Sub Components Pkg Type Packaging Material Specification Quantity 2 Intermediate Corrugated Case 45 g 5077482001 2 Intermediate Packaging Spec 1550 g 5080410 001 Intermediate Carton Paper Board Frozen Meal 7 x 1 25 9 100 g 5077540 001 Add New Sub Components Packing Configuration Specifications Section The Packing Configuration Specifications section contains the packing configuration specifications associated with the packaging material specification In this section you can describe the multiple ways in which your material can be delivered for instance case packaging variants Figure 11 7 Packing Configuration Specifications section Packing Configuration Specifications Spec Spec Name Equivalent Comments F 5085559 001 Related Packing Configuration 457830982 P 5077480 001 Case Pack 60 lbs Meat
258. it Category Issued F 5077539 BBQ Beef and Vegetable Dinner 123123 trd Draft CPI North Meat Poultry and Yes 002 11 oz cu America Game 1 All hierarchies are listed using the top level specification to represent the hierarchy For any hierarchy listed you can click on the hierarchy investigation icon to display a popup window listing all specifications in the hierarchy that will be issued Take notice of the Issued column which will state whether the specification will be issued or not based on the get latest revision setting on the specification 21 20 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 21 Using Change Management Features 5 Click the checkbox next to the hierarchies to issue and then click Done The dialog box closes and selected specifications appear in the Smart Issue Action List The Action List represents all of the hierarchies that will be issued when the Issue button is selected You can now perform the smart issue as described in Exporting the Affected Specifications on page 21 21 Exporting the Affected Specifications You can export a listing of ALL specifications affected top level and the lower specifications related to each The resulting spreadsheet includes the following columns Spec Spec Name Equivalent Type Status Issued Business Unit Category Top Level Parent Level and specification Pkid The Export button is available in Read and Edit mode The export includes all affecte
259. k red bar over amp under X X Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process XX Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 1 Introduction This chapter presents an overview of Global Specification Management and describes a few basic features Topics in this chapter include a The Global Specification Management Application a Touch Points with Other Applications a Finding Agile Data The Global Specification Management Application Overview Global Specifications Management GSM provides your company with a collaborative business process for managing data creation localization taxonomy and workflow for all levels included in the product genealogy across the enterprise and with value chain partners GSM is the solution e In which your company s products are created and modified e From which the product data are syndicated to other enterprise systems GSM enables your company to create one version of the truth of your entire product record from finished products and manufacturing processes to your ingredients and packaging materials The entire product genealogy is connected enabling your company to build an integrated view of the interrelationships among all specifications GSM is a critical part of the larger Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process suite For general information about the Agile PLM for Process suite and available solution packages please see the Agile Product Lifecy
260. l you can request tailor approve and execute on a scheduled basis mass changes affecting any number of product hierarchies You can tailor the scope of target specifications affected specifications as required Mass changes using this tool are not an all or nothing proposition they are a kind of find and replace function Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Caution Because this tool enables such sweeping changes typically only an administrator with the highest security level will have access to it Two roles are associated with the Global Succession tool SUCCESSION_REQUEST_EDITOR Allows the user to edit and run global succession requests SUCCESSION_REQUEST_READER Allows the ability to search and view global succession requests Table 21 1 Supported changes Specification to Replace Host Specification Ingredient specification Formulation Inputs and Alternate Inputs Ingredient specification Trade Specifications Master specification Equipment Formulation Ingredient Menu Item Packaging Material Printed Packaging Product and Trade specifications Menu Item specification Menu Item specification Packaging Material specification Formulation Inputs and Alternate Inputs Packaging Material specification Trade Packaging Materials and Alternate Packaging Materials Printed Packaging specification Formulation Inputs and Alternate Inputs Printed Packaging specification Trade Packaging Materials
261. l Tab os Delivered Material Packing Specifications Page Level PunctiOns sic a A e SUMMA las dls abia arado Packing Description Section sirio a aaa Compliance Tabo rata ii dae ees Environmental Waste Section o ooooooooommommo m Related Specs Ta Aaa Labeling Specifications Section 0 cece eee eee eee supporting Documents Taba er n Reterences daran ai Approval Audit Trail TabD a ii Global Specification Management User Guide Contents Chapter 15 Packing Configuration Specifications ONES RA AA AAA O E 15 1 Pase Level BUNCHONS da da 15 2 Summa aci iS E a eho ear ae dos it 15 2 Packing Descriplomoccion ta ta SA A AA 15 2 Paca lados ita 15 3 PackimoAttribute imet Pack Seconds ade 15 3 Packie Attribute Master Case Seco eiii td ERREA 15 3 Related opecs labs ta a a aa 15 4 Inner Delivered Packing Specifications SeCliON st DA OEN 15 4 Intermediate Delivered Material Packing Specifications Section 00 cece ccc eee eee een coo 15 5 Outer Delivered Material Packing Specification Section 0 cece cece ee ence rererere 15 5 Supportin Documents Labi isis aa cease tae ots 15 5 References Ta A AS IA eons A cn teees 15 6 APproval Audi Mi PaO creer eee ree tas te eet he ree erste case woh ceed ee ake hg Gries fe cian ee eR tc eee ee eee 15 6 Chapter 16 Labeling Specifications ONCE AA rocas 16 1 Pages eve PUNCHONS AE EEE AAA 16 2 Sun mada a E E A ES 16 3 Labeling Description Section adan it SN td ai
262. laims that may not be made for the product The Comments column also includes error information Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 8 Nutrient Profiles Figure 8 8 Label Claim Determination dialog box Label Claim Determination Close Claims Determination Comparative Reference Product Comparitive Reference Product Reference Product AAA Reference Amount 0 00000 Classification yo active e Mutrient Composition Mubrient Calories pal Total Fat Ww Saturated Fat wo Trans Fatty Acid Cholesterol Tm Sodium Ta Dietary Fiber Ww UE Ww Sugars Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 8 9 Label Claim Determination Claims Determination tab Claims Determination Comparative Reference Product Label Claim Authority Label Claim Authority Us FDA Nutrient Claims 2005 Display Label Claims Applicable Claims Label Claim Type of Claim Yes No Comments Calculations Lite or Light w Total Fat disclosure No mg Sodium per RACC Meals and main dishes Salt Free must meet criterion fo mg Sodium per serving Sodium Free Less than 5 mg per labeled serving Sodium Salt Free Yes ATTENTION Lists no ingredient that contains sodium chloride or generally understood to contain sodium except if the ingredient listed in the ingredient statement has an asterisk that refers to footnote e g adds a trivial amount of sodium
263. last update Note Date fields vary based on specification type Cross References Section The Cross References section contains the list of cross reference numbers for the specification as stored in external systems You can use the equivalent value as a search criteria and it can display in specification search results Figure 3 2 Cross References section Cross References AI a A E Externally System Name System ID Equivalent a F SAP System USSAP 50 1004080044 e P Oracle System USORACLE 087654371 A x BPCS System USBPCS Add New Key fields include System ID A code that identifies an external database Agile PLM for Process obtains this code from the external system Equivalent The equivalent number designed to identify the material as it is referenced by other cross reference systems 3 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Available UOM UOM Conversions 3 4 Externally Managed An indication of whether this data is managed externally or within Agile PLM for Process If the data is managed externally you cannot modify the equivalent number from within Agile PLM for Process Notice that there is no edit icon for the externally managed system shown above If the cross referenced database is managed from within Agile PLM for Process you can modify the equivalent value in the Equivalent field in this table Note Only an Agile administrator can turn the Externally Managed flag o
264. lation Deal Pat oe ae ae eee ees 4 19 Cover Page lab tien paiva cere aaa Goto Rose 4 19 Appia Ons Aminar SeCHON eds 62 NATA ens A eae ecaae aan 4 20 Application ype Cover Page Seco AA alah dee a a 4 20 Product FOUN Ad Ds EIA ARA ESA ATAR ER AAA ENGIN 4 22 Product Formula SECO A AAA AA AA 4 22 Procesom Procedures LD actas IIS Aa cenit 4 23 Comments labia A AA EA Ss 4 23 Acc E EE E Adidas 4 24 Related Specilications Secon errnit dete a a aa E aes 4 24 Attachments Se LO MN eg 86 acne ed AE Goch fd RTE AA AO EIA EA 4 24 ROME FONCES TaD DE A E E A a a E Reta es 4 25 APproval Aa ra e e a wee ent glean TE E E A E ETN EA ENAA eoe 4 25 Chapter 5 Process Specifications Process Specification Integration into Formulation Specification Feature 0 cee cee eee eee eee ees 5 1 Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications OV ELVIS Wee xo ae eae eas eee A A el ree Gralla aan ue Bae od 6 1 Conceptsand Delitos unicas tadas biie ia 6 2 US a A A A A do 6 2 Output es OD Dali 6 3 Theoretical Ingredient Verses Output InsrediOta a 6 4 Desienable Workiow tabs std sodio prats 6 4 Remaimine Concepts and DeM HOS srr ine ernennen rer EEE eE NESE A N A a EEA 6 5 Page evel PUNCHONS aana a iio 6 6 SUMMA lara sd RO RA ad oso cdas 6 9 Pormulati n Atm DUles ECO a a a E a a E E E A bb EA O eects 6 9 Facility miorina om oc CUNA AA SS AA AI 6 10 Formulation Tab sar A ASES bi 6 10 MPU OCCO O RAR 6 11 Adding Materials Lo The lnputs Grd A A en AAA 6 11
265. le Management for Process Catalog Term Section The Catalog Term section shown in figure 22 3 below defines the primary name of the term that you are defining Figure 22 3 Catalog Term section Catalog Term Component Catalog Modified Food Starch Term 1000386 Special Notes Created By Johnson Sally The Catalog Term section contains the following fields Component Catalog The name of the term being defined required Term A system defined number associated to this term e Special Notes User defined notes for the term e Created By The user who created the term Once you have completed the term name continue to the Aliases section Aliases Section The Alias section defines the secondary name or names for the term that you are defining Figure 22 4 Aliases section Alias es Alias Modified Corn Starch YU a Starch Y A The Aliases section contains the following field Alias Other names that you want to be treated similarly from a labeling perspective Once you have entered all of the aliases for a given term continue to the LIO Disclosure section 22 4 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 22 Component Catalog LIO Disclosure Section The LIO Disclosure section defines the terms that may be used contextually to describe the component catalog term that is being created during the LIO process To add a new disclosure click Add New under the Disclosures secti
266. le Product Lifecycle Management for Process 2 From the Select Specification Type drop down list select the type of specification you are going to supersede 3 Click the Spec To Supersede hyperlink to display a search form in a dialog box 4 Use that search form to locate the specification you are going to replace and click that specification in the search results list see figure 21 4 below Figure 21 4 Spec to Supersede search results Cancel search Criteria Spec Name y Bo more criteria Y Load H Save Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page 10 Spec Spec Name Status Supercedes S077414 001 Spice Oil for Pork amp Beans Draft 012433 5077417 001 Tomato Paste Cold Break 36 N T 5 5 Draft 018078 09 21 2001 5077418 001 Beans Peas White Na D CSS Draft 5077415001 5077419003 BBO Sauce Dry Mix inactive archived Extended Draft 5077419 001 Attributes 5077419 004 BBO Sauce Dry Pix Draft 5077419 001 5077419 005 BBO Sauce Dry Mir Draft 5077419 004 5077422001 Brown Sugar Light GO Review 34461 07 19 1994 5077425 001 Oil Soybean Refined Bleached Deodorized Admin 34590 Review 05 30 1997 5077433 001 Beef Seasoned Cooked Strips amp Binder Product Draft 32738 5077433 002 Beef Seasoned Cooked Strips amp Binder Product Admin 5077433 00 1 Review The search box closes and your selection displays in the Select Specification Type dialog box The New Specification field
267. lication NSM 1 At the upper right of the page click Edit The Nutrient Profile page reloads in edit mode in which the Label Claims button is gone and three new buttons are present Add New Import e NSM 8 6 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 8 Nutrient Profiles Each row in the Nutrient Profile table is now editable 2 Click NSM The Import Nutrient Items search page appears 3 Select Nutrient Analysis or Nutrient Composites in the drop down list near the top of the page enter search criteria and click Search A Search Results section appears with a table of search results 4 Click a hyperlinked analysis number or composite number in the first column of the search results table The Compare Nutrition dialog box opens displaying the nutrient information and the difference between what you Selected and the current nutrient profile as shown in figure 8 5 below Figure 8 5 Compare Nutrition dialog box 2 Windows Internet Explorer El jun E Compare Nutrition Close sr beled ee Specification Change Per Accept Nutrient Per 100g Per 100g 1009 Value s Calories 250 00000 kcal 135 44000 kcal 114 56000 kcal 84 58 o Yo Change Energy kJ 150 00000 kJ Protein 45 00000 q Carbohydrates 5 00000 g Thiamin Bi 4 00000 mg Carotene 10 00000 pg Alcohol 5 00000 g Select All Deselect All Import Nutrient Items 5 Select the items to import and click Import Nutrient Items GSM imports the selected
268. liers section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Suppliers Section on page 3 25 Q Specification Dependencies For discussion of this commonly used section please see Specification Dependencies Section on page 3 27 Q Activities section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Q Related Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see Related Documents Section on page 3 27 Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 9 6 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 10 Ingredient Specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding ingredient specifications Topics in this chapter include Summary Tab Formulation Tab Compliance Tab Related Specs Tab CSS Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab Doo oO O O O O Overview The Ingredient Specification page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 10 3 Formulation Tab on page 10 5 Compliance Tab on page 10 6 Related Specs Tab on page 10 6 CSS Tab on page 10 7 Supporting Documents Tab on page 10 8 References Tab on page 10 8 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 10 9 DOODODUOUODLDO O O 10 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a r
269. lities regarding trade specifications Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions summary Tab Packaging Tab Compliance Tab Related Specs Tab CSS Tab Supporting Documents Tab Regulatory Legislation Detail Page References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab DO O ODO O vo oO UO ODODO OI Overview The Trade Specification page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 4 3 Packaging Tab on page 4 8 Compliance Tab on page 4 13 Related Specs Tab on page 4 17 CSS Tab on page 4 17 Supporting Documents Tab on page 4 18 Regulatory Legislation Detail Page on page 4 19 References Tab on page 4 25 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 4 25 DO DO OODOUODOLDO O 4 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons except Calculate are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are Y E 4 2 Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process Installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Calculate Performs all custom data calculations This button is displayed when the specification is in edit mode Calculation also happens when you save
270. lobal Specification Management User Guide Chapter 15 Packing Configuration Specifications Intermediate Delivered Material Packing Specifications Section In this section you can associate this packing configuration specification with one or more delivered material packing specifications to describe the intermediate packing Figure 15 5 Intermediate Delivered Material Packing Specifications section Intermediate Delivered Material Packing Specification Spec Spec Name Labeling Spec s F 5077481 001 Corrugated Case Pack with Poly Liner 5082311 001 5084426 001 5085011 001 50853255001 5083722 001 Add New The associated labeling specification numbers display automatically based on their relationship with the delivered material packing specifications Outer Delivered Material Packing Specification Section In this section you can associate this packing configuration specification with one or more delivered material packing specifications to describe the outer packing Figure 15 6 Outer Delivered Material Packing Specifications section Outer Delivered Material Packing Specifications Spec Spec Name Labeling Spec s F 5077514 001 Wax Lined Boxes 5077515001 Add New The associated labeling specification numbers display automatically based on their relationship with the delivered material packing specifications Supporting Documents Tab The Supporting Documents tab contains two sections Q Supporting Documents T
271. log box is used to describe nutrition compliance and other rolled up data as described in Output dialog box on page 6 49 through page 6 62 e Drop down arrow This arrow represents an extensibility point that has been leveraged to help BOM calculations treat this output By default the outputs are variable and should adjust linearly to the formula For example 2 outputs each consume a half Add two more and all four outputs receive 25 By choosing Fixed the specified quantity to the output will remain fixed regardless of adjustments made to the input BOM Qty Total amount of inputs for that output This field is not shown for Internal types because the quantity associated with the material is accounted for in the final output Process G L Factor applied to the initial quantity to account for loss Water G L Factor applied if during processing water is lost or gained Yld Final output quantity after all loss has been accounted for Step Percentage of the step that this output makes EXT Cost Calculated cost for the output quantity The following column displays at the end of the Output Items grid Delete Click the delete icon to delete the output item GSM displays confirmation dialog box Click OK to delete the item The item is removed from the grid The following button is found at the bottom of the Output Items grid Add New Click to add a new output GSM displays the Output dialog box as
272. lor Mustard Flour Garlic Granulated Onion Paprika WATER SUGAR Compliance Rollup Complies With Allergens known to contain Intolerances known to contain Additives known to contain Allergens may contain Intolerances may contain Additives may contain Allergens does NOT contain Intolerances does NOT contain Additives does NOT contain Acacia Gumi Spec My Burger 50798 15 002 Spec Spec Max 1009 Max 1009 Source Comments Source Comments To change the source specifications of the nutrient rollup data 1 Select only the desired menu items and products in the tables on the left You can also add menu items or products by selecting Add New 2 Click the Total link at the top right of the page to recalculate the rollup data Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Label Claims 8 10 Using the label claims determination feature you can interrogate a product for claims applicability based on a centralized rule base segregated by label claims authority Potential and Actual label claims are stored on the trade specification Label claim determination from the nutrient profile is for evaluation purposes only You can only view label claims when the specification is in read mode To view label claims 1 Click the Nutrition Panel tab 2 Click Label Claims 3 Some claims require another product to compare to such as Low Fat The system can evaluate comparative claims i
273. me given to the ingredient specification as well as the specification number Select the add data icon P to reference an existing ingredient specification When a specification is referenced this field displays a read only view of the specification name 6 50 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Short Name Short name of the output item By default the system automatically fills in this field with Step X Output Spec where X is the number of the step and Spec represents the system assigned number given to the output item This field can be edited by the user and when the output is marked as external 1t will be the short name of the ingredient specification When a specification is referenced this field displays a read only view of the referenced specification short name Output Type Captures whether the output is Internal External or Referenced and if it is classified as product by product or waste Access Level Used by object level contextual security to help determine if the user has access to the data on the output item and ingredient specification This grid displays two values a Theoretical Access Level This value is rolled up from the access level of the ingredient specifications used to create it Theoretical access level will always roll up using the highest available access level For example if Spec A 100 Spec B 400 and Spec C 300 were used to
274. ment Clicking the link launches a URL popup These URLs will not be available through the print model eQ or Supplier Portal Key fields include Title Name for the web page link URL Address for the URL 3 15 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 3 16 Rich Text Document Type Figure 3 17 Rich Text dialog box Rich Text CA EJ Title hich Text Document Rich Text This is an example of rich text The rich text document type is a way to create a formatted attachment to the specification that can be printed in line with the printed specification The rich text document includes a title and an enriched textual entry To add rich text 1 Click the Rich Text label link The rich text dialog box opens Figure 3 18 Rich text label link dialog box Done Close I O E E B J U x ABE E gt ES a H Y FontSizeMenu Font Foreground Color Menu Font Foreground Font Foreground Color Menu Menu This is an example of rich text Using the rich text dialog box you can apply simple formatting boldface font color font size bullets numbering and so on Product Fact Sheets Note Product Fact sheets are a configurable feature and by default are configured off For more information refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Configuration Guide Nutrient Composition Select Nutrient Composition as a supporting document to create a new a nutrient composition document and
275. more of total Fat For Saturated Fat Free Individual foods 20 mg or less per reference amount Cand per 50 q of Food if reference amount is small Also Cholesterol claims are only alowed when Food Calculations ls g Saturated Fat per RACC 5 3910891 Calories From Saturated Fat 4 ma Cholesterol per RACC 5 g Saturated Fat per RACC 7 9 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Related Specs Tab The Related Specs tab contains the following sections a Global Regional Standard Discussed below at Global Regional Standard Section on page 7 10 a Alternate Standards Discussed below at Alternate Standards Section on page 7 10 Q Master Specifications For discussion of this commonly used field please see Master Specifications Section on page 3 9 Global Regional Standard Section The Global Regional Standard section contains any specifications that are global regional standards related to the menu item specification You can associate only one global regional standard to each specification Figure 7 9 Global Regional Standard section Global Regional Standard Spec E Spec Name F 5079864 001 Child Alternate menu item Alternate Standards Section The Alternate Standards section lists any alternate standard specifications for the menu item specification GSM locates and displays any alternates that are linked to any other specification that references the current specifica
276. mposition Includes the nutrient composition supporting document information For formulation specifications Include the Expanded Bill of Materials lIncludes a listing of all ingredients used in lower level formulations Include Formulation Steps Includes a summary view of each formulation step Include Ingredient Summary Includes a printout containing a summary view of every ingredient used in the formulation specification Attachments You can print attachments individually outside of the printed output These attachments are listed in the Attachments column and are indicated by the attachment file name The printed output can include images in JPG or GIF format To include JPG or GIF images in the output check the Supporting Documentation check box in the same row as the image files that you would like to include 2 21 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 2 27 Ingredient specification print example Specification Type Sections Attachments Current Specification 5091154 001 Sugar 11 Aug 2009 supporting Documentation Image RawMateriallmage jpg Rich Text Handling Instructions Sourcing approval _ Raw Material Attributes ae 5013415 ABC Company Boston Facility Atlanta Facility Specifications L Composition d Testing Protocol Special Samples 101 28 Aug 2007 Packing Configuration 5085559 001 Related Packing Config 28 Aug 2007 weds SoBe Pasta oa Specs Document doc
277. n Chopped Dehydrated m 0 25000b Eo 20000 5077484 001 2 Tomato Paste Grade A Fancy gt 0 50000 lb None E 0 00000 5077420 001 3 Spice Blend Dry 350 A 0 25000 lb Lal 0 00000 5077442 001 5090850 001 5090843 001 6 Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose 0 10000 lb Lal 0 00000 5077447 001 7 Salt Granular Not Iodized A 0 10000 lb Lal 0 00000 5077441 001 5090849 001 Optimization Method Formulation Constraints Distribution Minimize Change 2 Al Constraints Required 2 Isolated Output Distribution 2 Emphasize Objective O Incremental Constraints O Related Output Distribution Optimize Refresh Target Specification Section The Target Specification section allows you to pick the output of the formulation specification the optimization engine will try to optimize Figure 6 65 Target Specification section Target Specification Specification Spaghetti Sauce with Meat ing 5090858 001 External Product Spaghetti Sauce with Meat ing 5090858 001 External Product 6 66 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Constraints Section In the Constraints section you can build rules for the optimization engine to use when searching for an optimal formulation The Constraint table includes a Type Condition and Design Conformance column In the Type column you can describe what kind of constraint you are adding and in the Condition column
278. n For more information about the DRL application see the Agile Product Lifecycle Managment for Process Document Reference Library User Guide A DRL catalog is a collection of DRL documents and child catalogs The DRL table consists of two columns Name and Type Name displays the DRL document or catalog name The type column identifies the linked DRL item as either document or a catalog as shown in figure 3 20 below Figure 3 20 DRL Documents section DRL Documents Name Type F Corporate Policies amp Procedures Document F East 4 West Catalog Add Browse Add Search Viewing DRL Catalogs and Documents You can view a DRL document or catalog by clicking on the linked name Viewing a Catalog Reference A catalog opens the DRL catalog viewer dialog box In this view you can expand the catalog to view its contents Select a document name to open the DRL document viewer 3 18 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Figure 3 21 DRL catalog viewer Catalog Viewer Close l Divisions Viewing a Document Reference Documents open the DRL document viewer dialog box A DRL document contains the following sections a Description a Version Revision a Attachments Figure 3 22 DRL document viewer Document Viewer Close Description Title West Documents Business Unit s Acme North America Acme Latin America Classifications Catalog s West Description West only Status Ac
279. n If the breakdown is on a formula output this breakdown could be possibly overwritten during formulation See Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications for more info Do Not Publish to Supplier Denotes that this breakdown will not appear in Supplier Portal and eQ Suppress Printing Keeps the breakdown from being included in the specification print out Note The Suppress Printing and Do Not Publish to Supplier tags are added by default when a breakdown is initially created 3 23 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 3 28 Formula section Formula 2 Component Vinegar Distilled White Add New Multi Add 3 24 Related Sourcing Approval Section In this section you can associate an existing supplier with this formulation You can select a supplier from any of the current sourcing relationships that are related to the specification These relationships help determine visibility to the breakdown in the Supplier Portal Figure 3 27 Related Sourcing Approvals section Related Sourcing Approvals Company Name Facility Name Receiving Facilities Status LS Salt Co U S Salt Co Glen Burnie North American BU Review Add New Formula Section In this section you can declare the breakdown along with associated information such as country of origin You can add items to the breakdown as free text from existing ingredient specifications in the system Food Composition Library or from the Compon
280. n Categories the only section in the Applies To tab you can associate this master specification to other specifications in the system by choosing one or more categories that this master specification will automatically apply to as shown in figure 17 3 below Figure 17 3 Specification Categories section Specification Categories if applicable This is applicable to All Specifications of this Type Ingredient Specifications Dairy Products Butter Unsalted Trade Specifications Equipment Specifications Edit Applies To You can apply specification categories from the highest to the lowest levels of the specification categories For example you can create and apply a master specification that will automatically apply to the following All ingredient specifications e Ingredient specifications exclusively for produce e Ingredient specifications for apples 17 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Note The business unit on the master specification must be the same on the associated specification for this master specification to be associated The Business Unit field is set in the Approved for Use In section as discussed in Available UOM on page 3 4 Applied master specifications appear on the associated specification in the master specifications section of that specification See Master Specifications Section on page 3 9 for more information To apply a specification category 1 On the Applies To tab in t
281. n Section on page 3 2 Q Master Description Discussed below at Master Description Section on page 17 2 Q Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Master Description Section In this section you can describe the purpose of the master specification as shown in figure 17 1 below 17 2 Figure 17 1 Master Description section Master Description Description A 25 gram sample representing each shipment or each 40 000 lbs of production will be tested for Listeria A certificate of analysis COA referencing all lots code dates will be forwarded to Corporate Purchasing prior to shipment or transfer One COA per purchase order or contract is acceptable Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 17 Master Specifications Click the alternate wording icon Y to provide the description in multiple languages as shown in figure 17 2 below Figure 17 2 Master Description alternative text input screen Description Close 48 9 ENGLISH a 25 gram sample representing each shipment or each 40 000 lbs of production will be tested for Listeria A certificate of analysis COA referencing all lots code dates will be forwarded to Corporate Purchasing prior to shipment or transfer One COA per purchase order or contract is acceptable P SPANISH PF THAI Applies To Tab Specification Categories Section In Specificatio
282. n on page 15 3 Q Packing Attribute master case Discussed below at Packing Attribute Master Case Section on page 15 3 Q Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 a Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 Packing Attribute Inner Pack Section In this section you can capture attributes that describe the inner packing of the delivered material For example if you have a case that contains six smaller bags of material this section would describe the bags Figure 15 2 Packing Attribute inner pack section Y pctg 5077480 001 Case Pack 60 lbs Meat Developmental Summary Packing Related Specs Supporting Documents References Appre Packing Attribute inner pack Label Weight O 0 M Label Volume Container Net Weight Gross Weight Inner Pack Length ii f f Height A Packing Attribute Master Case Section In this section you can capture attributes that describe the master case attributes of the delivered material For example if you have a case that contains six smaller bags of material this section would describe the case 15 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 15 3 Packing Attribute master case section Packing Attribute master case ME Units Per Case 54 a Number of Layers Cases Pallet nal e Length Mao Gr
283. n or off For more information on this feature please see the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Administrator User Guide The Available UOM section contains the valid VOM s for the specification The user has the ability to define the base UOM additional UOMs and define conversions to the base UOM UOMs are defined using the Data Administration application Only active UOMs can be used in this section Figure 3 3 Available UOM section Available JOM UOM Category Base UOM Additional UOMs The UOM Conversions section is used to define conversions from other VOMs back to the base Figure 3 4 UOM Conversions section UOM Conversions Cross oa Reference Status For example if the base UOM is LB the Additional UOMs section will allow the user to define additional UOMs to be used for the specification Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Once the UOMs from the base category have been defined the user can enter other UOMs and relate them back to the base The UOMs in the left column are filtered so the user does not see any UOM from the same category as the base UOM except for UOMs from the category of OTHER UOMs from the OTHER category should always be available in the left column Additionally once a UOM from a category has been added no other UOMs from that category should be available This will prevent users from specifying that 1IN 1LB and
284. n page 3 10 6 40 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Supporting Documents Tab The Supporting Documents tab contains the following sections References Tab a Supporting Documents section The document types available are Attachments Procedures URL and Rich Text For discussion of this commonly used section please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 a DRL Documents section For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 a Testing Protocols section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Testing Protocols Section on page 3 21 Q Nutrient Profile section Discussed below at References Tab on page 6 41 The References tab contains the following sections Activities section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Specification Dependencies section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Specification Dependencies Section on page 3 27 Related Documents section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Related Documents Section on page 3 27 Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 Additional Tools Overview of Basis You create a basis on an instance of a formulation specification You can provide information on the basis that supplement
285. n page consists of the following tabs Remaining features and concepts will be described as we review the specific screen elements of the formulation specification in the following sections Summary Tab on page 6 9 Formulation Tab on page 6 10 Process Tab on page 6 23 Ext Data Tab on page 6 40 Related Specs Tab on page 6 40 CSS Tab on page 6 40 Supporting Documents Tab on page 6 41 References Tab on page 6 41 DO O O O O UO oO O O Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 6 41 6 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons except Calculate are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are 6 6 a Settings The fields displayed in this drop down list drive specific functionality throughout the formulation specification The default values are derived from a user s Profiles and Preferences The values are then associated to the formulation specification upon saving the specification You can change these settings at any time while working with your formulation Key fields include UOM The default unit of measure for steps in a formulation specification Path The default BOM Calculation path to use when creating formulation specifications Examples include Input Percent Input Quantity and Input Yield Combine Like Item
286. n view them in the library but cannot edit them from the library as they are owned by the specification and can only be edited from that specification AGA Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are a Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it a Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process Installation this button may or may not appear Click Report to launch the Reporting application a Create New Copy Create a new copy of the current testing protocol a Validate Validates the testing protocol to ensure key data has been entered corrected Validation uses customer rules that must be built as part of an implementation Testing Protocol Detail In the testing protocol you can define and categorize quality attributes to measure and the scoring method to use in evaluating the results You can access the testing protocol library from the GSM left navigation panel Testing Protocol Header Section This section captures information pertaining to the testing protocol such as name description and status The Status field controls whether or not you can use the protocol on specifications The only testing protocols that you can add
287. ndent workflows References Tab The Menu Item Specifications References tab consists of three sections a Specification Dependencies For discussion of this commonly used section please see Specification Dependencies Section on page 3 27 Q Activities section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Q Related Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see Related Documents Section on page 3 27 Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 7 12 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 8 Nutrient Profiles This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding nutrient profiles Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions Summary Tab Nutrition Panel Tab Label Composition Tab Ext Data Tab Related Specs Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab DO O0 O OD O O O OO Overview The Nutrient Profile page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 8 2 Nutrition Panel Tab on page 8 4 Label Composition Tab on page 8 13 Ext Data Tab on page 8 13 Related Specs Tab on page 8 13 Supporting Documents Tab on page 8 14 References Tab on page 8 14 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 8 14 UOU OOOO DO O 8 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for
288. ned New is a listing of all specifications in the hierarchy after 1t was versioned The frame contains three action buttons as defined below Refresh Refreshes the briefcase updating the specification information displayed Return to Smart Issue Loads the smart issue request displayed below the briefcase frame e Close Closes the briefcase frame The smart issue request remains To workflow specifications for approval 1 Click the briefcase icon A frame displays above the smart issue request as figure 21 30 shows below Figure 21 30 Briefcase frame Refresh Return to Smart Issue Close Original New Spec Spec Name Equivalent Status Spec Spec Name Equivalent Status 1 5089549 v bOre Smart Issue Draft 1 5089549 v bOre Smart Issue Draft 001 Trade TB TMC 003 Trade TB TMC 20090305 20090305 Clicking the briefcase icon displays the frame containing Original and New grids Copy smi 0000026 Replace Trade with Trade Completed Summar Details Results Audit Smart Igsue Results Results Pir Page 20 v Export Original bpecs Spec Spec Name Equivalent Type Status Business Unit Category ig 5089549 v600rc7 Smart Issue Trade TB trd Draft CPI North No Category 2 Click the Spec hyperlink in either grid to view the specification 3 You can then edit the specification and workflow it to the appropriate status 21 24 Global Specification Management User Guide
289. ns Q Supporting Documents The document types available are attachments procedures nutrient composition and rich text For discussion of this commonly used section please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 Q DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 Q Testing Protocols For discussion of this commonly used section please see Testing Protocols Section on page 3 21 References Tab The Ingredient Specification References tab contains the list of all the reference data linked to an ingredient specification The References tab includes the following sections Q Suppliers For discussion of this commonly used section please see Suppliers Section on page 3 25 This section only appears for ingredients with material type as Raw Material Q Substitute Materials Discussed below at Substitute Materials Section on page 10 8 a Activities For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Q Specification Dependencies For discussion of this commonly used section please see Specification Dependencies Section on page 3 27 Q Related Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see Related Documents Section on page 3 27 Substitute Materials Section The Substitute Materials section allows users to capture substitute materials for the raw materials Substitutes can be added in read or e
290. ns Processing Procedures Tab Processing Procedures the sole section in this tab is for storing an enriched text rendering of the processing procedures that can be used when generating the document You can use the Generate Procedures button to automatically generate an enriched text version of the processing procedures information from the formulation specification selected on the Cover Page tab Figure 4 28 Processing Procedures section j Save Save amp Close Save amp Print Cancel Cover Page Product Formula Processing Procedures Comments Attachments Processing Procedures Generate Procedures Processing Procedures Meat Mix Salisbury Steak 15 Pork Dry Preblending Instructions Hydrated TWF Preparation Wet Preblending Instructions Hydrauflake Beef and Pork Convey Meats to Blender Add Steps 1 2 3 and Remaining Ingredients to Blender Discharge Meat Blend to Grinder Grinder with Bone Extractor Plate Size 1 8 Inch Onions Reconstituted TMC 20060816 1 Weigh Dried Onions into a Container 2 Measure Hot Water T gt 140F into the Same Container and Stir 3 Allow Onions to Hydrate in Water at Least 15 Minutes Before Use Comments Tab In Comments the sole section in this tab you can store enriched text comments for use when generating the document Figure 4 29 Comments section Save Save amp Close Save amp Print Cancel Cover Page Product Formula P
291. ns on page 3 7 Related Specs Tab The Related Specs tab contains the following sections Produced By Discussed below at Produced By Section on page 10 6 Q Trade Specifications Discussed below at Trade Specifications Section on page 10 7 Q Packing Configurations Specifications Discussed below at Packing Configurations Specifications Section on page 10 7 a Associated Specifications For discussion of this field please see Associated Specifications Section on page 3 9 Q Master Specifications For discussion of this field please see Master Specifications Section on page 3 9 Produced By Section The Produced By section shows formulation specifications that produced this ingredient specification This section is displayed only when producing specifications exist and is view only If a producing specification exists then the material type on the ingredient specification will also include the type of Formula Output Figure 10 5 Produced By section Produced By Spec Formulation Spec Name 5090520 001 Marinated Pork amp Nuggets 10 6 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 10 Ingredient Specifications Trade Specifications Section This section shows all trade specifications that this ingredient has been linked to It displays the trade specification and the formulation that was used as context on the trade specification You can click on Add New to create a new trade specification with this ing
292. nt Cost x 0 00900 USD per 100g D 0 0 Extended Attribute Test Number lt 0 00500 g per 100g al 0 0 IND 0 MI per Serving per Consumer Unit per Traded Unit The Nutrient Content constraint is composed of Nutrient The nutrient you want to constrain GSM pulls the list of nutrients from the theoretical nutrients on the selected output Operator Logical operator used for comparison purposes Options are e equal e lt less than or equal e gt greater than or equal Value The value for nutrient that you want to optimize towards UOM The unit of measure for the nutrient Display as GSM can display this information per 100g per Serving per Consumer Unit or per Traded Unit Design Conformance The current value of the constraint and an icon signifying if the constraint is met When you have finished creating the Nutrient Content constraint click the apply changes icon to save your row GSM redisplays the row showing the current value in the Design Conformance column 6 71 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Extended Attribute Using the Extended Attribute constraint type you can set up a condition to monitor the amount of a selected extended attribute associated with your formula as shown in figure 6 75 below Figure 6 75 Extended Attribute constraint Constraints _Add 6 72 Type Condition Design Comi a 1 Objective Minimize Cost per 100g 0 01043 USD
293. ntry Of Origin Key fields include UNSPSC Code This field is not visible on Traded Unit no children co pack Traded Unit no children Consumer Unit co pack or items not meant for resale UDEX Classification Search against categories used by UDEX Electronic Exchange 4 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Packaging Tab GPC Code Click the hyperlinked field label to display a dialog box from which you can choose a GPC code taxonomy Tax Type Rate Click the hyperlinked field label to display a dialog box from which you can choose a tax type or rate This field is not visible on items not meant for resale This tab hosts all of the attributes necessary to describe the traded or consumer unit information including dimensional and weight information shelf life and packaging details Key sections in the Packaging tab include Packaging Attributes Consumer Unit Section on page 4 8 Packaging Attributes Traded Unit Section on page 4 10 Stacking Height Section on page 4 11 Storage Requirements Section on page 4 11 Shelf Life Section on page 4 11 Packaging Materials Section on page 4 12 Alternate Packaging Section on page 4 12 Environmental Waste per item sold Section on page 4 13 UOO OOOD O Packaging Attributes Consumer Unit Section 4 8 Depending on the item type of the specification different packaging attributes can appear in this section The attributes below are desi
294. nts Tab on page 15 5 References Tab on page 15 6 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 15 6 DOO0DOODUCO O 15 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are Y E Summary Tab Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Create Copy Create a new copy of the current packing configuration specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing a packing configuration specification please see Printing Other Specifications on page 2 19 Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with
295. o 8265 05 A A AS ds A A adh Re awaads 11 5 Related Specs Taboada iS A a 11 5 SUG OM OM CMS SECON di ie dai aa a a dida deb dci n a 11 5 Packing Configuration Specifications Seco ii ered A AAA A o Ee 11 6 Equipment Specifications Seco ie mal ed Ree ea ee See cae bees 11 6 CSS Laces AS eeu wens edna O ine eee Aiea ida 11 7 sapportins Documents Tabaco Sres 11 7 a LAD A A AAN A 11 7 Substtite Material SECO iii A tit eos 11 7 Approval Audit ala caine tn e a aida 11 8 xi Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Chapter 12 IVETE eene a a aE Chapter 13 Miama a AEE NR is EA EE hak Chapter 14 DU A A E E du sac eae xii Equipment Specifications Pase Level BUNCHONS ohni ae a AA ETA A Summa y LAD araa IAE Aba Equipment Identification Section 0 cece cece eee Comphinc lated tas Environmental Waste per item sold Section Related Specs laborado pia tds Packaging Specifications Section 00 cee cece eee eee Supporting Documents Tab sida Pee ede eta eee References 14D acaricia er ao A arios Approval Audit TralTabican on a Printed Packaging Specifications Page Level PUNCONS 2200 stat A hai Bees eR ee Sim laborar Label Information Seco dls Ware WEI teoria tado Compliance Tab O aa ad Related Spes Dia Parent Packaging Material Section oooooooomommo m o ESSE Oia Supporting Documents Tabs a References Tab arta oa Substitute Materials Section cortos Approval Audit Trai
296. oduct Lifecycle Management for Process Audience This guide is intended for end users who are responsible for creating and managing information in Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Information about administering the system resides in the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Administrator User Guide Variability of Installations Descriptions and illustrations of the Agile PLM for Process user interface included in this manual may not match your installation The user interface of Agile PLM for Process applications and the features included can vary greatly depending on such variables as Q Which applications your organization has purchased and installed a Configuration settings that may turn features off or on a Customization specific to your organization a Security settings as they apply to the system and your user account Where to Find Information xviii Consult the table below to find specific information from the relevant Agile PLM for Process information source Table 1 Agile PLM for Process documentation topics by source GSM Admin Information type User User Guide Guide e E for Process Cache Rocke management w EE IE E E IE Core data management e Creating specifications e Custom data management 8 Customsections O e fo f Extended attibutes e e o Release Agile Help Agile Notes training Desk sales rep O ft Group management management
297. on A dialog box opens for you to enter the details of the disclosure as shown in figure 22 5 below Figure 22 5 LIO Disclosure dialog box Done Cancel LIO Disclosure OOO Restrictions Priority A E Has Total Solids Constraints 0 00000 3 Composition The LIO Disclosure section contains the following fields Disclosure The name of this item as it might appear on the ingredient statement if the restrictions and constraints are met Special Notes Your notes Restrictions A list of configurable tags that you can assign to the disclosure to prevent use in the LIO process LIO will only use disclosures with the same restriction s or no restrictions applied Note Specifying no restrictions means that the disclosure will be available for all ingredient statements in LIO Priority The order in which GSM presents the disclosures to you during the LIO process If a you select a priority of Req that disclosure will be the only one that you see Constraints Additional criteria to limit when a particular disclosure can be used Figure 22 6 LIO Disclosures section LIO Disclosure s Disclosure Restrictions Priority Constraints Modified Food Starch USDA Reg gt 0 00000 Composition Special Notes Add New 22 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 22 6 Special Notes You can enter as many LIO disclosures as needed Once you have entered all of the disclosure info
298. on You can do so by associating packaging and printed packaging specifications to the packaging that they are allowed to substitute for Figure 4 16 Alternate Packaging section Alternate Packaging Packaging Material Specification Units Substitutes Scrap Factor Carton Paper Board Frozen Meal 7 x 1 x 91 00000 units 5077540 001 1 00000 5077540 001 Add New Key fields include Substitutes Choose which piece of packaging from the Packaging Materials section that this alternate is meant to substitute for 4 12 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Trade Specifications Environmental Waste per item sold Section This section provides a place to log known waste materials for this specification along with other relevant attributes required for environmental waste reporting Figure 4 17 Environmental Waste per item sold section Environmental Waste E Composed of Material Class Weight Percent Recyclable Ra Fa GREEN GLASS 1 b S io S io Add New Key fields include Material Class Click Add New to display a dialog box from which you can choose a material class from a prepopulated list Compliance Tab Key sections in the Compliance tab include Q Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 a Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 2
299. on shown in figure 6 78 you can further tailor the optimization scenario to meet your goals You have control over the method that is used from a formulation standpoint a constraint standpoint and a distribution standpoint Figure 6 78 Optimization Method section Optimization Method Formulation Constraints Distribution Minimize Change 2 All Constraints Required 2 Isolated Output Distribution O Emphasize Objective Incremental Constraints Related Output Distribution Formulation Column The Formulation section is where you determine to what degree the optimization engine will use the scalability factors set in the Guidelines section You can set it to either Minimize Change or Emphasize Objective Minimize Change The optimization engine changes the formula as little as possible and uses the scalability controls as the boundaries Emphasize Objective The optimization engine uses the scalability limits in addition to the scalability controls as the boundaries Constraints Column The Constraints section is where you determine to what degree the optimization engine will use the constraints set in the Optimization Method section You can set it to either Incremental Constraints or All Constraints Required Incremental Constraints The optimization engine will meet as many of the constraints as possible It processes the constraints based on their rank The optimization scenario stops when a const
300. on of this commonly used section please see Additives Allergens and Intolerances Sections on page 3 7 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 9 Product Specifications Related Specs Tab The Related Specs tab contains the following sections a Global Regional Standard Discussed below at Global Regional Standard Section on page 9 5 a Alternate Standards Discussed below at Alternate Standards Section on page 9 5 Q Packing Configurations Specifications Discussed below at Packing Configurations Specifications Section on page 9 5 Q Master Specifications For discussion of this field please see Master Specifications Section on page 3 9 Global Regional Standard Section The Global Regional Standard section contains any specifications that are global regional standards related to the product specification You can associate only one global regional standard to each specification Figure 9 4 Global Regional Standard section Global Regional Standard Spec E Spec Name F 5079864 001 Child Alternate menu item Alternate Standards Section The Alternate Standards section lists any alternate standard specifications for the product specification GSM locates and displays any alternates that are linked to any other specification that references the current specification as a global regional standard Figure 9 5 Alternate Standards section Alternate Standards Spec E Spec Name 5079864 001 Child Alternate
301. on on page 3 25 Q Specification Dependencies For discussion of this commonly used section please see Specification Dependencies Section on page 3 27 Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 16 4 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 17 Master Specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding master specifications Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions Summary Tab Applies To Tab Supporting Documents Tab Ext Data Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab 0 O O OO U O Overview The Master Specifications page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 17 2 Applies To Tab on page 17 3 Supporting Documents Tab on page 17 5 Ext Data Tab on page 17 5 References Tab on page 17 5 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 17 5 DOODODUCO O 17 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are Summary Tab a Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process Installation this button may or may not appear on certain s
302. on page 13 5 References Tab on page 13 6 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 13 6 ODOoUodooOCOUO O 13 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons except Calculate are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are Y E 13 2 Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Calculate Performs all custom data calculations This button is displayed when the specification is in edit mode Calculation also happens when you save your specification Create Copy Create a new copy of the current printed packaging specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 CACS Screen the current specification using Computer Aided Compliance Screening CACS an application that you can use to inspect materials for fitness against any number of user defined screens Appears only if your installation includes CACS For more information on CACS please refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Computer Aided Compliance Screening
303. on page 3 12 Q DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 a Testing Protocols For discussion of this commonly used section please see Testing Protocols Section on page 3 21 Q Nutrient Profile Discussed below at Nutrient Profile Section on page 4 18 Q Breakdown section This section only appears on trade items that are identified as co pack For discussion of this commonly used section please see Breakdown Formula Section on page 3 22 a Regulatory Legislation Discussed below at Regulatory Legislation Section on page 4 19 Nutrient Profile Section In this section you can create new or associate existing nutrient profiles for this specification Figure 4 22 Nutrient Profile section Nutrient Profile Profile Nutrient Profile Active Profile ahi Status 5077592 001 Nutrient Profile Tomato Puree 8 6 Total Solids E Monday Approved October 04 2008 5077592 002 Nutrient Profile Tomato Puree 8 6 Total Solids E Tuesday Draft October 05 2008 Nutrient profiles are actually separate documents from the trade specification with their own workflows More than one nutrient profile can exist on a trade specification but one of the nutrient profiles must be flagged as the Active Profile for usage in rollups elsewhere in the system and label claim determination Only one nutrient profile can be marked as active 4 18 Global Speci
304. on page 3 18 Q Testing Protocols For discussion of this commonly used section please see Testing Protocols Section on page 3 21 References Tab The Equipment Specification References tab contains the list of all the reference data linked to an equipment specification and includes the following sections Q Suppliers For discussion of this commonly used section please see Suppliers Section on page 3 25 a Activities For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 A Related Documents The available related documents include only NPD Activities For discussions of this commonly used section please see Related Documents Section on page 3 27 Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 12 4 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 13 Printed Packaging Specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding printed packaging specifications Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions Summary Tab Compliance Tab Related Specs Tab CSS Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab Doo oO UO DO O O Overview The Printed Packaging Specification page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 13 3 Compliance Tab on page 13 4 Related Specs Tab on page 13 4 CSS Tab on page 13 5 Supporting Documents Tab
305. onal Database USDA Nutrient Database USDA Nutrient Database USDA Nutrient Database From Nutritional Database USDA Nutrient Database USDA Nutrient Database Method Select the method for determining this value methods are configured per nutrient item Source Administered list of sources that declare where this information came from This will be automatically populated if the value was set from some other source in the Agile PLM for Process solution Click Import to select and import nutrient values from nutrient profiles ingredient specifications or from Food Composition Library FCL items if your environment has them available Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Note The Food Composition Library will need to be configured as a part of your implementation Click NSM to select and import nutrient values from nutrient analyses or nutrient composites in the Nutrient Surveillance Management NSM application View Thumbnails In some specifications you can view attached images in a thumbnail view for supported file formats Click the View Thumbnails link to open a dialog box showing all supported image types in thumbnail format DRL Documents Section In the DRL Documents section you can link the specification to existing DRL Document Reference Library catalog and document references All referenced catalogs and documents are read only DRL catalogs and documents are created and managed using the DRL applicatio
306. onization Network GDSN compliant target systems this 1s the Global Locator Number or GLN of the information provider Publication Type Used for GDSN compliant target systems Typically this is used to tell retailers if it is the first time they have received this product information or if they already have it and should update their information Target Market Defines the destination for the syndicated data Publications are organized by target market Target market is a GDSN term used to indicate the country where the trade item is available for sale For example the US and Canada are two different target markets Note This information resides on the Summary tab of the saved publication 3 Click Save The publication appears in the Initial Publication table The default starting status for publications depends on the configuration of the publication workflow 3 11 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Note You cannot view publications with a current status of Draft Statuses are controlled and updated automatically by the publication workflow For more information please see the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Content Synchronization and Syndication User Guide Supporting Documents Tab The Supporting Documents page includes sections which vary depending on specification type The following sections are found on most specification types Supporting Documents DRL Documents Test
307. only Trade 1 Current Specification a Attachments Respect OLS 2 Entire Trade Hierarchy Does not respect WFA or BU Security a Thisis available through title specification drop down list When a trade specification is selected the related objects listing changes based on the active trade specification This is not secured the user can print any trade specification here regardless of read permissions Attachments per Trade Spec Respects OLS 3 Related Objects All objects listed respect WFA and BU Security Breakdown Classification and OLS a Packaging Material e Attachments Files and Rich Text b Printed Packaging Material Attachments Files and Rich Text c Testing Protocols d Master Attachments Files and Rich Text e Breakdown co pack trades only f Nutrient Profiles Attachments Files and Rich Text Formula 1 Current Specification a Expanded Bill of Materials Respect WFA and BU Security Step Details Ingredient Summary Respect WFA and BU Security Attachments Respect OLS Custom Sections Respect OLS f Testing Protocols 2 Related Objects All objects listed respect WFA and BU Security a Output Materials e Attachments Respect OLS DQO S e Custom Sections Respect OLS e Nutrient Composition b Master e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS 2 23 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Menu ltem 1 Current Specification a b c Attachments Respec
308. op feature Audit Operation Similarly to the preview operation the audit operation opens a dialog box with a table that denotes the percent composition of each item with an accounting of the current disclosure method and any relevant actions that have been performed against that item see figure 18 17 below Close Peet i Wo of martin High Level lt 2 inati a Date Item Name a Yield Declaration Action Source Destination Message 12 1 2006 Soluble Black ing 507744700 1 0 06840 Item Name Move Beef Trimming Moved from RootLevel Pepper on Raw 50 Le to Beef Trimmings Ra Dextrose Domestic 50 Lean Domestic ing 5077449 12 1 2006 Soluble Black ing 5077447 001 0 021609 Item Name Divide Soluble Black Item Divided into Solut Pepper on Pepper on Black Pepper on Dextro Dextrose Dextrose ing 24 00000 and 5077447 001 Soluble Black Pepper o Dextrose 76 00000 12 1 2006 Soluble Black ing 5077447 001 0 021609 Item Name Move Onions Moved from Rootlevel Pepper on Reconstituted to Onions Dextrose dwb 5001396 Reconstituted 12 1 2006 Soluble Black 0 021609 Item Name Divide Soluble Black Item Divided into Solut Pepper on Pepper on Black Pepper on Dextro Dextrose Dextrose ing 24 00000 and 507744 001 Soluble Black Pepper o 18 18 Dextrose 76 00000 Note The High Level Action column of the Audit History table will be recorded in English and will not be language aware Once you have pe
309. or a specific individual document Each linked node is a catalog Click the link to expand the catalog and view its contents A catalog can hold other catalogs and individual documents Figure 3 23 DRL browse dialog box Done Close Corporate F 0000575 001 attached to eQ 273 0000575 001 F ABC 123 200704040000561 001 Corporate Policies amp Procedures 0000163 001 _ Creator DRL Document 0000597 001 dl DRL 0000728 001 Searching Click Add Search The DRL search dialog box opens You can search for documents using the provided criteria Refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Getting Started Guide for more information about searching 3 20 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections Figure 3 24 DRL search form Search Criteria Document Date Greater Than Ww dh i Cancel more criteria v Load Elsave Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page Document 0001766 001 0001271 001 0001309 001 1 Selected Items Title Originator Status plant inspection Sally Johnson Active animal inspection Joe Foodman Active food index Carloz Kelly Active Remove Clear Done Testing Protocols Section In the Testing Protocols section you can link testing protocols to the specification For a more detailed discussion of testing protocols please see Chapter 19 Testing Protocol Library The specification needs
310. orkflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN _RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS Note As of 6 0 Custom Nutrients are no longer supported Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Summary Tab Key sections in the Summary tab include Q Summary Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 Q Formulation Attributes Discussed below at Formulation Attributes Section on page 6 9 Q Facility Information Discussed below at Formulation Attributes Section on page 6 9 Q Cross References For discussion of this commonly used section please see Cross References Section on page 3 3 A Approved for Use In For discussion of this commonly used section please see Approved for Use In Section on page 3 5 Formulation Attributes Section This section allows users to describe the formula being created associate the formula to a specific project and filter data by defining substitute restrictions Figure 6 1 Formulation Attributes section Formulation Attributes Project Name 5001506 Orange Fizzy Substitute Restrictions fispa Description A carbonated orange drink distributed in cans and glass bottles i Key fields include Project Name A reference to a project associated with the formulation specification
311. ory opens displaying one or more second level categories as shown in figure 1 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 1 15 Category tab showing second and third level categories Trade Specifications Category Search 4 No Category Available L Beverages Bread and Bakery Products Cereal Grain and Pulse Products 4 Confectionary and Sugar Sweetening Products Dairy Fruits Vegetables Nuts and Sweets i Meat Poultry and Game Oils and Fats Edible Fats Edible Oils Edible 7 Oils Edible Yegetable or Plant Shelf Stable JoJoba Oil 5082536 001 Banana Oil from South America 5081999 O01f Extra Virgin Olive Oil 5081993 001 Sesame Oil 5082444 001 Prepared and Preserved Foods 4 Seafood Seasonings Preservatives and Extracts 4 Continue clicking categories in the tree that you have opened until you reach your desired specification which is at the level that shows no expand node icon L J or collapse node icon J next to the hyperlink as shown in figure 1 16 That level is the end level Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 1 20 Figure 1 16 Category tab showing fully expanded branch Trade Specifications Category Search 4 No Category Available lt Beverages Lt Bread and Bakery Products l Cereal Grain and Pulse Products l Confectionary and Sugar Sweetening Products Lt Dairy
312. oss Meat cas am aso em im m s ko ii Width Gross Weight RS cr 0 980 m iw cr 220 ko Coding O Key fields include Packaging Type Describe the packaging type by selecting from a list of options Related Specs Tab The Related Specs tab contains the following sections A Inner Delivered Material Packing Specifications Discussed below at Inner Delivered Packing Specifications Section on page 15 4 Q Intermediate Delivered Material Packing Specifications Discussed below at Intermediate Delivered Material Packing Specifications Section on page 15 5 Q Outer Delivered Material Packing Specification Discussed below at Outer Delivered Material Packing Specification Section on page 15 5 In the sections in this tab you can further describe the packing configuration by distinguishing among inner intermediate and outer packing materials where relevant Inner Delivered Packing Specifications Section In this section you can associate this packing configuration specification with one or more delivered material packing specifications to describe the inner packing Figure 15 4 Inner Delivered Packing Specifications section Inner Delivered Material Packing Specifications Spec Y Spec Name Labeling 5pec s F 5077514 001 wax Lined Boxes SO 7513 001 Add New The associated labeling specification numbers display automatically based on their relationship with the delivered material packing specifications 15 4 G
313. ot available on the Formulation tab Examples of these items include Q Advanced modeling of outputs including Creating more than one output for a given step e Dispersing an internal output so that it can be used as an input into more than one of the following steps a Identifying alternate materials for both inputs and outputs Q Working with packaging that associated to the formulation a Generally developing a formulation by step We have found that some types of products are easier to organize and design by step Therefore the detail provided on the Process tab is considered useful for these types of products The tab is primarily structured in three parts Q Steps Section This section is identical to the Steps section described on the Formulation tab On the Process tab it acts as summary information for each step Q Process Navigation This is the gateway to the information found within each step This tool can also be used to create delete and reorder steps Q Step Details Describes a given step at the most granular level The elements found in this section make up the majority of the content for our discussion on the Process tab See Formulation tab Steps Section on page 6 22 Interacting With Process Navigation Process Navigation displays in the left side of the page as figure 6 19 shows below Steps are displayed under the Process Summary heading Click on the step to view details about the step 6 23
314. ou work with products that only produce one output per step you will rarely need to work with this feature 6 32 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications On the other hand if you often find yourself describing how materials are disassembled or describing how multiple items are created from a single process then this feature will help you model your products An important concept to understand when working with multiple outputs is related to the initial output It is assumed that input materials will initially be assigned to the first output Therefore all subsequent outputs reduce the amount of material associated with the initial output In GSM we describe the first output as variable or deselected Fixed using the drop down feature described in the Key Fields above These concepts will become clearer as we review an example 1 Prior to clicking Add New it is expected that you will have input materials defined and the automatically generated output Note in this example all 10001b of oranges is placed in the initial output Figure 6 31 Oranges example Step Details Step Name Consumer Prep F Instructions Bill of Materials Packaging Material Oty G L Yid wa Step Batch USD 100g EXT Cost de Valencia Orange FS too0 0000d 1 00000 1000 00000lb 100 00000 100 00000 0 0000 0 00000 513 5091173 001 Ib le Total 1000 00000 1000 00000 lb 100 00000 100 00000 0 0000
315. ow of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons except Calculate are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are Y E 10 2 Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Calculate Performs all custom data calculations This button is displayed when the specification is in edit mode Calculation also happens when you save your specification Create Copy Create a new copy of the current ingredient specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 CACS Screen the current specification using Computer Aided Compliance Screening CACS an application that you can use to inspect materials for fitness against any number of user defined screens Appears only if your installation includes CACS For more information on CACS please refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Computer Aided Compliance Screening User Guide LiO0 Create a new LIO profile automatically referencing the ingredient specification as the target specification The nutrient profile must be selected manually The LIO button only displays if the Formulation and Compl
316. pecifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Create Copy Create a new copy of the current master specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing a master specification please see Printing Other Specifications on page 2 19 Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN _RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS The Master Specifications Summary tab consists of the following sections a Summary Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Informatio
317. ppliers Section on page 3 25 Substitute Materials Discussed below at Substitute Materials Section on page 13 6 Activities For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Specification Dependencies For discussion of this commonly used section please see Specification Dependencies Section on page 3 27 Related Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see Related Documents Section on page 3 27 Substitute Materials Section The Substitute Materials section allows users to capture substitute materials for their raw materials Users must have the role SUBSTITUTE_MATERIAL_DEFINER to create new or modify existing raw materials Figure 13 5 Substitute Materials section Substitute Material s Substitute Material s Factor Substitute Restrictions F Yinegar Distilled 150 Grain 5077512 001 1 OD000 inegar Distilled White 100 Grain 5077413 001 1 00000 Add New Key fields include Substitute Materials Substitute materials associated with this raw material Factor The factor to apply during the substitution process Substitute Restrictions Lists substitute restrictions which are maintained in the Data Administration application Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 13 6 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 14 Delivered Material Packing
318. ptimization engine will be unable to find a feasible solution and will return an error message as shown in figure 6 79 If the optimization engine cannot find a feasible solution make your constraints less restrictive and optimize again When GSM has obtained an optimized solution the system displays the changes that 1t has made in order to achieve the optimized solution as shown in figure 6 80 Reset Save Done Snapshot Cancel Target Specification Specification Spaghetti Sauce with Meat ing 5090858 001 External Product Constraints Type er g 1 Objective 2 Nutrient Content Add Guidelines Inputs Material Equivalent Type Prodika 1 Onion Chopped Dehydrated 5077484 001 2 Tomato Paste Grade A Fancy 5077420 001 3 Spice Blend Dry 350 5077442 001 4 Beef Broth 5090850 001 5 Ground Beef 5090848 001 6 Soluble Black Pepper on Dextros 5077447 001 7 Salt Granular Not lodized 5077441 001 8 Chopped Tomato 5090849 001 Outputs Material Spaghetti Sauce with Meat Optimization Method Formulation Minimize Change O Emphasize Objective Optimize Refresh 6 76 Minimize Cost per 100g Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg per 100g Design Conformance 99 99999 accurate 0 00886 USD per 100g J 1100 00000 mg per 100g Scalability Scalability Scalability Scalability Peers a a oi oe wile oe A aan
319. r Use In Section on page 3 5 Product Attributes Section The Product Attributes section contains the specific core attributes of a product specification Figure 9 1 Product Attributes section Product Attributes Standard ocal Acceptable Alternative Description apples sold in Daisyland Y Classification Critical Mild Acid High Acid Low Acid Medium Acid Micro Sensitive Primary Shelf Life Cool Secondary Shelf Life Dark Tertiary Shelf Life 39 Cool Storage Instructions Store in a dry soft place on cushions Shi ing Conditions mot Exposed to Sunlight Shipping Instructions Ship on a padded truck YU Design Attributes Section The Design Attributes section contains product information that is used for mass conversions elsewhere in Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 9 2 Design Attributes section Design Attributes Density iollg M na Serie Total Solids 4 50000 4 9 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Formulation Tab Key fields include Density Allows for the entry of mass to volumetric conversion factor Unit Conversion Allows the declaration of an actual weight or measurement for a particular unit For example 1 slice cheese 3 2 oz Total Solids Allows for the declaration of the material s total solid composition The Formulation tab contains the data related to the ingredient statements and formulations of a prod
320. r field changes depending on which Key Field you have selected These logical or Boolean operators dynamically adjust to a set of choices that make sense for the possible values of fields in the Key Field drop down list See table 1 2 for a sample list of the possible logical operator sets Table 1 2 Sample list of search tool fields by field type and operator sets Field type Field s Operator set Free text e Spec Name Contains Brand Equals Equivalent Starts With e Activity Title e Activity Type e Analytical Properties Spec Limits e Associated Spec Association e Associated Spec Equivalent e Associated Spec Name Attachment Filename e BD Component BD Component FCL Food Composition Library e BD Component Ing Spec e BD Component Term e BD Component Text Combined Statement e Description Ingredient Statement nutp e NPD Project e Parent Formulation Spec Parent Formulation Spec Equivalent e Parent Formulation Spec Name Primary Item Equivalent Primary Item Spec Name Related Item Equivalent Related Item Spec Name e Related Trade Spec Related Trade Spec Equivalent e Related Trade Spec Name Short Name Sourcing Number e Special Notes e Status e Supercedes 1 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Table 1 2 Sample list of search tool fields by field type and operator sets continued Field type Field s continued Operator set Multiple sele
321. raded Unit no children or Traded Unit no children co pack Parent Items Calculated Section This section shows the derived relationships based on other specifications that have referenced this specification as a lower level item Figure 4 4 Parent Items Calculated section Parent Items Calculated Spec Spec Name GTIN UPC EAN 5077539 001 BEQ Beef and Vegetable Dinner 11 oz 00000000000123 4 5 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Brand Information Section In this section you can declare any relevant brand information Figure 4 5 Brand Information section Brand Information Trading Compa The Grocer Food Company Ltd Brand SubBrand Frozen Dinner Product Name 560 Beef Dinner oo Brand Description mr Sky s BBQ Beef Dinner Label Owner Branded Manufacturer Label Key fields include Trading Company Click the hyperlinked field label to display a dialog box from which you can choose a company from a prepopulated list configured by your administrator Brand Click the hyperlinked field label to display a dialog box from which you can choose a brand name from a prepopulated list configured by your administrator SubBrand Free text entry field that you can use for a more granular level of information about brand for example Label Owner Click the hyperlinked field label to display a dialog box from which you can choose a label owner from
322. raint fails to meet the defined criteria All Constraints Required The optimization engine will meet every constraint defined Distribution Column The Distribution section is where you determine how the results will be applied to the optimized formula You can set it to either Isolated Output Distribution or Related Output Distribution Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Isolated Output Distribution The optimization engine will apply formula changes to the selected output only Related Output Distribution The optimization engine will apply formula changes to all of the formulation outputs in the same manner Once you have defined all of the constraints adjusted the necessary guidelines and defined the optimization method you can start your optimization scenario by clicking Optimize at the bottom of the page Figure 6 79 Constraints section with optimization error message Reset Snapshot Save Done Cancel ES Error No feasible solution exists Target Specification Specification Spaghetti Sauce with Meat ing 5090858 001 External Product Constraints Type Co Design Conformance 99 99999 accurate g 1 Objective Minimize Cost per 100g 0 01043 USD per 100g 2 2 Ingredient Cost lt 0 00900 USD per 100g Gd 0 01043 USD per 100g 2 3 Nutrient Content Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg per 100g Gd 1162 6216
323. raint to any one of the following which are further explained below e Minimize Cost e Minimize Maximize a Nutrient e Minimize Maximize an Extended Attribute Minimize Cost Optimize based on the cost of your formulation GSM can display this information per 100g per Serving per Consumer Unit or per Traded Unit 6 67 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 68 Drop down selection Constraints Type af 1 Objective 2 2 Ingredient Cost 2 3 Extended Attribute 3 4 Nutrient Content Add Figure 6 69 Nutrient list per Serving Test Number lt 0 00500 g per 10 per Consumer Unit Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg per 10028 Traded Unit Design Conformance 99 99999 accurate 0 01043 USD per 100g ll 0 01043 USD per 1009 0 05314 g per 100g ll 1162 62162 mg per 1009 Minimize Maximize a Nutrient Optimize based on minimizing or maximizing a selected nutrient GSM pulls the nutrient list from the selected output You can display this information per 100g per serving per consumer unit and per traded unit Constraints Type Condition De 1 Objective Maximize Nutrient il per 100g v F 2 Ingredient Cost lt 0 00900 USD per 100g Calor Las Calories 3 Extended Attribute Test Number lt 0 00500 q per 10 Energy kJ La 4 Nutrient Content Sodium lt 1100 00000 mg per 10 Totein 7 4 eee at Carbohydrates Add i Guidelines Inputs Material Yield ila bility Sc
324. range Flavor Draft l Selected Items Sugar Granulated water Carbonated Remove Clear Done 2 When you have found all the specifications you wish to add click Done to return to the populated Inputs grid Figure 6 5 Populated Inputs grid Summary Formulation Process Ext Data Related Specs CSS Supporting Documents References Approval Audit Trail Inputs Step Material Oty G L Yid Wo Batch USD 1 se SF Sugar Granulated M8 0 00000 lb 100000 000000 lb 0 00000 C 5077505 001 1 ae S Water Carbonated FS o oo000 tb I 1 00000 9 000001b 0 00000 C 5077462 001 lae P orange Flavor 4487 03 0 00000 lb e 1 00000 0 0000016 0 00000 c 5080166 001 3 i Add New Calculate 0 00000 lb 0 00000 lb 0 00000 6 12 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Adding Rows and Then Materials To add rows and then materials 1 Enter the number of rows you wish to add to the left ofthe Add New button Figure 6 6 Inputs grid number of rows to add Summary Formulation Process Ext Data Related Specs CSS Supporting Documents Inputs Step Material Qty GL Yid Batch USD 100g EXT Cost 0 00000 lb 0 00000 lb 0 00000 0 00000 G Add New Calculate 2 Click the Add New button In the example below the three rows are added without a material assigned Figure 6 7 Three rows added summary Formulation Process Ext Data Rela
325. rch Form The initial screen in most applications and sections of Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process consists of a search form The search form or query tool has a basic structure but can vary greatly based on application or other factors See figure 1 1 for an illustration of the basic search form Figure 1 1 The basic GSM search form Create New Key field to Trade Specifications search in Operator Category Search Search Criteria spec Name hall AA more criteria additional attributes Search Load El Save term search Reset Search Results Results Per Page 40 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction The search form resides on the Search tab one of two tabs on the initial screen the other being Category see Understanding the Category Tab on page 1 17 To find a specification using the search form set search criteria using a combination of three basic fields in the Search Criteria section As shown in figure 1 1 these fields are Key field e Operator Search term The main search form includes the following buttons as shown in figure 1 1 above Search Displays your search results Reset Clears all search criteria fields Save Search Saves search criteria in a reusable library Use this option if you use certain search criteria often see Understanding the Category Tab on page 1 17 Load Search Loads a save
326. re 2 23 Packaging Hierarchy section Packaging Hierarchy Title Specification Orange Juice 12 oz bottle 5091133 001 w Related Trade Items Include TU Tu cu Summary Orange Juice Pallet O Traded Unit 126 Ell Pallet Layout PalletLayout jpq A Rich Text Document Pallet Layout Instructions 6 x 21 Orange Juice Case E Traded Unit 24 EN Case Layout CaseLayout jpg SU Rich Text Document Case Layout Instructions 3x4 Append Specification d bff Orange Juice 12 oz bottle Consumer Unit fco pack 1 El Final Product Example FinalProductExample jpq b SW Rich Text Document Assembly Instructions L To print attachments click the linked attachment file name In addition to printing attachments separately you can also include JPG and GIF images formats in your PDF package To include a JPG or GIF check the box in the Append Specification column next to the image s to include Additional Related Items Additional related items are listed below the Packaging Hierarchy section These items are listed in their own sections Fach section is titled by the item type as shown in figure 2 24 Possible related specifications include printed packaging materials packaging materials nutrient profiles testing protocols and master specifications On co pack trade specifications ingredient breakdowns added to the supporting documents tab will be listed as well
327. redient already linked The trade will automatically inherit the name and business unit from the ingredient specification Note Make sure to save your ingredient specification before clicking on Add New When the trade specification is created GSM takes you directly to the trade specification Any unsaved changes to your ingredient specification will be lost Figure 10 6 Trade Specifications section Trade Specifications Spec Name Context Packing Configurations Specifications Section CSS Tab The Packing Configurations Specifications section contains the Packing Configurations Specifications associated with the ingredient specification In this section you can describe the multiple ways in which this ingredient can be delivered for instance case packaging variants Figure 10 7 Packing Configurations Specifications section Packing Configuration Specifications Spec HE Spec Name Equivalent Comments 5082071 002 Packing Configuration 20061213 Key fields include Equivalent In this field you can associate a cross reference equivalent per packing configuration For discussion of this commonly used tab please see CSS Tab on page 3 10 10 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Supporting Documents Tab The Ingredient Specification Supporting Documents tab contains the list of all supporting documents associated with an ingredient specification The Supporting Documents tab consists of three sectio
328. reliminary E produced 3 Click Done Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Because of the nested design of the subsearch tool there are too many permutations to cover all of them in a user manual Therefore you can consider the samples below figure 1 10 and figure 1 11 as representative of the whole Figure 1 10 Subsearch tool when searching for facilities blank select Search Type Search Search Criteria Facity Name y Es Search Result Selected Items Remove Clear Add Facility Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 1 11 Facilities subsearch tool showing selected search results Close Select Search Type Search Search Criteria Search Result Facility Prodika Facility Name Company Name City State Province Country Name 5010695 California E California amp Crockett CA USA Hawaiian Hawaiian Sugar Sugar Co Co Crockett Selected Items California amp Hawaiian Sugar Co Crockett Remove Clear Add Facility Searching for Field Types That Do Not Use the Search Terms Field The following two field types make use of logical yes or no operators for which the search terms field is unnecessary e Exists e True or False If the field in which you are searching is one of these types for example Sourcing Approval or Supplier signed spec you complete the search criteria when you choose the operator Is NU
329. rence section on a related specification This date is not available on a primary activity an activity created from and possibly dependent on a specification Inactive The date the activity expires This date controls when the activity is removed from the activity reference section on a related specification If the Inactive date is not set then the activity will never expire and always appear on the specification s This date is not available on a primary activity an activity created from and possibly dependent on a specification Note For either of the effective or inactive dates to control visibility of the activity on the related specification s you must have the Reference this Activity on the above Specifications checkbox selected For more information see Related Items Section on page 20 6 Activity Type Link the activity to an activity workflow template required field Your workflow administrator manages activity workflow templates using the Workflow Administration application WFA Note For more information on managing workflow templates in WFA please see the Using WFA to Manage GSM Workflows chapter in the Agile Product Lifecycle for Process Administrator User Guide Originator Identify the person who created the activity system defined field Status WFA template defined field displaying the workflow step that the activity is currently in Primary Action Item Section The Primary Action Item
330. rences Therefore restrictions can be assigned to breakdowns and then filtered upon when using LIO Format From the Format drop down list you can choose the level of detail to which the LIO tree will be created After you change one of these options GSM immediately reformats the Generate LIO and Final Statement fields There are two options e Combined Statement Level 2 e Multipart Statement Level 1 18 4 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 18 LIO Profiles Combined Statement Level 2 Omit top level items in the LIO tree For example if you have seasoning that has a percent breakdown of salt pepper and cinnamon and you select this format the resulting tree will contain salt pepper and cinnamon Multi part Statement Level 1 Shows you all the levels in the LIO tree as shown in figure figure 18 6 on page 18 6 In the example above if you selected the Multi part Statement Level 1 format you would see seasoning with salt pepper and cinnamon as child items Inactive Rows Use the Inactive Rows field to choose whether the tree will display or hide rows that are inactive Hiding inactive rows is especially helpful if you are trying to pinpoint exactly what data will be shown in the ingredient statement Using the LIO Tree Once you have defined the restrictions format and inactive row handling click Generate LIO Tree to have the system create the requ
331. rformed all required actions on your tree click the Final Statement tab to finalize your ingredient statement Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 18 LIO Profiles Final Statement Tab This Final Statement tab consists of the following sections Q Ingredient Statement Options Discussed below at Ingredient Statement Options Section on page 18 19 Q Final Ingredient Statement Discussed below at Final Ingredient Statement Section on page 18 20 In the Final Statement tab you can further edit the generated statement for final label production Once you have completed the LIO construction process you can produce and edit the final ingredient statement using features found within the tab then push the changes to the specification Ingredient Statement Options Section Figure 18 18 Ingredient Statement Options section Ingredient Statement Options Format multi part Statement level 1 style other When editing the final statement you can modify the statement using the Format Style and Other fields Format Field GSM supports the following formats Multi part Statement level 1 Creates a multi part statement using level one items as primary headers Combined Statement level 2 Creates a single combined statement using all items beginning at level 2 within the LIO hierarchy Style Field GSM supports the following styles Columnar Arranges the final statement in a columnar list sep
332. ributes and define the testing parameters for each To edit any data in this table click Edit at the upper right ofthe page GSM reloads the page in editable form and displays an edit icon gt to the left of each editable row in the table In the row to edit click the edit icon GSM reloads the page displaying the row in editable mode with a yellow background including the apply changes icon the undo icon the delete icon 4 and an add data icon in the Property Description Scoring and Protocol ID columns as shown in figure 19 5 below Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 19 Testing Protocol Library Figure 19 5 Testing Protocol Detail section Testing Protocol ID Property Description J 1 Pal p 3 Clarity Section Appearance ge Color Section Appearance Appearance wt Aroma Section Aroma Syweetness Section Balance Specification Limits Scoring Test Used Protocol ID Qualitative If Measure Score Brilliant star bright crystal leggy 2 Translucent slightly dull pearling 1 Cloudy hazy sediment watery o Weight 1 MC lt D Observations de Qualitative of fiz If Measure Score Off maderized brown colorless 2 Typical for type and age vivid Nearly correct attractive lively 0 Weight i MC 0 Observations Qualitative If Measure Score Varietal characteristic complex flowery Fleeting simple undeveloped elusive De
333. rmation for a given term continue to the LIO Grouping section LIO Groupings The LIO Groupings section defines the groups to which the component catalog term can be added during the LIO process To add a new grouping click Add New under the LIO Grouping section A dialog box displays for you to enter details as figure 22 7 shows Figure 22 7 LIO Grouping dialog box Done Cancel Vegetable white powdery List if y FOA Southern Europe USA Has Total Solids Constraints 0 0034 Composition The LIO Grouping dialog box includes the following columns Grouping The name of the group that the term can be added to during the LIO process Special Notes Your notes Method The default declaration method for the group that is being added Restrictions A list of configurable tags that you can assign to the group to prevent use in the LIO process LIO will only use groupings with the same restriction s or no restrictions applied Note Specifying no restrictions means that the group will be available for all ingredient statements in LIO Priority The order in which DWB presents the groupings to you during the LIO process Ifa you select a priority of Req that group will be the only one that you see Constraints Additional criteria to limit when a particular grouping can be used Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 22 Component Catalog Figure 22 8 LIO Groupings
334. rocess G L Factor applied to the initial quantity to account for output loss Please note that this factor impacts the entire output where as the input G L was specific to a single input Water G L Factor applied if during processing water is lost or gained Yld Final output quantity after all loss has been accounted for Formula Percentage of the formula that this output represents compared to the total Formula Output Data associated with output that can be modified using the Output dialog box shown in figure 6 18 below To access the Output dialog box click the document icon _ The output dialog box is described in more detail in Output Dialog Box on page 6 49 6 21 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 18 Output dialog box Output Settings Calculate Done Cancel Summary Yield Composition Nutrition Compliance Ext Data This action button is only Summary Information available when the formulation specification is in design mode Spec Name dh Step 1 Output 5090356 001 Short Name step 1 Output 5090356 001 Access LeveE Theoretical Specification No Access Global 0 No Access Global 0 Category mo Category Available Spec 5090356 ee Issue 001 Sub Category No Category Available Status Inactive Originator Smith Carol Last Edit Monday July 20 2009 Composition Map Spec Name Yield Available Yield Consumed Vinegar Dis
335. rocessing Procedures Comments Attachments On Comments Comments This product is to be used by the consumer as specified 4 23 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Attachments Tab The Attachments tab contains the following sections a Related Specifications a Attachments Related Specifications Section The section allows you to reference attachments from ingredient and packaging specifications related to the product Figure 4 30 Related Specifications section Related Specifications Ingredient Specification s 5977441 001 Salt Granular Not Iodized 50774444001 Textured Soy Flour Caramel Colored 5077446 001 Soy Protein Concentrate Powdered 5077447 001 Soluble Black Pepper on Dextrose 5077448 001 Breading NW 4634216 5077450 001 Beef Lean Finely Textured 5077451 001 Pork Trimmings Raw 72 Lean 5077462 001 Water Carbonated 5077484 001 Onion Chopped Dehydrated Packaging Specification s Attachments Section In this section you can attach binary documents such as Adobe Acrobat PDF documents and Microsoft Office documents Figure 4 31 Attachments section Attachments Title Filename Size 2 logo attachment LogoSsmall jpa 935 KB pd Add Attachment 4 24 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Trade Specifications References Tab The trade specification References tab contains the list of all reference data linked to a specifica
336. rofile per 100 Mubrient Per 100mL pene Source Per Serving Comments Calories a4 00000 kcal 3536000000 00000 kcal NSM Analysis 0000166 388960000 00000 kcal Energy kJ 3699 00000 kJ 14726000000 00000 kJ NSM Analysis 0000166 1627560000 00000 kJ Protein 0 00000 q 0 00000 q ASM Analysis 0000166 O 00000 q Carbohydrates 0 00000 g 0 00000 q NSM Analysis 0000166 0 00000 q Carbohydrate 37 50000 g 150000000 00000 g abc 16500000 00000 q Available Dietary Fiber 0 32734 q 15309360 00000 q abc 144029 60000 g Total Sugar 1 5687 g 6275080 00000 q abc 690258 00000 g Copper 0 00000 mg 000000 mg NSM Analysis 0000166 0 0000 mg Selenium 0 o00000 ug 0 00000 ug NSM Analysis 0000166 0 O0000 pg Carotene 2 50000 pg 10000000 00000 pg abr 1100000 00000 pg Rollup Label Claims Figure 8 4 Nutrient Profile section showing the Per 100mL column in edit mode Mubrient Profile Nutrient Per i00mL gt iia ie Source Per Serving Comments Calories 894 00000 kcal 3536000000 00000 kcal NSM Analysis S66960000 00000 kcal 0000166 Energy kJ 3699 000001 147296000000 00000 k NSM Analysis 1627560000 00000 kJ 0000166 Protein 0 OOOO 0 00000 q ASM Analysis 0 0000 q 0000166 Carbohydrates 0 00000 0 00000 q ASM Analysis 0 00000 q 0000166 Carbohydrate af SU000 1S0000000 00000 q abc 16500000 00000 q Available Dietary Fiber 0 32734 1509560 00000 g abr 1440229 60000 q Total Sugar 156877 625060 00000 g abr 62050
337. rs in the Application Type field Continue filling out all required fields and any others that you wish to use as listed in the Summary Tab Supporting Documents Tab Ext Data Tab and References Tab sections later in this chapter Click Save or Save amp Close Document at the top right of the activity page Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 20 Activities Creating an Activity That ls Independent of Specifications Ifyou have the necessary user role you can create an activity that is independent of an individual specification You must use the Create New button on the Activities search page in order to create an activity of this type To create a specification independent activity 1 From within GSM click Activities on the left navigation panel The Activities page displays 2 Click Create New at the top right of the page GSM displays an empty activity page opened to its Summary tab as shown in figure 20 1 below Figure 20 1 Empty activity creation page id gare Save amp Close Document Cancel fact 5090132 001 Summary Supporting Documents Ext Data References Approval Audit Trail Activity Summary Notify Specification Reader of this activity LI Effective Monday July 06 2009 Activity Type Inactive Originator Johnson Sally Status Special Notes Last Edit Related Items Type Description Status Comments
338. ry O Style Layout EXTERNAL SPECIFICATION 4 Include Cover Sheet Key fields include Business Unit Controls which master specifications are available for printing Changing this value changes the master specification listing Paper Size Controls the page size Include Cross Reference Includes the selected cross reference inside the header of each printed page Document Control Dictates which watermark to display CONTROLLED COPY or UNCONTROLLED COPY Print Template Lists all format options for the specification type Include Activity Summary Attaches a summarized printout of each activity that is attached to the specification as shown in figure 2 21 below Style Layout Dictates the style and output of the specification Include Cover Sheet Adds a cover sheet to the outgoing PDF as shown in figure 2 22 below 2 14 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 Working with Specifications Figure 2 21 Trade specification activity summary sample Orange Juice 12 oz bottle 5091133 001 Activity Summary Sr Dra 5031143 001 Label Review act 5091143 001 Effective 10 Aug 2009 Inactive Activity Type Label Review Originator Smith David Status Draft Special Notes abel Review for Sunshine Orange Juice Please Verity the nutritional fact panel Last Edit 10 Aug 2009 Related Items Type Description Trade Specification Orange Juice 12 oz bottle
339. s When checked combines like input items when viewing the formulation specification s Formulation tab in read mode Cross Reference The cross references system equivalent used for presenting alternate identities for attached specifications This field will be the equivalent number that is defined on the referenced specification Currency The default currency Cost Type Type associated with the cost set Cost Set The actual set of costs that will be used for viewing and optimization for the bill of material BOM items added to the formulation specification a Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it a Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process Installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Calculate Performs calculations related to the formulation specification Specifically BOM Calculation This button is displayed when the specification is in edit mode Updates values associated with the formulation and step BOMs BOM Calculations also update e Yield Theoretical Nutrition Theoretical Compliance Data Theoretical Composition Data Custom Data Executes custom calculations which are defined in ADMN and associated with Calculated Extended Attributes which are then placed on the specification as either simple extended attributes or as part of a custom section Glo
340. s Supply Chain Relationship Management User Guide The Suppliers section of the References tab displays a summary of sourcing approval documents that are associated with the specification If you initiate the creation of a sourcing approval from within GSM you can add new suppliers Note A specification must be assigned to a workflow before it can be associated with a sourcing approval To add a new supplier to the specification 1 With the specification in read mode click Add New The SCRM facility search dialog box opens 2 Search for the facility that will supply this specification Refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Getting Started Guide for help with searching 3 Select a facility The SCRM application opens displaying a new specification related sourcing approval with prepopulated specification and sourcing facility fields 3 25 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 3 30 Suppliers section suppliers Company Facility dh I P T 5K Foods IPT Ware house Je Bellingham Akron Add New Import 3 26 Sourcing Receiving Sourcing Type Producer Angus Note Sourcing approvals can also be created directly from Supply Chain Relationship Management For more information on creating specification related sourcing approvals refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Managment for Process Supply Chain Relationship Management User Guide You can also import sourcing approvals
341. s intended to act as a quick summary view of the successful issues so you will know what hierarchies still need to be addressed If the top level shows as Completed then that means the entire hierarchy was issued and no further action is needed If the icon is red that means either one or more specifications in that hierarchy were not issued Figure 21 29 Issued column with status icons Result Summary Results Per Page Export Issued Lad 1 Spec Y Spec Name Equivalent Type Status Business Unit Category 5089485 001 French Fries menu Draft CPI North America No Category Available 5087634 001 Spicy French Fries menu Draft CPI North America Mo Category Available Ll Hierarchy Issued Hierarchy Mot Completed Exporting Failed Results Click Export to receive a list of all specifications that were issued The list includes the following columns Top Level Original New Level Spec Spec Name Equivalent Type Status BU Category Pkid 21 23 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Workflowing Specifications The Results grids include a briefcase icon I that you can use to workflow the new and original specifications The briefcase serves as a navigation tool to help navigate to each specification Clicking the briefcase icon opens a frame above the smart issue request The frame contains two grids Original and New Original is a listing of all the specifications in the hierarchy before it was versio
342. s such as Nutrition Compliance Custom Data Supporting Documents breakdown etc Q Formulation and step specific information including 6 2 Gain Loss Factors Qty Yield etc Step Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Output Types Sub Types Formulation Specifications Composition inputs Packaging Outputs can be classified as one of the following types Q Internal Used to describe the material that moves from one step to another within a single formulation specification Internal outputs are not available for use by other formulation specifications a External Owned Represents the result of the formulation External Owned outputs can be used by other specifications for various purposes To help describe these purposes External Owned outputs are further described by Sub Types Sub Types available include Product The primary material created from the formulation specification A product can be used in further processing by another formulation specification or linked to a trade specification and thought of as a finished good By Product A material that is created as a result of creating a product A by product output can be linked to a trade specification and sold as a finished good However it cannot be linked to other formulation specifications for further processing Waste A material that is created as a result of making a product A waste output cannot be linked to a trade or formula
343. s the specification or you can provide custom data on the basis for the current formulation specification The system creates a basis automatically when you add items to the Inputs section of the formulation specification You can access a basis from either the Formulation or Process tab To open a basis click the document icon 7 in the Material column of the inputs grid GSM displays the Basis dialog box as described below 6 41 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Basis dialog box The refresh feature allows the user to pull revised or more current specification data into the basis for the formulation specification Use the Basis dialog box shown in figure 6 43 below to apply bases to your inputs Two methods of refresh are available 6 42 1 Click Refresh at the top right of the dialog box to perform a basis refresh Using the refresh feature you can update all of the information about a specific formula item on your formulation specification GSM prompts you to confirm the update When you select OK the system pulls the information from the specifications for all data elements 2 Usea sections refresh icon to pull current specification data for that one section not the whole specification GSM pulls the requested information from the specification and displays it in the section as figure 6 42 shows below After working with bases click Done to close the Basis dialog box Figure 6 42 Refresh icon in se
344. scussed below at Ingredient Specification Section on page 4 17 a Associated Specifications For discussion of this commonly used field please see Associated Specifications Section on page 3 9 a Master Specifications For discussion of this commonly used field please see Master Specifications Section on page 3 9 Ingredient Specification Section CSS Tab This section represents the material that was produced as a result of a formulation specification Figure 4 21 Ingredient Specification section Ingredient Specification Spec Name Context Oty 4 ob Granulated Sugar Sucrose 5077415 001 gf 1000001 2 L Add New Key fields include Context Used to specify which formulation specification actually produced the material Qty Indicates how much of the produced material is actually going into the trade specification The tare weight calculation uses this ratio when calculating the amount of packaging The CSS tab contains the data related to the list of publications of a specification to any internal or external target system For discussion of this tab please see CSS Tab on page 3 10 4 17 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Supporting Documents Tab Key sections in the Supporting Documents tab include Q Supporting Documents The document types available are URL Attachments Procedures and Rich Text For discussion of this commonly used section please see Supporting Documents Section
345. se the apply changes icon to confirm new additions and click Done in the upper right of the dialog box to close it and display your additions in the table Figure 19 9 Setting Protocol IDs and frequency Protocol IDs and Frequency Protocol ID Frequency P Aroma lin every 100 o men e Add New 19 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 19 8 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 20 Activities This chapter describes the purpose and use of the activities feature of Global Specification Management Topics in this chapter include Creating an Activity Searching for an Activity summary Tab Supporting Documents Tab Ext Data Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab U oO O O O CO O Overview An activity is a workflow enabled object that can be used with other specifications or objects Activities can be useful in the following scenarios Q Managing Parallel Work As an ingredient specification is moving through 1ts workflow a user may choose to launch a nutritional review This review can be modeled as a GSM activity working in parallel with the ingredient specification s workflow In addition you can choose to create a linkage between the activity and the specification to support business rules such as A specification cannot move to an Approved status if a nutritional review has been initiated and has not yet been completed Q Managing A Group Of Activities
346. section LIO Grouping s Grouping Method Restrictions Priority Constraints Vegetable List ix y FDA Southern 3 0 02000 Total white powdery Europe USA Solids lt 90 00000 Total Solids gt 0 00340 Composition Starches List i x y USDA Reg gt 0 00000 E Composition nn A You can enter as many LIO groupings as needed Once you have entered all of the group information for a given term continue to the Reconstitution Equivalency section Reconstitution Equivalency Section The Reconstitution Equivalency section defines the reconstitution or equivalency rules that you can use during the LIO process To add a new reconstitution equivalency rule click Add New under the Reconstitution Equivalency section A dialog box displays for you to enter details of the rule shown in figure 22 9 below Figure 22 9 Reconstitution Equivalency section Reconstitution Equivalency Declare As Target Yo Factor Comments gf Liquid Starch 75 Water A 0 00324 from 9928374 4890k 4 So Water hal Add New The Reconstitution Equivalency table includes the following columns Declare As The name to use for the term after the reconstitution has been performed Target Factor Factor or percent change to apply during the reconstitution process Comments Your comments Approved Usages Section The Approved Usages section is for future use 22 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process U
347. sent Eaches and Inner Packs depending on what other specifications are linked to it e Consumer Unit co pack Represent the lowest level of the hierarchy that is produced for you by someone else This type has the ability to record percent breakdown information and might be used for a can of green beans produced on your company s behalf e Consumer Unit not for resale co pack Represents the lowest level of the hierarchy that is produced for you by someone else but is not intended for individual sale This type might be used for a bottle of pickle relish in a picnic pack that is produced on your company s behalf Consumer Unit not for resale Represents the lowest level of the hierarchy that is not intended for individual sale Traded Unit Represents the orderable units of the item hierarchy This type can be used to represent Cases Pallets Display Shippers or Mixed Modules depending on what other specifications are linked to it Traded Unit co pack Represents the orderable units of the hierarchy that are produced for you by someone else This type has the ability to record percent breakdown information and might be used for a case or pallet of green beans produced on your company s behalf Traded Unit no children co pack Represents a specification that is both the orderable unit and the consumer unit all in one It does not have any children linked to it but can have a percent breakdown This type m
348. ser Guide CHAPTER 6 Formulation Specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding formulation specifications Topics in this chapter include Overview Concepts and Definitions Page Level Functions Summary Tab Formulation Tab Process Tab Ext Data Tab Related Specs Tab CSS Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab Additional Tools DO O0 O O O O O O O O O O O Overview The formulation specification is where we document the process or recipe for one or more inventoried items The formulation specification describes Q The name of the formulation which is often associated with the output item s A The required ingredients with their quantities needed to make the item s Q The ordered preparation steps and instructions describing when and how to mix materials a Descriptive information about the formulation specification and the output item s Examples include Documents Custom Data Related Specifications And various core attributes used to describe specific elements of the specification 6 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process In addition the formulation specification is the foundation for a number of tools that we use throughout the lifecycle of the specification Examples of organizational goals and the tools provided by the formulation specification to help achieve these goals include Q Capturing accur
349. sing Component Catalog Terms You can use Component Catalog terms in GSM when you are creating a percent breakdown on an ingredient specification or when you are performing LIO For more information on using LIO to create your ingredient statements see LIO Profiles on page 18 1 22 8 Global Specification Management User Guide APPENDIX A Key Search Fields This appendix contains supplementary information about fields that are searchable within Global Specification Management Topics include a Searchable Fields Searchable Fields Table A 1 describes search fields whose meaning or use may not be self explanatory Table A 1 Key field names of note in the search criteria key field list described Key field Description Associated Specification Search against specifications containing associated specifications matching the search criteria entered Search criteria include Association Equivalent Name and Number BD Breakdown Component Search against the free text name of component declared within the percent breakdown BD Breakdown Component Search against Country of Origin COO column declared c00 within the percent breakdown BD Breakdown Component Search against Food Composition Library FCL terms that FCL are declared within the percent breakdown BD Breakdown Component Search against Ingredient Specifications that are declared Ing Spec within the percent breakdown BD Breakdown Component S
350. sing snapshots you can capture incremental changes that are made during the formulation process and then revert to them later To create a snapshot 1 Once you have an instance of a specification that you want to snapshot click Snapshot in the upper right corner of the application The Snapshots dialog box opens as figure 6 61 shows below Figure 6 61 Snapshots dialog box Close Snapshots Created Name Comments Add New 2 Click Add New GSM displays the following confirmation message Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Figure 6 62 Snapshot confirmation Windows Internet Explorer gt Lik You have requested to snapshot your Formulation specification This will perform a save prior to creating the snapshot Press OK to continue or CAMCEL to abort a 3 Click OK to save the specification and take the snapshot 4 Type a new snapshot name in the Name field and any details about the snapshot in the Comments field as figure 6 63 shows below Figure 6 63 Snapshots detail Close Snapshots Created Name Comments Tuesday July 28 2009 10 44 AM post sales meeting updated BOM sal ag Add New To restore a snapshot 1 Click Snapshot in the upper right corner of the application GSM opens the Snapshots dialog box which lists saved snapshots 2 Click the linked creation date and time of the snapshot displayed in the Created column GSM restores the sel
351. splays the following as figure 8 7 shows below Theoretical nutrient data rolled up from the inputs of the menu item s build The ingredient statement from the nutrient profile Compliance data broken out by specification Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 8 Figure 8 7 Nutrient profile Rollup screen Nutrient Profiles Print Close Note Values displayed on this screen are calculated from lowerdevel specification data and should be considered theoretical These values may not match the information that has been formally declared on the Specification or the Nutrient Profile Grand child menu item 5079865 001 Product Menu Item Beef BBQ Sauce ADDITIONAL ITEMS Product Menu Item Add New Ingredient Statement as declared on Nutrient Profile Ingredient Statement BLENDED VEGETABLES Corn Carrots Peas Nutrient Rollup Quantity Nutrients 10 g Calories 40 g Carbohydrates Carbohydrate Available Calcium d Biotin Carotene POTATOES Potatoes Soybean Oil CONTAINS 2 OR LESS OF THE FOLLOWING BBQ Sauce Dry Mix Salt BEEF Per 100 0 00006 kcal 0 00005 g 0 00004 g 0 00003 mg 0 00050 mg 0 00000 pg Total 0 00006 kcal 0 00005 g 0 00003 g 0 00002 mg 0 00045 mg 0 00000 ug BBQ SAUCE Water Brown Sugar Vinegar Tomato Paste Lemon Juice CONTAINS 2 OR LESS OF THE FOLLOWING Molasses Modified Food Starch Chili Powder Salt Liquid Smoke Flavor Xanthan Gum Caramel Co
352. system updates the workflow status based on your selection 2 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 2 8 Selecting Workflow Participants If the workflow icon includes people HE in the next dialog box you may have to select workflow participants such as one or more owners persons being asked for a signature or persons being notified As figure 2 9 on page 2 8 shows the dialog box may contain preselected data or may prompt you to select one or more participants Refer to figure 2 8 through figure 2 10 on page 2 8 for an example of selecting workflow participants Figure 2 8 Single select example Choose a single owner Select Owner s Next gt gt Cancel 0 approver spec specapprover Acme Europe 0 Smith Sally fasmith Green Walter wgreen Foodman Joe jFood Acme Europe Figure 2 9 Pre Selected Example Notification recipient s have been preselected in the workflow tem plate Select Notification Recipient s Done Cancel Member s have been selected Figure 2 10 Multiple select example Select one or more signatories from each tab Select Signator s Done Cancel Marketing Quality Assurance ecapprover Acme Europe Each tab represents a functional area in which you Jones Jo jones may need to make a selection C Smith Jane isrnith approver spec LI Johnson Sally scjohnson Working with Signature Documents Use a signature document
353. t Activity Summary Section on page 20 4 Q Primary Action Item Discussed below at Primary Action Item Section on page 20 5 for specification dependent activities only Q Related Items Discussed below at Related Items Section on page 20 6 Activity Summary Section The Activity Summary section contains the identifying information for the activity and specifies which workflow template the activity is following Figure 20 2 Activity Summary section Activity Summary Activity Title printed Packaging activity Activity 5090152 001 Notify Specification Reader of this activity Effective Tuesday July 07 2009 Activity Type Inactive Originator Clark Sally Status Special Notes special notes about activity Last Edit Key fields include Activity Title Identifies the activity by name required field Activity Identifies the activity by number system defined field 20 4 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 20 Activities Notify Specification Reader of this activity When checked a notification panel will appear on the primary and or related specification s informing the user that the activity exists This panel will appear when the user opens the specification the panel will disappear once the user places the specification in edit mode or switches tabs Effective The date the activity becomes active This date controls when the activity appears in the activity refe
354. t History Perform Action gt Divide Item Name Ingredient Statement Do NOT Declare 18 8 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 18 Table 18 1 Declaration options actions continued Icon Current Method for Disclosure Component that is listed as a single item in a the LIO Component that is listed as a single item in the LIO and whose title has been manually edited Component that is flagged as Do NOT Declare and will not appear in the LIO Group that has been added during the LIO process LIO Profiles Declaration Options Actions Perform Action gt View Perform Action gt Refer to Component Catalog Perform Action gt Rename Item Perform Action gt Annotate Perform Action gt Audit History Perform Action gt Divide Item Name Do NOT Declare Perform Action gt View Perform Action gt Refer to Component Catalog Perform Action gt Rename Item Perform Action gt Annotate Perform Action gt Audit History Perform Action gt Divide Item Name Do NOT Declare Perform Action gt View Perform Action gt Refer to Component Catalog Perform Action gt Rename Item Perform Action gt Annotate Perform Action gt Audit History Perform Action gt Divide Item Name Do NOT Declare Perform Action gt Add new Group Perform Action gt Rename Item Perform Action gt Delete Group Perform Action gt Annotate Perform Action gt Audit History Perform Action gt Divide Item
355. t OLS Custom Sections Respect OLS Testing Protocols 2 Related Objects All objects listed respect WFA and BU Security a b Nutrient Profile e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Master e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Nutrient Profile 1 Current Specification a b Attachments Respect OLS Custom Sections Respect OLS Product 1 Current Specification a DQO S f Attachments Respect OLS Custom Sections Respect OLS Testing Protocols Breakdowns Respect Formulation Security Sourcing Approvals Respect OLS and SCRM BU Security Nutrient Composition 2 Related Objects All objects listed respect WFA and BU Security a b Packing Configuration e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Master e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Ingredient 1 Current Specification a DQO S f Attachments Respect OLS Custom Sections Respect OLS Testing Protocols Breakdowns Respect Formulation Security Sourcing Approvals Respect OLS and SCRM BU Security Nutrient Composition 2 Related Objects All objects listed respect WFA and BU Security a 2 24 Packing Configuration e Attachments Respect OLS e Custom Sections Respect OLS Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 2 b c d Working with Specifications Delivered Material Packing Specs linked to the P
356. t also displays in the upper left corner of the table indicating you can edit the entire section Depending on the size of your custom section editing the entire section may not be available Figure 3 36 Custom section in edit mode Done Cancel Adhesives Time Temperature Custom Section Expiration Add Row Add Column Remove Column 2 Click the edit icon and make appropriate changes to the table row or column 3 Click the apply changes icon 2 4 Click Done 5 Click Save To add a row 1 With the custom section in edit mode click Add Row GSM displays a dialog box listing rows that can be added as figure 3 37 shows below Figure 3 37 Available rows dialog box Oracle Windows Internet Explorer DER Done Cancel Compression Time Open Time Temperature Rating 3 31 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 2 Select a row and then click the add selected data icon 3 Repeat step 2 to add additional rows 4 Click Done GSM closes the dialog box The added rows display in the table 5 Click Save To delete a row 1 With the custom section in edit mode click the edit icon on the row you want to delete 2 Click the delete row icon The row is deleted from the table 3 Click Save To add a column 1 With the custom section in edit mode click Add Column GSM displays a dialog box listing columns that can be added as figure 3 38 shows below Figure 3 38
357. t by GSM based on the regulatory BOMs of the input items for the formulation specification 6 58 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Figure 6 97 Regulatory Breakdown section Regulatory Breakdown Description Restrictions Formulation Classifications Tags Automatically Refresh Component Comp 2 Comp 1 seasoned Cooked Pork E GSM Users Suppress Printing Do Not Publish to Supplier Regulatory Description Country Of Origin Complies With Formulation Total Solids Function Critical 6 847 74 2 00000 F 6 047 74 10 00000 F 82 30453 a7 00000 F 100 00001 Nutrition Tab This tab displays the rolled up nutrient information as it relates to the output and formulation specification The tab consists of one section Nutrient Composition Nutrient Composition Section All of the nutrients that are present in BOM items are automatically included in this section If you click on an individual nutrient GSM displays the nutrient composition dialog box which contains the formula items where the nutrient is present When child specifications do not have specified nutrients the rolled up value may be incorrect Warning icons display next to nutrients in error conditions as figure 6 58 shows below 6 59 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 58 Output dialog Nutrition tab Summary Yield Composition Nutrition Compliance Ext Data A
358. t specification types Topics in this chapter include a Summary Tab a Compliance Tab a Related Specs Tab a CSS Tab a Supporting Documents Tab a References Tab a Custom Data Overview Information in Global Specification Management GSM is organized into tabs that are in turn organized into sections Several sections are common to all or most types of specifications This chapter describes the most commonly used tabs and the sections within them Summary Tab The Summary tab in GSM contains three sections common to several specification types Summary Information Cross References Available UOM UOM Conversions Approved for Use In 3 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Summary Information Section The section contains the primary identifying information for the specification Figure 3 1 Summary Information section Summary Information Spec Name Short Name Spec Status Access Level Category Sub Category Group Originator Supercedes Reason for Change Mango Juice d Mango Juice i Draft Draft Mo Access Global 0 4 Fruit Mut Products Mango Juices Concentrates Foadman Joseph USA Mew Spec in System al Spec 5080158 Issue 001 Status Draft Effective Tuesday October 25 2005 Inactive Last Edit Tuesday October 25 2005 The table below shows the key fields for the Summary Information section Table 3 1 Summary Information key fi
359. ted Packaging Material Tab Related Specs Tab CSS Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab Doo oO oO U O O O Overview The Packaging Material Specification page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 11 3 Compliance Tab on page 11 4 Printed Packaging Material Tab on page 11 5 Related Specs Tab on page 11 5 CSS Tab on page 11 7 Supporting Documents Tab on page 11 7 References Tab on page 11 7 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 11 8 DOODOODUCDODODODO O 11 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons except Calculate are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are Y E Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Calculate Performs all custom data calculations This button is displayed when the specification is in edit mode Calculation also happens when you save your specification Create Copy Create a new copy of the current packaging material specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing
360. ted Specs CSS Supporting Documents References Approral Audit Trail Inputs Step Material Oty G L Yid Wo Batch ilal oF a 0 00000 lb 1 00000 o 00000 lb 0 00000 ij oF FG o 00000lb 1 00000 0 00000 lb 0 00000 2 iis e FQ 0 00000 le 1 00000 0 00000 lb 0 00000 0 00000 lb 0 00000 lb 0 00000 Add New Calculate 3 Next click on the first row and start to type the name of the material As you type a GSM search is performed and specifications are presented for your selection Use your mouse or up down arrow to select the desired material We refer to this feature as Auto Complete Note Once materials are defined for a given row the grid will re sequence often placing the material at the bottom of the grid 6 13 USD o O O Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Figure 6 8 Auto Complete feature Summary Formulation Process Inputs Step Material or sugar Spec Spec Name oO 7505 001 a0 7506 001 me Add New Calculate Ext Data Sugar Granulated Sugar Liquid 67 5 Related Specs Equivalent de C55 Supporting Documents References Qty Ha 0 00000 b Status Belt ma 0 00000 lb Draft Ha 0 00000 Ib 0 00000 b Approval Audit Trail G L 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 Yld 0 00000 Ib 0 00000 lb 0 00000 lb 0 00000 Ib OL OL BLE 4 Repeat the previous step for each row to populate the entire grid as figure 6 Figure 6 9 Populated
361. tegory The category of the output item This category selection uses the ingredient specification category listing When an output is marked as External this will be the category given to the ingredient specification When an output is referenced this is a read only view of the referenced specification s category 6 51 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Subcategory The subcategory of the output item This category selection uses the ingredient specification category listing When an output is marked as External this will be the category given to the ingredient specification When an output is referenced this is a read only view of the referenced specification s category Group The group of the output item This category selection uses the ingredient specification category listing When an output is marked as External this will be the category given to the ingredient specification When an output is referenced this is a read only view of the referenced specification s category Originator Displays the first and last name of the user who created the output item When an output is marked as External this will be the originator given to the ingredient specification Spec Displays the system defined number for the output item and or ingredient specification Issue Displays the system defined issue number for the output item and or ingredient specification Internal and External outputs can only be issued when the
362. the Input Items Sub Section is handled in the same manner as adding items to the Formulation tab s Input Item section Therefore please review Adding Materials To The Inputs Grid on page 6 11 Additional features are available in this sub section include Consume From Step Using Consume From Step we are able to link steps together to reflect how material moves from step to step This button specifically allows you to associate the internal output from a previous step to the step you are currently defining Figure 6 24 Consume From Step dialog box Consume From Step Done Cancel Spec Name Yield Available Yield Consumed Yield Remaining Step 2 Output 5090429 001 0 00000 lb 0 02500 llo 0 00000 oy 0 02500 lb a Step 3 Output 5090430 001 0 00000 lb 0 00000 b 0 00000 oy 0 00000 lb Use the following fields in this dialog box to provide amounts and pull in the specified steps outputs Spec Name Name of the specification to consume Yield Available The yielded amount from the step that created the output Yield Consumed A portion of the yielded amount already used by another step e Yield Remaining The amount that is available for use in one or more steps Select the step to consume and then click Done The dialog box closes and GSM updates the Input Items section with the updated quantities e Order Items Click to change the sort order of the inputs GSM displays the Order Inputs dialog box as figur
363. the icon to view a list of BOM items their issues and their statuses a Delete Click the delete icon 4 to delete the BOM item Three columns containing the substitute material icon item history icon and the delete icon display at the end of the inputs grid as figure 6 16 shows below Figure 6 16 Inputs grid columns Cost 100 ED 100 Use the Outputs section on the Formulation tab to manage the materials that are created from a given step on a formulation specification The Formulation tab has simplified functionality in the area of managing outputs Some examples of features related to outputs available on the Process tab that are not available on the Formulation tab include Creating more than one output for a given step e Dispersing an internal output so that it can be used as an input into more than one of the following steps Defining alternate outputs If these scenarios are important for your organization then you will want to consider using the Process tab Note Outputs are automatically created when a new step is defined For this reason you will not find an Add New button in this section Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Figure 6 17 below shows the Outputs section Figure 6 17 Outputs section Outputs Output Input Material Output Type Qty Process G L WaterG L Yld Formula 1 Step 1 Output 5090348 001 Internal 5 00000 kg 5 0
364. the purchase and shipment 16 3 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Compliance Tab This tab is not currently used but is present for legacy purposes only Related Specs Tab Delivered Material Packing Specifications That Rely on This Specification Section This section is the only one in the Related Specs tab Information in this section is read only so you cannot associate specifications here The section displays the associations that have been made to this labeling specification from a delivered material packing specification Figure 16 2 Delivered Material Packing Specifications that rely on this Specification section Delivered Material Packing Specifications that rely on this Specification Packing Spec Packing Spec Name 5077516 001 Shipping Carton Supporting Documents Tab The Label Specifications Supporting Documents tab consists of three sections a Attachments For discussion of this commonly used section please see Attachments Section on page 3 22 a Supporting Documents The only document type available for use in this section is rich text For more information please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 a DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 References Tab The Label Specifications References tab consists of two sections Q Activities For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Secti
365. this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 a Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 a Environmental Waste Discussed below at Environmental Waste Section on page 11 5 Chapter 11 Packaging Material Specifications Environmental Waste Section This section provides a place to log known waste materials for this specification material along with other relevant attributes required for environmental waste reporting Figure 11 4 Environmental Waste section Environmental Waste Material Class Weight Percent Recyclable Composed of Recycled Materials Fa GREEN GLASS 1 lb SO So o0 yo Add New Printed Packaging Material Tab Printed Packaging Material Section The Printed Packaging Material section the only section in the Printed Packaging Material tab contains the list of printed packaging specifications linked to a packaging material specification Figure 11 5 Printed Packaging Material section Printed Packaging Material Spec E Spec Name F 5083312 001 Corrugated Washing Machine box J 5077609 001 ACME PROMO CARTON Add New Related Specs Tab The Related Specs tab contains the following sections a Sub Components Discussed below at Sub Components Section on page 11 J Q Packing Configurations Specifications Discussed below at Packing Configuration Specifications Section on page 11 6 Q Equipment Specificat
366. tilled White 100 Grain 1 00000 kg 1 00000 kg 100 00000 21 5077413 001 Packaging Composition Map Spec Name Yield Available Yield Consumed Steps Section You can use the Steps section of the Formulation tab to describe procedures that must be performed to create an output material Steps themselves are merely natural milestones in the manufacturing process To further differentiate steps you can add step instructions to clearly articulate the actions that are being performed during the step This section offers multi add capability GSM automatically names added steps as Step X where X is name of step Key fields include Step name Name of step Step Qty Total amount of inputs assigned to the step Step Yield Total amount of inputs used in the step after gain loss has been factored in Use the delete icon to delete a step You cannot delete a step that creates items being used Click the step instructions icon to add instructions for each step These instructions will display on Process tab and in print details 6 22 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Process Tab Steps Section Formulation Specifications The Process tab has many of the same uses as the Formulation tab in that you can add remove view and update inputs outputs steps and the various pieces of data associated with these areas However the Process tab does provide the user additional capabilities that are n
367. tion Key sections in the References tab include a Suppliers section This section only appears on trade items that are identified as co pack For discussion of this commonly used section please see Suppliers Section on page 3 25 a Activities section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Activities Section on page 3 25 Q Specification Dependencies section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Specification Dependencies Section on page 3 27 Q Related Documents section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Related Documents Section on page 3 27 Approval Audit Trail Tab For discussion of this tab please see Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 2 11 4 25 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 4 26 Global Specification Management User Guide CHAPTER 5 Process Specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding process specifications Topics in this chapter include a Process Specification Integration into Formulation Specification Feature Process Specification Integration into Formulation Specification Feature All features related to process specifications have been integrated into the formulation specification process For more information refer to Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications 5 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 5 2 Global Specification Management U
368. tion Management User Guide CHAPTER 7 Menu Item specifications This chapter presents an overview of the capabilities of Global Specification Management regarding menu item specifications Topics in this chapter include Page Level Functions Summary Tab Build Tab Packaging Tab Compliance Tab Related Specs Tab Supporting Documents Tab References Tab Approval Audit Trail Tab Doo OOO O O O Overview The Menu Item Specifications page consists of the following tabs Summary Tab on page 7 3 Build Tab on page 7 4 Packaging Tab on page 7 5 Compliance Tab on page 7 6 Related Specs Tab on page 7 10 Supporting Documents Tab on page 7 11 References Tab on page 7 11 Approval Audit Trail Tab on page 7 11 DOODOODUCDODODO O 7 1 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Page Level Functions In the upper right corner of the page is a row of buttons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons except Calculate are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are 7 2 Y E Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process Installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Calculate Performs all custom data calculations This button is displayed when the specification is in
369. tion as a global regional standard Figure 7 10 Alternate Standards section Alternate Standards Spec Spec Name 5079864 001 Child Alternate menu item 7 10 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 7 Menu Item Specifications Supporting Documents Tab The Menu Item Specification Supporting Documents tab consists of four sections Q Supporting Documents The document types available are Product Facts Sheet Attachments Procedures and Rich Text For discussion of this commonly used section please see Supporting Documents Section on page 3 12 Q DRL Documents For discussion of this commonly used section please see DRL Documents Section on page 3 18 Q Testing Protocols For discussion of this commonly used section please see Testing Protocols Section on page 3 21 Q Nutrient Profile Discussed below at Nutrient Profile Section on page 7 11 Nutrient Profile Section In this section you can create new nutrient profiles or associate the menu item specification to existing nutrient profiles Figure 7 11 Nutrient Profile section Nutrient Profile Profile Nutrient Profile Active Profile ada Status 5077592 001 Nutrient Profile Tomato Puree 8 6 Total Solids E Monday Approved October 04 2008 5077592 002 Nutrient Profile Tomato Puree 8 6 Total Solids E Tuesday Draft October 05 2008 Note Nutrient profiles are considered separate documents from the menu item specification and have indepe
370. tion specification Therefore it is merely a tool to help accurately reflect inefficiencies or loss during a manufacturing process a Referenced Materials can exist outside the context of a single formulation Examples include The item is both purchased and manufactured An organization buys the item and can choose to resell it In this case the ingredient can and would exist whether a formulation specification was ever created The item can be manufactured using different processes or procedures Multiple formulas can point to a single output ingredient Each formula can represent acceptable alternatives for manufacturing the output In this situation the technical data for the output represents the goal for any given formulation rather than the result Therefore technical data does not transfer from the formulation to the referenced output Separate and distinct approval process or security Some companies manage formulation processing instructions differently than materials These differences can include different approval processes and or different security rights By referencing an ingredient as an output the output maintains all the functionality related to raw material ingredients including its own workflow and security permissions Therefore the output ingredient can be approved using a different workflow and follow different security rules than the formulation specification that produces the output 6 3 Agile Product Lifecycl
371. tions to compare and click Add Specs The specifications search dialog box closes and your selected specifications appear in the Specification s box 4 Click Run to generate the report GSM generates a Spec Comparison Report in Adobe Acrobat PDF format Printing Specifications Where available you can print specifications by clicking Print at the upper right of the specification page thereby opening the print dialog box Options in the printing dialog box vary according to specification type as discussed below Printing Trade Specifications Trade specifications follow a unique printing method The printing dialog box can contain many sections depending on what items are related to that specification The sections include Documentation Format and Packaging Hierarchy The print dialog box for trade specifications may contain sections for additional related items 2 13 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Documentation Format Section The Documentation Format section shown in figure 2 20 contains fields that directly affect the format of the printed output Figure 2 20 Documentation Format section Print Close Documentation Format Business Unit Acme North America Please select the business unit on behalf of which you would like to i Paper Size US letter Include Cross Reference Document Controk controlled Copy Uncontrolled Copy Print Template pefsult e Include Activity Summa
372. tive Version Revision Document Id 0000218 001 Version Revision 1 0 Originator James Wilson Document Date 7 25 2009 Effective Date Expiration Date I Publish to Supplier Portal Attachments Title File Name File Size Additional Unique Title envelope verl gif 0B Unigue Tite document gif OB West Documents West Division doc 39 B Description Section This section contains the overall identifying information of the DRL document It includes the document title description and status It also lists which catalogs business units and classifications the document is assigned to 3 19 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Version Revision Section Use this information to track versions and revisions for the document This section includes Document ID e Originator of the document e Document dates Reason for any revision if revised e Whether or not the document is publishable to the Supplier Portal Attachments Section This table lists all of the attachments added to the document It includes attachment title file name and file size You can view an attachment by clicking its file name Adding DRL Catalog and Document References In order to add a DRL catalog or document you need to place the specification in edit mode You can add DRL catalogs and or documents to the DRL section in two ways Browsing Click Add Browse The DRL browse dialog box displays You can link an entire catalog of documents
373. to a specification and can be broken out by known to contain does not contain and may contain Figure 3 8 Additives section Additives tk t o Max 100g Source Comments nown to Contain g Hydrochloric Acid 1 00000 ppr Sodium Ferrocyanide g 2 00000 ppr PE Acesulfame E Acetone Acetylic Acid Esters of Mono amp Diglycerides Does not contain Additives Max Source Comments may contain 1009 Nuts z 450 00000 residue ma P t Pectin as a thickening agent A 3 7 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Adding Additives To add items Click the Additives link to open the Additives dialog box Select the additives to add on the left Click the add selected data icon i gt to move your selections to the right When you have made all of your selections click Done The page reloads and the Additives table displays the additives that you selected oF Q N To add edit the Max 100g and Source Comments values 1 Click the edit row icon gt to the left of the row to edit 2 Once done editing click the apply changes icon to apply your changes or click the undo icon to cancel your changes Note Max 100g values and Source Comment values are only available for Known to Contain and May Contain fields Removing Additives To remove a single additive click the delete icon 4 when the row is open for edit Note As described above removing values is
374. to the ingredient as the regulatory breakdown The tab consists of the following sections Regulatory BOM Described below in Regulatory BOM Section on page 6 57 e Theoretical Breakdown Described below in Theoretical Breakdown Section on page 6 58 e Regulatory Breakdown Described below in Regulatory Breakdown Section on page 6 58 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 6 Formulation Specifications Note To view the Composition tab users must have the formula classifications associated with all regulatory breakdowns for the formula items An error message displays for users without access Only the specification name will display to a user who does not have permissions WFA and BU security to read a formula item Figure 6 54 shows the Composition tab Figure 6 54 Output dialog Composition tab Summary Yield Composition Nutrition Compliance Ext Data Regulatory BOM Item Formulation Seasoned Cooked Pork 82 30453 Vinegar Distilled White 100 Grain 17 69547 Comp 1 50 00000 Comp 2 50 000005 Theoretical Breakdown Item Formulation Comp 1 0 9417 4 Comp 2 0 04774 Seasoned Cooked Pork 82 30453 Regulatory Breakdown Description Restrictions Formulation Classifications y GSM Users Tags Suppress Printing Do Not Publish to Supplier Regulatory Automatically Refresh Component Description Country Of Origin Complies With Formulation Total Solids Function Critical Comp 2 6
375. tons that trigger actions that can affect the entire page All of these buttons except Calculate are displayed when the specification is in read mode These buttons and their functions are Y E 9 2 Edit Place the entire page in edit mode so that you can modify it Report Depending on the configuration of your Agile PLM for Process installation this button may or may not appear on certain specifications Click Report to launch the Reporting application Calculate Performs all custom data calculations This button is displayed when the specification is in edit mode Calculation also happens when you save your specification Create Copy Create a new copy of the current product specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 CACS Screen the current specification using Computer Aided Compliance Screening CACS an application that you can use to inspect materials for fitness against any number of user defined screens Appears only if your installation includes CACS For more information on CACS please refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Computer Aided Compliance Screening User Guide Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing a product specification please see Printing Other Specifications on page 2 19 Act Create
376. ts This tab appears when the smart issue request is completed or failed This tab displays the new hierarchies created as a result of the smart issue e Audit Details and a status for the smart issue request Defining the Smart Issue Request Use the Summary tab to define the smart issue request To define the smart issue request 1 Enter a Title This field is required The system automatically assigns the Originator Status Request Create Date and Last Edit date 2 Assign an owner of the smart issue request The owner s of a request will be the only users allowed to edit and issue the request Click the Owners hyperlink to display a search page as figure 21 13 shows below Owners is a required field Figure 21 13 Owners search page Cancel Search Criteria Last Name Starts With w i more criteria z Load El Save Search Reset Search Results Results Per Page 10 Selected Items David Smith Remove Clear Done 3 Use the search form to select users or groups that own the smart issue request 21 11 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process 21 12 4 Click Done The search form closes and your selections display in the Owners field a To designate the smart issue request as private check the Private flag By default all users with the SMART_ISSUE_READER role will be able to read the smart issue request If a request is marked as Private only the users added to the
377. tton only displays if the Formulation and Compliance F amp C bundle has been installed Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing a nutrient profile please see Printing Other Specifications on page 2 19 Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Appears only if you have editorial control over the specification Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specification or document from one workflow step to another For more information on workflows please see Transitioning a Workflow on page 2 7 Resolve Workflow Re resolve the specification to a workflow present only when you are logged in with a user account that has the user role of CAN_RERESOLVE_WORKFLOWS The Nutrient Profile Summary tab consists of the following five sections 8 2 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 8 Nutrient Profiles Q Summary Information For discussion of this commonly used section please see Summary Information Section on page 3 2 a Weight Volume Serving Information Discussed below at Weight
378. uct Lifecycle Management for Process e Classification Used to determine label claim eligibility This is also used to filter label claim determination rule comments so the user can view only the comments that pertain to the selected classification Amount Per Serving Used to determine the Per Serving values on the nutrition panel Serving Size label Serving Pack label Used for labeling Special Attributes Choose from a prepopulated list of special attributes maintained by your administrator Ingredient Statements Section The Ingredient Statements section contains the ingredient statement for general use in labeling Nutrition Panel Tab Nutrient Profile Section Nutrient Profile the sole section in the Nutrition Panel tab stores the nutritional Information for the related specifications as shown in figure 8 3 below As shown in figure 8 4 you can declare nutrient data by volume if density has been defined or by mass as shown in the dialog box in figure 8 2 below Figure 8 2 Per 100g Per100mL dialog box 2 Oracle Windows Internet Explorer ala Ed Please enter the Per value O Convert Entered Values to UOM internet F 100 This data can appear within formulation specifications and you can use this data when determining label claims 8 4 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 8 Nutrient Profiles Figure 8 3 Nutrient Profile section showing the Per 100g column Mutrient P
379. uct specification and consists of two sections Q Ingredient Statements Discussed below at Ingredient Statements Section on page 9 4 Q Formula For discussion of this commonly used section please see Breakdown Formula Section on page 3 22 Ingredient Statements Section Compliance Tab 9 4 The Ingredient Statements section contains the ingredient statement for the product specification You can input the ingredient statement in two ways e GSM can derive it from a formulation that you select To select a formulation click the hyperlinked Ingredient Statement field label and select one of the formulas on your product specification The page refreshes and the ingredient statement will be populated based on the components and their composition listed in the formula you selected e You can manually enter this information in the Ingredient Statement field Figure 9 3 Ingredient Statements section Ingredient Statements Combined Statement apples wax UY The Compliance tab includes the following sections Q Extended Attributes For discussion of this commonly used section please see Extended Attributes Section on page 3 29 Q Custom Sections For discussion of this commonly used section please see Custom Sections on page 3 29 Q Compliance Information section For discussion of this commonly used section please see Compliance Information Section on page 3 6 Q Allergens Intolerances and Additives For discussi
380. ve made all of your selections click Done The page reloads and the Complies With field displays your choices Removing Compliance Items To remove one or more compliance items 1 Click the Complies With link to open the Compliance dialog box 2 Select the compliance items to remove on the right holding down the Ctrl key to select multiple compliance items 3 6 Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 3 Commonly Used Sections 3 Click the remove selected data icon 5 to remove the selected items from the selection box 4 Click Done to commit your changes The page reloads and the Complies With field reflects your changes Some specifications contain an rollup icon T to the right of the Complies With field This icon opens the compliance roll up dialog box Note For the specification to be marked as compliant based on the roll up compliance items marked as negative only have to be declared on one item those not marked as negative must be declared on all formula items Compliance roll up for does not contain is supported for trade specifications but is not supported for menu item specifications Additives Allergens and Intolerances Sections Note The Additives Allergens and Intolerances sections all follow the same procedures This section demonstrates the use of additives but the same behavior can be used for allergens or intolerances The Additives section contains the additive data linked
381. would like to just append to the list make sure the Append to existing list checkbox is selected See figure 4 20 below Figure 4 20 Label Claims Determination dialog box Label Claim Determination Close Claims Determination Comparative Reference Product Label Claim Authority Label Claim Authorit 5 FDA Nutrient Claims 2005 Display Label Claims Applicable Claims Push Label Claims Dl Append to existing list 4 16 Label Claim Type of Claim Saturated Fat Low Yes No Comments Calculations 5g Saturated Fat per RACC Individual Foods 1 6 910891 Calories From Saturated Fat gor less per reference amount and 15 or less of calories From saturated Fat ATTENTION Mext to all saturated Fat claims must declare the amount of cholesteral iF 2 mg or more per reference amount and the amount of total Fat iF more than 3 g per reference amount for 0 5 q or more of total Fat For Saturated Fat Free Lite or Light w Calories disclosure Cholesterol Free Cholesterol Low 4 mg Cholesterol per RATC Individual Foods 20 5 g Saturated Fat per RACC mg or less per reference amount and per 50 g of Food if reference amount is small Also Cholesterol claims are only allowed when Food Global Specification Management User Guide Chapter 4 Related Specs Tab Trade Specifications The Related Specs tab contains the following sections Q Ingredient Specification Di
382. xt Data Tab on page 6 62 Specification Attributes Tab This tab gives attributes of the ingredient specification and includes the following sections Combined Ingredient Statement Described below in Combined Ingredient Statement Section on page 6 43 Ingredient Attributes Described below in Ingredient Attributes Section on page 6 44 e Reconstitution Equivalency Described below in Reconstitution Equivalency Section on page 6 44 Combined Ingredient Statement Section The data in the From Spec column is pulled directly from the specification from which you created the formulation specification 6 43 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Ingredient Attributes Section This section provides ingredient attributes Key fields include Total Solids Percentage of the specification that is not water Final Density Conversion factor applied when converting the specification from mass to volume Edible Portion Percentage of the material that is edible Reconstitution Equivalency Section You can set up reconstitution equivalency rules to assist in the management of the reconstitution process in the listed ingredient order LIO feature These rules define how the water percentage of a given ingredient affects the label naming of a product For example you could set up a rule by which if the percentage of water in an ingredient called reconstituted orange juice meets or exceeds a preset level the name
383. y time via the Settings button and the path will be saved when the formulation specification is saved Profile and Preferences is described in detail in the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Getting Started Guide Calculation paths control the following e Which fields are editable e Certain system actions e Which type of user messages display based on the calculation Tags and rules a Units Of Measure When a formulation specification is created the default unit of measure UOM is derived from the user s Profile and Preferences Therefore any rows added to the Inputs grid will initially be presented using the UOM Similar to BOM calculation paths the default UOM for a formula can be changed via the Settings button Upon making a change within Settings any new row added will correspond to the formula s default VOM For a given material a standard list of UOMs is presented by default This list can change if e Density is is not defined on a given input ingredient specification If it is defined additional UOMs associated with volume will appear in the UOM drop down 6 17 Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Explicit UOMs are defined on a given input ingredient specification If explicit UOMs are defined they will also appear in the UOM drop down e Ifyour site is configured to only use explicit UOMs then the material will only display UOMs described on the ingredient specification Working
384. your specification Create Copy Create a new copy of the current trade specification For discussion of this commonly used function please see Creating a Copy of an Existing Specification on page 2 1 CACS Screen the current specification using Computer Aided Compliance Screening CACS an application that you can use to inspect materials for fitness against any number of user defined screens Appears only if your installation includes CACS For more information on CACS please refer to the Agile Product Lifecycle Management for Process Computer Aided Compliance Screening User Guide L10 Create a new LIO profile automatically referencing the active nutrient profile attached to the trade specification The LIO button only displays if the Formulation and Compliance F amp C bundle has been installed Print Opens a dialog box through which you can print the current specification in a variety of formats For more information on printing a trade specification please see Printing Trade Specifications on page 2 13 Act Create a primary activity or mini workflow for this specification For more information about this function please see Chapter 20 Activities Item History Display all issues of the specification that exist in a Spec History table along with the reason for creating each issue and other identifying information For more information on this feature please see Item History on page 2 3 Workflow Move the current specifi

Agile PLM for Process Global Specification Management User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents